^^^ 
 
 IMHHM^IHR
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 > 
 
 THE LIBRARY 
 
 OF 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY 
 OF CALIFORNIA 
 
 LOS ANGELES
 
 
 UWTJ 
 
 , TE'XAS 
 
 '
 
 THE 
 
 STYLE 
 
 A Complete Stenographic Text-book. 
 
 PITMAN SYSTEM. 
 
 FOP Class, Correspondence and Self-Instruction. 
 
 BY 
 
 ELDON MORAN. 
 
 AUTHOR THE "MOHAN SERIES " OF STENOGRAPHIC INSTRUCTION 
 BOOKS AND riSESIDKNT AMERICAN HOME UNIVERSITY. 
 
 THIRTY-KINTH EDITION 
 
 MOBAN SHOKT-HAND COMPANY 
 
 ST. Louis, U. 8. A. 
 1909
 
 Popular Short-Hand Books. 
 
 MOHAN -I'll MAN SERIES. 
 
 Over 80,000 of these books have been sold. 
 
 THE REPORTING STYLE - - 1.50 
 
 Complete text- book. Practical, theoretical 
 and professional. 40,000 sold. 812 pages. 
 
 KEY TO THE REPORTING STYLE" - 200 
 
 tugraved. 
 
 POCKET SHORT-HAND DICTIONARY 1.00 
 Contains 0,000 engraved characters, for all 
 doubtful words. 
 
 SHORT-HAND STUDENTS MANUAL - 1.00 
 Amanuensis Course for high schools and 
 "liDim- study." Simple and easy; best book 
 for the average student- 144 pages. 
 
 100 VALUABLE SUGGESTIONS - 1.00 
 Practical and useful advice and information; 
 serviceable to student, teacher and reporter. 
 
 HIGHER LESSONS IN SHORT-HAND - .50 
 For advanced and professional work. 
 
 SHORT-HAND SIGN-BOOK - - - .35 
 All word and phrase signs arranged alphabet- 
 ically; flexible; vest-pocket edition. 
 
 SHORT-HAND NUTSHELL - - - .25 
 The Pitman System boiled down. Graded 
 Lesson Series; handy size. 
 
 SHORT-HAND FOR BUSY PEOPLE - .10 
 Presents proper characters Jor all most fre- 
 quently occurring words. Vest Pocket Booklet. 
 
 SKILL CERTIFICATE, single copy five 
 
 cents; per dozen .26 
 
 A pocket Diploma. Indicates student's qualifi- 
 cations, speed and experience. 
 
 INTRODUCTION CARD - - . .10 
 For stenographers and students who wish 
 Short- hand correspondents. 
 
 Published and for sale by 
 
 THE MORAN SHORT-HAND CO 
 
 Specimen Page* Frtt. ST. T,ouis. 
 
 OOPYKIGHTID
 
 At this date, August, 1906, the 38th edition 
 
 of the Reporting Style is printed. The publishers are grateful 
 to the two hundred Teachers and College Proprietors who 
 have seen fit to adopt this manual on its merits. Its novel 
 features have been thoroughly tested, and its reputation estab- 
 lished as a satisfactory exponent of the Pitman System, and a 
 simple and practical text-book. 
 
 The engraving is abundant and most excellent in quality. 
 The subject is presented in an easy and progressive series of 
 graded lessons. The learner is drilled in writing exercises 
 which contain words most used in business correspondence. 
 Permanent outlines only are given; that is, the student is never 
 allowed to express any word by a long form which must after- 
 wards be unlearned to give place for the short or reporting 
 form. This is now universally regarded as the correct method. 
 The explanation is simple, and the book is well adapted for 
 use by young learners. An important advantage also possessed 
 by but few such works, is that the subject is exhaustively 
 treated in a single, compact volume. A key to all the exer- 
 cises, both letter-press and engraved, has recently been pub- 
 lished for the convenience of teachers, and as an aid to students 
 who undertake self instruction. The series has just been 
 further enriched also by the addition of a Pocket Dictionary 
 containing engraved outlines for six thousand carefully se- 
 lected words and phrases. 
 
 Two improvements are made in the present edition : 
 (1st) Four additional pages of practice matter are added in 
 the early part. (2d) Many hyphens have been removed from 
 the exerei.-es throughout, requiring a correspondingly less 
 amount of phrasing. These two steps are taken most willingly 
 in response to suggestions offered by many friendly critics. 
 
 448626
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 Introduction - ... 5 
 
 Long and Short Hand Compared 10 
 
 General Directions - - - 11 
 
 Definition of Terms - - 18 
 
 LESSON'S. 
 
 I. Consonant Alphabet, 
 
 Sec 1- - - - 14 
 II. Consonant Alphabet, 
 
 Sec. 2- - 16 
 
 III. Word-Signs - 22 
 
 IV. Bay (upward R) and 
 
 Phrasing 
 
 V. Long Vowels 
 
 - 26 
 
 - 32 
 
 VI. Diphthongs and the S- 
 
 Circle- 
 
 VII. Short Vowels - 
 VIII Consonant Position 
 IX. S-Circle Junctions 
 X. Phraseography - 
 XI. Sez-Circle, Emp and 
 
 Coalescents - - 64 
 XII. Double Consonants, 
 
 the L-hook - - 70 
 Xin. R-hook Series, Div. 1 - 76 
 XIV. " " Div. 2- 80 
 
 XV. Triple Consonant Se- 
 
 ries 
 XVL Rel-hook, Aspirate 
 
 Tick and Dot - 
 XVIL W-hoofcs, Brief Way 
 
 and Yay 
 
 XVIII. F-hook ... 
 
 XIX. N-hook - - - 
 
 XX. " , Continued 
 
 XXI. Shun-hook - - 
 
 XXII. S-shun and In-hooks - 114 
 
 XXIIL St and Str Loops - - 118 
 
 XXIV. LengtheningPrinciple- 123 
 
 XXV. Halving Principle - 128 
 
 XXVI. Added D - 133 
 
 XXVII Shortened Double Con- 
 
 - 84 
 
 - 88 
 y 
 
 - 92 
 . % 
 
 -100 
 
 - 104 
 -108 
 
 sonants - 138 
 XXVin. Half - length Final 
 
 Hooked Stems- - 1-12 
 
 XXIX. Half-leugth L, R, M,N- 147 
 
 XXX Intervocalization - 152 
 
 XXXI. Prefixes - - . - 157 
 
 XXXII. Affixes - - - - 163 
 
 XXXIII. Variable Letters - - 167 
 
 XXXIV. Consonant Position - 1T3 
 XXXV. Vocalization - - - 182 
 
 XXXVL Primitive and Deriva- 
 tive - - - - 192 
 XXXVTI. Syllabication - - - 200 
 XXXVIII General Principles - 805 
 XXXIX. Names and Negatives- 228 
 XL. Expedients and Punct- 
 uation ... 227 
 XXI. Numbers, Special Rules 
 
 and Suggestions - 232 
 XLII. Rules for Phrasing 
 XLIII. Amanueusis Reporting- 251 
 XLIV. 
 
 Continued 
 
 XLV. Speech Reporting - 
 XL VI. Convention Reportii^ 
 XLVII. Law Reporting - - 209 
 XLVIU. Objections, Rulings, Ex- 
 ceptions, Exhibits, 
 and Indices - - 277 
 XXIX. Transcripts and Profes- 
 sional Conduct - 285 
 L. Systems and Improve- 
 ments - - - 290 
 Vocabulary - 2;c 
 
 Spiritual Freedom - - - - 310 
 
 Fac-Similes 311 
 
 Notes, 21, 48, 62, 83, 87, 117, 126, 
 
 132, 137, 141, 156, 226. 
 Suggestions to Teachers, 21, 30, 
 31, 37, 43, 49, 53. 63, 75, 91, 95, 
 103, 112, 113, 146.
 
 INTRODUCTORY. 
 
 SYSTEM. This book presents what is known as the Amer- 
 ican style of the Pitman System. Speaking broadly, we 
 regard the Pitman as vastly superior to those few systems 
 which differ radically from it, and a more desirable acquisi- 
 tion than a knowledge of any one of the several others which 
 are based directly upon it. For all English speaking coun- 
 tries it is unquestionably the method of the future. 
 
 TEACHING. The aim of this work is to pre.-ent the Pit- 
 man System in the concrete not merely in the abstract; to 
 teach the how of short-hand, rather than the why of it. The 
 method of instruction employed is practical an<J progressive. 
 The principles are taken up and explained in an orderly man- 
 ner, and the student directed how to apply them correctly in 
 the work of forming the characters rapidly and artistically. 
 Two or three new principles only are introduced in a single 
 lesson, and a list of words inserted which are to be written 
 in accordance therewith. The words chosen for this purpose 
 are those in common use. The drill which enables the learn- 
 er to write and read them with the required speed, fixes the 
 characters firmly in the memory. No word or phrase is in- 
 troduced until the learner has been fully directed how to 
 write it in the proper manner. The student who, taking the 
 lessons in turn, masters each, will upon completing the course 
 be a competent writer of short-hand. 
 
 PLAN. Each lesson is composed in part of one or more 
 pages of engraved matter. Each full page plate contains, 1st, a 
 list of words illustrating the principles found in the same 
 lesson; 2nd, a list of words and phrase signs falling under 
 these principles; 3rd, also list of word-forms, and series of 
 sentences. A key to each plate appears on the opposite page. 
 A dotted base line is used in all engraved matter.
 
 6 INTRODUCTORY. 
 
 Also, as matter for writing practice, each lesson is sup- 
 plied with a list of selected words, a series of phrases, -in ex- 
 ercise, a speed sentence, and an engraved exerci-e f6A*eauing 
 practice. Suggestions, and hints to teachers, occur from 
 time to time at the close of the lessons. The exercises are 
 composed of sayings and proverbs, carefully selected from the 
 best authors, ancient and modern. By writing them repeat- 
 edly these wise maxims become familiar, and give the student 
 the advantage of a mind stored with the best precepts of all 
 countries. The course or lessons is followed by a Vocabulary 
 of word and phrase signs, and difficult outlines. 
 
 Hyphens are used to indicate which words are to be 
 phr?sed. Difficult words are marked with a star, and th -ir 
 outlines are given in the vocabulary. As a convenience : n 
 teaching, the word-lists are numbered by line. The thrt3 
 figures given parenthetically at the close of each exercise in- 
 dicate, 1st, the number of words contained; 2nd, the min- 
 utes and seconds in which it should be written; 3rd, the time 
 in which the notes are to be read afterwards. To illustrate, 
 the figures (175-5-2) at the close of exercise 6, p. 43, indicate 
 that the exercise contains 175 words; that it is to be written 
 in 5 minutes, and the notes to be read in 2 minutes. As a 
 rule, the student will be expected to write the exercise in 
 schedule time, before proceeding to the next lesson. But this 
 is not required of pupi s who are quite young. On the other 
 hand, apt writers often make better time than is here required 
 
 To THE LEARNER. If possible, put yourself under the 
 tuition of a competent teacher. It will save you time and keep 
 you on the right track, which is important. But if you have 
 no instructor, you are recommended to compare your notes 
 frequently with the engraved pages. Criticise your own work. 
 At stated times write as some one dictates aloud to you, and 
 invariably read over your notes afterwards. 
 
 ELDON MORAN. 
 
 AMERICAN HOME UNIVERSITY, 
 
 St. Louis. October, 1898.
 
 LONG AXD SHORT HAND COMPARED. 
 
 The character ^^^^^. represents making. Separat- 
 ing the letters we have, "~^ m . a k ^^ ng=making. 
 The short vowel t in ing is not written. Nor is it strictly 
 necessary to write a, making usually being written simply 
 
 s~~~^ ~^^ The short method is six times swifter than the 
 
 long-hand, and there are six general principles by which the 
 common system is abbreviated, six steps, so to speak, in the 
 ladder leading from the old style up to the new. 
 
 I. A letter for a sound. In dough but two sounds are 
 heard, those of dando; nevertheless five letters, d-o-u-g-h, 
 are employed to express them. In short-hand but two letters 
 are required, one for each sound, thus |- dough. 
 
 II. A single stroke for a letter. The long-hand d is written 
 with five strokes of the pen, while the short-hand | d re- 
 quires but one; the long-hand o requires four strokes, the 
 short-hand - o but one. 
 
 III. Omission of vowels. It is possible to write almost 
 entirely without vowels. To illustrate, this sentence is 
 eas'.ly decipherable: "G-d s- -d 1-t th-r- b- 1-ght, -nd th-r- w-s 
 1-ght." This principle is utilized in. short-hand. 
 
 IV. Tfie use of word-signs. Several hundred abbrevia 
 tions, called word-signs, are employed; e. g., / ch for which, 
 r~ I for will, -N^WST for thing, ^_ v for have, ( th for think, 
 
 I o for before, etc. 
 
 V. Phraseography , or joining words together. In long- 
 hand, the pen is lifted from the paper upon the completion 
 of each word. In short-hand, from three to ten words are 
 written before this is necessary; e. g., It-is-better to-have-a 
 lion at-thc-head of -an army of sheep than-a sheep at-the-head 
 of-an army of -lions. 
 
 VI. The use of expedients. The most frequently recurring 
 phrases, such as, in-order-to, on-the-other-hand, from-time-to- 
 time, day -after-day, are represented by brief signs which 
 express two or more of the principal words of each.
 
 GENERAL DIRECTIONS. 
 
 1. Always write on ruled paper. 
 
 2. Hold your pen in a nearly upright position. 
 
 3. Use good black ink, and whatever pen you find most 
 satisfactory. The "Lady Falcon" is very good; also, 
 Gillott Nos. 803 and 404. The Esterbrook school pen, and 
 certain Nos. of the Spencerian are used by some. 
 
 4. Read over at least once everything you write. 
 
 5. Practice every day without fail, if only a few minutes. 
 
 6. Practice on no matter not found in your lessons. 
 
 7. Write by sound that is, what is read to you. If possi- 
 ble, get a fellow student with whom to practice daily. 
 
 8. Occassionally read over an exercise written a week 
 previously. 
 
 9. Each exercise should be written slowly at first, gradu- 
 ally increasing the speed afterwards. 
 
 10. Learn each word well, for it is always expressed by 
 the same character in actual reporting. 
 
 11. Form the habit of phrasing, or joining words to- 
 gether. 
 
 12. Write small ; remember the standard, one-sixth of an 
 inch. 
 
 13. Hold your note-book firmly by placing your left 
 thumb and finger two inches above the base line. 
 
 14. Always carry some short-hand matter with you to 
 study spare moments. 
 
 15. Whenever proper in writing, employ the characters 
 you have learned. 
 
 16. Corresponding with other short-hand students is 
 earnestly recommenced. 
 
 17. When thirty-five lessons have been learned, the stu- 
 dent's practice need not be limited to the exercises here given, 
 but easy newspaper articles, the prose part of school 
 readers, printed collections of business letters, and published 
 reports of law and convention proceedings, may be profita- 
 bly used for this purpose. Gre*.t care snould be taken to 
 write -each article properly the first time, and to re- write it 
 afterwards not less than half a dozen times with gradually 
 increased speed.
 
 TABLE OP ALPHABETS. 
 
 CONSONANT STEMS. 
 
 8 X B 
 
 4 I D 
 
 ?/ 
 
 Chay 
 
 / J 
 
 .K 
 ,Gay 
 
 LONG 
 
 VOWEL3 
 
 SHORT 
 
 VOWELS 
 
 IT 
 
 DIPH- \ 
 THOXGS 
 
 C]wEE-P 
 
 \V c ;WA-KK 
 
 ClWA-D 
 Y uJYA-LE 
 
 10 \^V 
 
 11 ( Ith 
 
 12 ( The 
 
 13 ) 3 
 
 15 Ish 
 
 16 
 
 VQWEL ALPHABET. 
 
 ET 
 
 A 
 
 D 
 
 A, 
 OW 
 
 OOALESCENT8. 
 
 OT 
 
 L 
 
 WA-LK 
 
 3JWO-KE 
 DfWOO 
 
 -jYO-KE 
 nlTOU-TH 
 
 17 
 
 18 
 
 20 
 21 
 
 ) 
 
 M 
 
 N 
 Ing 
 
 2 1 
 
 22 1 Way 
 f Yea 
 
 Hay. 
 
 
 I 
 
 TIT FOOT 
 
 I 
 
 l 
 WOW 
 
 EW 
 
 CJWE-ND 
 ciwA-PT 
 
 '{WO-T 
 
 3IWO-BSB 
 3JWOO- 
 
 ^JTOU-NO
 
 LESSON I. 
 
 CONSONANT ALPHABET SECTION I. 
 i. 1 I 4 7 8 
 
 \p \b |t |d /ch /j _k _g 
 8. For convenience the fifth letter, / ch, is called chay, 
 and the eighth, gay. All these characters are used in the 
 same way as the corresponding long-hand letters, with this 
 important exception, that no sign is ever employed unless 
 the sound it represents is actually heard when the word is 
 poken. Hence in add (ad), there is but oned; in dipped 
 (dipt), but one p; in ditch (dich), t is omitted because silent; 
 in lack (lak), c is dropped for the same reason; in dodge (doj), 
 silent d is omitted, and g represented by .;", because j exactly 
 expresses this sound; in gem (Jem), g also in short-hand is 
 better expressed by j; in cap (kap), c is not used because the 
 sound for which it stands is better expressed by k. 
 
 3. The first six letters, \ jt>, \ 5, | t t \ d, / ch, /j, 
 are always struck downwards; but horizontal letters, as k, 
 g, are written from left to right. The letters which prop- 
 erly express the consonant sounds of a word, when connect- 
 ed together, are called a word-form. This should be executed 
 without lifting the pen from the paper, each successive letter 
 being written in its proper direction, beginning where the 
 
 preceding one ends. For illustration, see / check, (Line 10, 
 
 Plate 1); / jap (L 11); Z-, jacket (L 12); \ page (L 18). 
 In some N of these | words, &sjack- / et t it will be 
 seen that one letter falls below the line; this is a common oc- 
 currence, and quite necessary. The rule for placing letters 
 is that the first downward letter should rest on the line. This 
 
 requires that some letters be written one space above, as k 
 
 in cage (L 13), which in this case is necessary in order that 
 //i the first downward stroke, may rest on the line. De- 
 vote leveral hours to this lesson. Copy Plate 1 twenty times. 
 Remember the three rules: 1st. Practice. 2d. Practice! 
 
 8d. PRACTICE ! 
 
 10
 
 Plate i. 
 
 P-l B-2 T 3 -4 CH-5 J-6 K-7 G-8 
 
 i \ \ I / / - \\ I I // = 
 
 * \\\\\ 1 1 1 1 I ///// 
 
 3 \\\\\ Mill ///// 
 
 * \\ \\ \\ \\ \\ \\ \\ \\ \\ \\ 
 
 5 II II | II II II II II II H 
 
 \\ 
 
 \\ 
 
 \\ 
 
 \\ 
 
 9 I I 
 
 lOCh-K, check 
 11 J P jap 
 12J-K. T. , 
 
 Z_ 
 
 13P-J. page ; K J. coge\ 
 
 \ / \ / \ / 
 
 14 B-J. budge JB. job\ / \ / \ / \ / 
 
 ~~J / / / / 
 
 15 J- K.Jack G-Ch. Gatch
 
 LESSON H. 
 CONSONANT ALPHABET SECTION II. 
 
 4. Letters 11 and 12 (L 1, plate 2) are named ( ith and 
 ( the, the first having the force of th in th-ink or bo-JA, and 
 the second the force of th in th-em or brea-/A-e. ) Z (No. 14) 
 has the force of z, and is equivalent to s in ha-s, wa-s, goe-s, 
 etc. Letters 15 and 16 are designated _J ish and J zhe, the 
 first having the power of sh in sh-a.ll or fi-sh, or of ci in 
 vi-c*-ous; the second that of s in plea-s-ure or z in sei-2-ure. 
 The name of the 17th letter is f~ lay. Letter 21, called 
 N^'fngr, is used to express ng, as in si-<7, bri-ng, etc.; also n 
 when it occurs before k or g, as in si--k, dri-n-k (pronounced 
 si-n^-k, dri-n<7-k). Letters 22, 28 and 24 are named "^ way, 
 
 f y a yi </ hay^ respectively. W and y in long-hand are 
 sometimes vowels, as in cow or day, and in such cases the 
 short-hand letters way and yay should not be used. W and 
 y are consonants only when they begin syllables, and vowels 
 when they end them. </ Hay has the force of h in A-eat or 
 A-ead, but must not be used to indicate h in physic (the di- 
 graph ph being equivalent to y), or in dough (in which A is 
 silent). ,/ Hay and f lay are written upwards. 
 
 5. Beginners write too large. One-sixth of an inch is the 
 proper length ; but young persons may write larger. The 
 light lines should be made as thin as possible, and the shad- 
 ed strokes only heavy enough to be readily distinguished. 
 In these respects the learner's work should, so far as prac- 
 ticable, conform to that shown in the engravings (plates 1 
 and 2). The earnest student will carefully compare and 
 rigidly correct his own exercises before submitting them to 
 his instructor for criticism. 
 
 6. The writer is very apt, at first, to allow | t and | d to 
 lean to the right, and to give too little slant to the oblique 
 letters. Give upright letters a slight inclination in the 
 opposite direction, and the others an extra degree of slant, 
 
 until the fault disappears. 
 
 12
 
 . v/ , 
 
 ^ 
 
 4 
 
 n^ X^JK, Plate 
 
 2=9. 
 
 ' V F i. V-10 . TH-11 TH-12 
 1 V V f ' ( 
 
 8-13 Z 14 SH-15 ZH-16 
 
 ) ) J 
 
 ^^ ^^^^^" 
 
 L-17 R-1S M-19 N-20 
 
 2 /" ^ ^ ^ 
 
 
 
 ^5" F _v V V V. Vw 
 
 KG -81 W 88 Y 38 H-84 
 
 ^ ^ f S 
 
 4 sn-zn J J J J 
 
 J J J J J J 
 
 5 TH-TH^zC ( ) ) ( 
 
 : ( )> ) > 
 
 6 L-Y, R-W f f ^^ 
 
 rr -^ rr ~\^ 
 
 7 M-H N-NG ^_^ <^ ^ 
 
 ^ -^ * ^_- ^ 
 
 8 RM-ML "\_^ __y^ ^N 
 
 ^ -y ~v^_/" 
 
 9 s-cn, J-M ^7 /^ ^ 
 
 / 
 
 7 A VA VA 
 
 11 L-V, lovo; Il-T,hat / X \^ ^ 
 
 ^ ?d }{ 
 
 1 ^V_ ^1 A. ^1 
 
 12 M-K-NG making ^_^ 
 
 - ^ - ^ 
 
 13 P-K X-K picnicV^^^ 
 
 v^ v__ ' 
 
 14 M M K mimic ^~^^-^_ 
 
 --^^_ ^-^-^_ 
 
 15 c / r 
 
 they /judge lake may 
 
 deluge lovely lady
 
 14 REPORTING 
 
 7. The pen may be held between the thumb and the first 
 and second fingers, not far from the nib, and i" a nearly up- 
 right position, as shown in fig. J (plate 2-B). Stenographers 
 often hold their pen as shown in fig. K, and the student may 
 sometimes adopt this manner with advantage. 
 
 KEY TO PLATE 2-B. 
 
 8. Figures. A shows attitude of straight letters; B and C 
 show direction of writing them, the rule being toward the 
 centre; D, E, F and O show attitude and curvature of tin- 
 bending stems ; H and 1 the direction of writing the curves ; 
 </ ami K ways of holding the pen. 
 
 L 1. Bell no may wake live so long hotel. 
 L 2. Early 'head bank anthem name thick shame. 
 In lines 8 to 6 will be found, in a different order, tin- 
 proper outlines for the words in Exercise 2. 
 
 9. It will be observed that several different words may 
 
 have the same outline, as | _ t-k for both take and took ; 
 
 I g-d for guide and giddy ; \ b-g for big and beg. 
 When ambiguity is likely to result, some of the vowels are 
 inserted. (Vowels are explained in lesson 5.) The need for 
 
 vowels is rare. In the sentence, "Those \ boys 
 bread," the context enables the reader to determine when 
 
 this character \ signifies big, and when beg. Here b-g 
 first denotes an adjective, and then a verb ; and it is a princi- 
 ple of language that the same character may represent two 
 or more different parts of speech without danger of conflict. 
 10. Straight letters should be made without crook or 
 curvature, curves bent uniformly throughout, and the shad- 
 ed strokes allowed to taper at the extremities. Words 
 whose outlines are horizontal, as ' "^ ^_^ making, or 
 
 ^~^^~ ^ mimic, should be written on the line. If the first 
 stroke is upward, as in t^r hotel, it should begin also on 
 the line. The system is so philosophically arranged that if a
 
 $Iate 2=33. 
 
 
 ^
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 shaded stroke be made too light, or a thin stroke be made too 
 heavy, no uncertainty of meaning is at all likely to result. 
 To illustrate, the sentence, "It is pest to bay as you go," is of 
 no doubtful signification. In this case, N^p and \ b are 
 interchanged, which is the practical result of shading the 
 wrong stem. It is another principle of language that both 
 sounds in any pair of cognates, as \ p and \ 6, | t and | d, 
 V^^and ^_ v; etc., may safely be expressed by the same 
 sign. Hence, strictly, shading is not necessary at all in this 
 system; but since it materially improves the legibility of 
 short-hand notes, it should not be neglected. 
 
 11. The beginner should spend some time in outlining 
 words orally, taking the following as an illustrative exer- 
 cise : T-k, take ; b-k, book ; p-g (pronounced pee-gay) pig ; 
 b-g, big; d-ch, (pronounced dee-chay) ditch ; b-j, budge ; j-b, 
 job; t-b, tub; k-j, cage; p-j, page; b-k-t, bucket; t-k-t, tick- 
 et ; j-k-t, jacket ; k-b-j, cabbage ; p-k-j, package ; b-t-k, be- 
 take; b-j-t, budget; b-d-k, bedeck ; j-j, judge ; d-k-t, docket. 
 
 12. The learner is asked to read this sentence to some 
 friend: " That larj felo lookt hi and lo for the lime kil on the 
 naro ej ov the hil." Immediately afterwards read, " That 
 large fellow looked high and low for the limekiln on the narrow 
 edge of the hill." Would it not be the same to him? Or, do 
 you think he could tell from your reading how the words 
 were spelled? In the first sentence they are spelled more 
 nearly as they are pronounced, and one of the chief differ- 
 ences between short-hand and long-hand, so called, is that 
 in the former the spelling of a word depends entirely upon 
 the particular kind, and the arrangement, of the sounds it 
 contains. This is not true in common writing. In sound- 
 writing no more letters are employed than there are distinct 
 sounds heard; thusfo, foe; na, nay; do, dough; fabl, fable; 
 mikst, mixed; kwil, quill; hwen, when. There are no silent 
 letters in short-hand. Hence the usual manner of spelling a 
 word has nothing whatever to do in determining the way in 
 which it is to be written.
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND, 
 
 ORAL EXERCISE. 
 
 13. K-m, came; t-m, time; n-m, name; j-m,gem;g-m, game; 
 1-v, love; th-f, thief; h-v, heavy; m-v, move; sh-v, shave; 
 m-m-k, mimic; k-m-k, comic; b-k-m, became; d-l-j, deluge; 
 h-t-1, hotel; n-g-j, engage; s-k-p, escape; m-n-th, month; 
 n-th-ng, nothing; d-m-j, damage; b-ng-k, bank; 1-ng-k, link; 
 1-f-ng, laughing; w-k-ng, waking; s-s-t-m, system ; s-t-n-g-r-f-r, 
 stenographer; t-k-s, tax; k-w-1, quill; h-w-t, white; i-zh-r, 
 
 erasure. 
 
 ^*^ 
 
 EXERCISE 2. 
 
 14. 1 Being 2 namely 3 time 4 among 5 death 6 ask 7 b_e- 
 came 8 book 9 go 10 bucket 11 be 12 jig 13 touch 14 pay 
 15 bedeck 16 betake 17 jug~J8 dpg"f9 pitch 20 take~~21 keep 
 22 dodge 23 pig 24 pick 25 ditch 26 deck 27 came 28 it 
 29 polish 30 do 31 also 32 package. (3221). 
 
 SUGGESTIONS. If you meet with any difficulty, or if you 
 do not find short-hand clear and easy, do not for that reason 
 throw down your pen. You cannot afford to wait for your 
 class to meet, or until your lesson by mail is returned. 
 Study, write, read, practice; woi-k away! The oftener you 
 copy the characters, the better will you understand the prin- 
 ciples. Obstacles melt away before an earnest worker. 
 Leave 110 lesson until you can say "yes " to these questions: 
 Do you understand the principle? Can you write the Exer- 
 cise correctly? Write it in the required time? Read it after- 
 wards? Have you written it at dictation? 
 
 To THE TEACHER. Wh, x, and q will embarrass most be- 
 ginners. The instructor should explain these letters, as the 
 needs of the learner may demand. X is equivalent to ks, 
 since tax and tacks are pronounced tl:^ same. In rare cases, 
 x is a subvocal, having the force of gz, as in example, pro- 
 nounced egz-ample. In quick, q is equal to kw ; thus, kwick. 
 Wh equals hw ; thus, h uttered before wile, the two in quick 
 succession, produces while.
 
 LESSON III. 
 
 WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 15. KEY. 1. Which come for shall usual will have 
 them was. 2. Him your together advantage language 
 change think object faithful. 8. Health income Novem- 
 ber efficient become chapter. 4. Especially familiar 
 popular he help never. 
 
 WORD-FORMS. 5. Alabama behead duet keg annul 
 period anatomy nothing. 6. Doing helping paying 
 asylum fail gypsy ink thumb. 7. Asiatic bishop Fanny 
 manual along vowel denial. 
 
 SENTENCES. 1. They may wake up Dick. 2. They have 
 enough cash for your big Dakota job. 8. No timid thief will 
 long escape death. 4. They also think they have enough 
 ingenuity. 5. So it may be they will effect it. 6. They will 
 pay money into bank for your November honey. 7. Bishop 
 Matthew will never deviate. 8. Never take Fanny mail 
 which came for Lilly. 
 
 16. There are several hundred short words, as have, him, 
 which, is, will, for, etc., which are very common. The 
 reporter must write them over and over again so often, that 
 to save time they are expressed by abbreviated outlines, some 
 of the letters being dropped. Thus for is written V^_ f, in- 
 stead of V fr, r being omitted. Hence V_ f, being an 
 abbreviation,^^ must be memorized as the word-sign 
 for the word for. Word-signs are characters which express 
 one or more of the leading consonants of the words they are 
 used to represent. These characters are for convenience 
 called word-signs, and the words represented by them, sign- 
 words. For example, V^ is the word-sign, and for the sign- 
 word. 
 
 17. These Signs cannot be too thoroughly committed to 
 memory, since the words they represent are those which occur 
 most frequently. Remember always to use the proper word- 
 sign, and not the full outline, whenever any sign-word is to 
 
 18
 
 / _ 
 
 mate 3. 
 
 j r ^ ( > 
 / ^ / ( \ 
 
 6 /A 
 
 Y 
 
 8ENTBNCB8 
 
 . (T) 
 
 ^ _ \ | _ 
 
 : 
 
 (;( 
 
 ) I 
 r \ 
 
 \ 
 
 v, r 
 
 L
 
 20 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HANT). 
 
 be written. For example, come should be written , 
 
 never ^^ ; which / , never < /^> The word-signs 
 given in each lesson should be / copied from fifty 
 to one hundred times. In this way the pupil memorizes 
 while learning to execute them. 
 
 18. Proper nouns are underscored with a short double 
 dash, as shown in Alabama. L 5. 
 
 19. The tick at the beginning of h should be written in 
 a horizontal position, and not inclined in such a manner as to 
 
 form a hook, thus ^ It is sometimes inconvenient to write 
 this tick when h is not the first consonant in the word. 
 In such cases it is clearly enough indicated by retracing the 
 preceding letter a short way, as in behead. L 5. 
 
 20. A single movement of the pen is sufficient to indicate 
 duet, or keg, and similar words, the stroke tapering or 
 thickening gradually. L 5. The letter I is sometimes writ- 
 ten downward (as in vowel, manual, L 7), and is then called 
 el to distinguish it from lay (upward). Sh when struck up- 
 ward is called shay. (See bishop, L 7). Always use lay and 
 ish, unless eJand shay are specified. 
 
 21. One of the purposes in sometimes using el instead of 
 lay, and shay instead of ish, is to secure better, that is sharp- 
 er, angles at their junctures with other letters. The legibil- 
 ity of an outline depends to a large extent upon its angular- 
 ity. For this reason a distinct angle should be made in 
 joining ( ith and V^ 3/*, V_ efand ^_^en, ( ith and ^^ing, 
 
 (as in \^_x nothing), and other letters making similar 
 
 junctions. 
 
 22. The participial ending i-n-g, is usually denoted by the 
 consonant ^^ng. In some cases it is more convenient to 
 express ing by placing a large dot, its affix sign, at the end 
 ot the word, as in doing, helping, paying. (L 6.) The dot 
 should be used in all cases where the use of the stem ng re- 
 sults in a word-form that is either awkward or unangular.
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 The dot, however, cannot be used for ing, the final letters 
 of some nouns, as th-ing, noth-ing. 
 
 23. Speed in short-hand is of no consequence unless what 
 is written can be read afterwards. Legibility, or read-ability, 
 depends in part upon the accurate forming of the characters. 
 To do this it is not necessary to write them slowly ; oa the 
 contrary, experienced stenographers produce the more per- 
 fect outlines with a somewhat rapid movement, just as an 
 experienced penman executes the most graceful curve by 
 a quick stroke, rather than by slowly drawing it. The 
 student should learn at the outset to write the characters, 
 rather than draw them. Nevertheless, the beginner needs 
 time at first, and ought to form each character a number of 
 times with care and deliberation, until the proper outline is 
 firmly impressed upon his mind, before attempting to write 
 it quickly. Afterwards write it rapidly, and continue doing 
 so until it can be formed both accurately and quickly. All 
 beginners form the characters too large, and are apt to place 
 them too far apart. A great saving of time, and a consequent 
 gain in speed, will be the result in the long run, if the words 
 are written both small and closely together. The learner 
 should begin acquiring this habit now. The light letters 
 should be quite thin, and very little shading will be found 
 sufficient to distinguish the heavy strokes. 
 
 EXERCISE 3. 
 
 24. 1 Wait 2 bulk 3 depth 4 effect 5 effigy 6 error 7 wade 
 8 fare 9 dare 10 farm 11 remedy 12 policy 13 agency 
 14 enough 15 army 16 delay 17 am v 18 waking 19 engage 
 20 image 21 inform 22 invoke 23 know 24 comic 25 shadow 
 26 share 27 baggage 28 bath 29 below 30 betime 31 buffalo 
 32 cab 33 detail 34 dig 35 dull 36 fair 37 far 38 fellow 
 39 gash 40 gum 41 gush 42 hack 43 honey 44 lavish 
 45 levity 46 link 47 log 48 monk 49 omit 50 pair 51 pang 
 52 remove 53 shake 54 sham ^ 55 shove 56 going 57 tank 
 68 thief 59 tick 60 timid 61 top 62 vacate 63 fatigue 
 64 Jacob 65 Matthew 66 Lilly 67 Lucy 68 Dakota 69 Dick 
 70 Jack. Using shay (upward), 71 fish 72 dish 73 push. 
 
 (733:302.)
 
 LESSON IV. 
 
 BAT (OB UPWABD R), AND PHRASE WRITING. 
 
 25. KET. 1. Arc wreck ferry forehead tyranny herb 
 rub Rachel allegory. 2. Heretic retire repair are-many 
 I-say I-shall I-guide I-do I-am. 8. He-may he-will he- 
 may-have he-was he-has-no he-is making he-is-never he- 
 became he-is v he-has. 4. You-will you-know will-you- 
 come ,are-you-ready ,you-may-go as-many-as v as-long-as. 
 
 WORD-SIGNS. 5. In that I is his as, has notwithstand- 
 ing you, are. rather, represent. 6. Regular irregular leg- 
 ible illegible dignity reform perform essential peculiar. 
 
 7. Magazine magnanimous New York republic majesty 
 do-as-you as-you-will which-is-so. 
 
 SENTENCES. 1. Timothy married Rachel for-love. 2. 
 They live in Alabama. 8. Jacob married Ruth for- 
 money. 4. They live in Tennessee. 6. That match was 
 foolish. 6. They both do wrong. 7. They may move 
 into Dakota for health. 8. Tom will avenge that 
 wrong. 9. I-admire them-that-are upright. 10. I-abhqr 
 them-that do wrong for pay. 11. It-will-be no advantage 
 for-them, notwithstanding they-may become rich. 
 
 26. / Ray. R is more commonly expressed by a straight 
 upward stroke, called ray, than by the downward curve ~^\ 
 or. There are three reasons for this; 1st, ray is more quickly 
 written; 2nd, it more frequently secures angularity of out- 
 line; 3rd, it prevents many words from extending too far 
 below the line. The student will hereafter use ray in all 
 cases where ar is not specified. 
 
 27. Phrasing. In short-hand two or more commonly re- 
 curring words are often written together without the pen 
 being lifted from the paper. A series of words which may 
 thus be joined is called a phraseogram, and the character 
 which expresses them, a phascograph; thus the words, you- 
 may-go, constitute a phraseogram, while the character 
 rv ^~ >ta is termed a phraseograph. Much speed is gained 
 by phrasing, with no sacrifice of legibility. 
 
 22
 
 Plate 4. 
 
 > , 
 
 VI 
 
 o 
 
 WORD-SIGNS. 
 ( V O O 
 
 8ENTKNCES. 
 
 ( A 
 
 \ 
 
 4- 
 
 Y /\ "7 i V" 
 
 VI 
 
 \
 
 I 24 REPORTING STYLE OF STWRT-IIAXD. 
 ( 
 
 I. In phraseography, only half the sign for "I" is commonly 
 written, whichever of the two "ticks" ' or ', makes the 
 best angle with the word to which it is joined; c. (/., in l-<jni<l? 
 or /-/ (L 2), the downward tick is used; but when the 
 second tick is employed, it is invariably struck upward* as in 
 I-do, (L2). With ) s, ) z, _J sh, and J zh, the whole sign fjr 
 / should be written, as in I-say, or 1-shall. L 2. 
 
 The sign ; I, when standing alone, or when it begins a 
 phrase, is always written above the line, or " 1 -the words com- 
 bined with it adapt themselves to its position. Example: 
 I-am is written above the line, although am, when standing 
 alone, is placed upon it. 
 
 28. HE. In phrases he is indicated by a tick precisely 
 like the latter half of the sign for /, excepting that it is 
 always struck downward, as in he-became, or he-is. L 3. 
 When the tick-sign for he does not make an angle with the 
 following word, he may be expressed by the joined hay, writ- 
 ten only half its usual length, as in he-hurried. (L 3). It 
 will be found convenient occasionally to express he by writ- 
 ing the tick separately, one space above the line, thus, he. 
 When he is attached to another word, ho\ve\ er, it has no pnxi- 
 tion of its own, but adapts itself to that of the word to which 
 
 , it is joined; as, for instance, in he-may the tick is written 
 on the line, while in lie-was (L 3) it is necessarily one space 
 above. 
 
 29. You. The sign for you when joined to other words 
 maybe inverted if necessary to secure a good angle. S< e 
 you-know, L 4. 
 
 80. AR. The verb are in phrases is expressed by "^ or, in- 
 stead of / ray, when necessary to secure an angle. See are- 
 .inany, L 2. 
 
 31. Bay and chay are never mistaken one for the other. 
 Note the following points of distinction : Kay slants more, 
 and is a trifle longer, than -chay. They are invariably written, 
 one upward, and tho other downward, and as they are
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 j almost always joinec' to other letters in writing words, 
 the manner of joining indicates the direction ; for example, 
 
 /^ would not be read ray-lay, nor ^ I chay-te. 
 
 32. ^ Ar is always used before ^~^ m, never before | t, 
 I d or </ A, and not usually after k, g or </ h. Ray 
 is used after ^~^ m, and before > n and ng. In begin- 
 ning a word, either r makes a distinct angle by junction 
 with a following k, g, \ p or \ 6. In such cases 
 ~^\ ar is used if the vowel precedes it, as in arc, or herb; 
 when no such vowel occurs, / ray is employed, as in wreck, 
 or rub. H at the end of words is usually struck upward if 
 followed by a final vowel, as in ferry. See L 1. 
 
 33. Write, using ray: 1 Ring 2 road 3 revive 4 reveal (el) 
 6 revenue 6 ready 7 repeal 8 rash 9 rate 10 range 11 wrong 
 12 abhor 13 birth 14 bureau 15 arrive 16 earth 17 march 
 18 mark 19 marry 20 married 21 marriage 22 memorial (el) 
 23 merry 24 admire 25 memory 26 mirror 27 narrow 
 28 notary 29 period 30 perish 31 rare 32 rarefy 33 injury 
 34 theory 35 thorough 36 tornado 87 variety 38 victory 
 39 hurry 40 poetry 41 Arizona 42 arch 43 burial (el) 44 bury 
 45 carry 46 cherry 47 forge 48 harsh 49 horror 50 inferior 
 51 morrow 52 ravage 53 red 54 jury 55 review 56 write 
 57 repel 58 revenge 59 revoke 60 revolve 61 rich 62 tardy 
 63 terror 64 torch 65 upright 66 urge 67 vary 68 verify 
 69 votary 70 wrath 71 wretch 72 notoriety 73 Darius 
 74 Ezra 75 Mark 76 Theodore 77 Mary 78 Marion 79 Rachel 
 80 Rosa 81 Ruth 82 Barrett. (8231:30) 
 
 PHRASES. 
 
 34. As-he as-it-was do-so do-that do-they has-that 
 have-also have-become have-long I-am-also I-am-ready 
 I-became I-have I-know-that I-was in-any in-his in-it 
 in-any-way in-them in -which in-your may-have may-never 
 take-it take-that take-them it-was.
 
 26 EXPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 EXERCISE 4. 
 
 85. 1. He-may-think he-is wrong. 2. Are-you-ready? 
 8. I-am hurrying notwithstanding your delay. 4. I-ain-going 
 into New- York. 5. He-will argue it. 6. 1-shall reform them. 
 7. I-think he-will-be popular enough as deputy. 8. I-say 
 Tom will-do nothing for-them. 9. I-will inform-you that-it- 
 may do for March, never for November. 10. His daily income 
 will make-him rich enough. 11. I judge that Theodore will 
 go up into Dakota. 12. Among so-many your book will-have 
 noadvantage. 13. Ezra Barrett is rather peculiar. 14. They- 
 may never do-so. 15. Darius will-never march any regular 
 army into Arizona. 16. As-you-may know his help as usual 
 is efficient. (11841:15) 
 
 86. SPEED SENTENCE. You-may-keep your March-maga- 
 zine for Tom Meredith. (4 1) 
 
 To THE TEACHEB. Young pupils, or those not accustomed 
 to handling a pen, find curves more difficult than straight 
 items. If in the student's work these letters present an ir- 
 regular or cramped appearance, the teacher may require 
 additional practice in curved outlines, as m-l-l, n-f-l, sh-m-l, 
 m-n-l-r, etc. Extended practice in writing these and similar 
 outlines over and over again many times, will tend to render 
 the curves flowing and even. Require every pupil to write 
 mostly with a pen; pencil work should be the exception. 
 See to it that, in each case, the pen is of the proper stiffness 
 to enable the pupil to do the best work. Nor should the 
 learner ever I e allowed to use a cheap quality of paper; he 
 will do bad work, make poor progress, and get discouraged. 
 It is true economy to use the very best materials only. The 
 paper should always be ruled; but double ruling is not neces- 
 sary or best, except as a guide to those just beginning who 
 write too large a hand. Heavy foolscap is very suitable; 
 but when the lines are far apart the characters should occu- 
 py less than half the space between them.
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 READING PRACTICE. The amount of this that may be neces- 
 sary will depend on yourself. If you read your own writ- 
 ing with difficulty, you should practice only so much the 
 more. Those who employ their time mainly in writing, 
 with a view of gaining speed, producing inaccurate and 
 misshapen characters which they rarely attempt to read, 
 may rest assured that they are making progress backwards 
 instead of forwards. When all the list words of a single 
 lesson have been carefully written, they should then be read 
 over and over again, until the whole can be rendered in the 
 time indicated. 
 
 EDUCATIONAL VALUE OF SHORT-HAND. Short-hand is not 
 only valuable as a profession ; it is equally useful as an accom- 
 plishment. No thinking man can afford to be without this 
 rapid method of transferring his thoughts to paper. By 
 means of it, first draughts of letters and articles are made, 
 and notes of lectures, business transactions, and private 
 memoranda recorded, much more fully and in but a fraction 
 of the time otherwise required. Its great utility, both as a 
 discipline and personal convenience, is abundantly attested 
 by literary men of note who are skilled in its use. 
 
 QUESTIONS FOR REVIEW. 
 
 Which letters are written downwards? In what direction 
 is k written? What other letters are written in the same 
 direction? In Notary (n-t-ray), which letter is placed on 
 the base-line? Name all the letters which are written up- 
 wards. Spell exquisite stenographically. Name five sign- 
 words from memory. How are proper names signified? 
 What class of words are represented by word-signs? In 
 what two ways may the syllable i-n-g be expressed? In 
 what respects are ray and chay unlike? Name three words 
 in which ray is used; three words iu which ar is used in 
 preference to ray. Name the letters of the alphabet consec- 
 utively.
 
 TICKS. 
 
 KEY. 1. I-think I-have I-take I-will I-live I-write 
 I-know I-may I-say I-was. 
 
 2. He-came he-is-in he-has-no he-has-it he-is-a 
 
 he-has-a as-he-may he-and-I he-and-you he- 
 is- so. 
 
 3. And-a and-the and-he-may and-I and-you and- 
 
 he-is and-it-is and-make and-do and-which. 
 
 4. And-will and-also and-think and-for and-I and- 
 
 that and-is and-his and-as and-have. 
 
 6. A-long a-day a-time an-advantage in-a is-a as-a 
 which -a for-a was-a. 
 
 6. The-time the-advantage the-long the-jury the- 
 name in -the for- the have -the is -the as -the. 
 
 ':. That-is-the that-is-a as-he-is as-I-am as-he-was 
 is-he-so is-he-making as-he-may as-he-has do- 
 as- he. 
 
 LONG VOWELS. 
 
 8. Eke key fee eave Lee ear bee eel ease pea. 
 
 9. Abe age jay fay ray shay lay May nay hay. 
 
 10. Taw awed daw caw saw law raw maw Orr haw. 
 
 11. Toe owed Coe go oath sow show roe o re ohm. 
 
 12. Pooh coo woo pa ma bah fa shah la ha. 
 
 13. Otho Eno array Ora Asia Eva Oho Esau ado 
 
 era. 
 
 14. Maul balk tame leech mole dope keel Jake poach 
 
 hoop. 
 
 15. Toto Dora Como Mocha Tokay Roma \ awake 
 
 Polo delay obeyed. 
 
 PRACTICAL TEST. After having studied the Ticks and 
 Long Vowels, and copied the Exercise opposite several 
 times, the student is recommended to write off in Short- 
 hand all the matter on this page, comparing his work af- 
 terwards character by character with the engraved plate. 
 Continue copying and comparing while mistakes are 
 found. 
 
 2S-
 
 1_ 
 
 <L^ . * 
 
 Q S & ef- p ^ 
 
 *V 
 
 Si 7 -*~^ 
 
 * .T .n c ^ 
 s \r~ ^ u / 
 
 6 U / S^ ^ 
 
 ^ 4 
 
 yJlJL ^ ^ 
 
 8...ZI...VZ ^ 
 
 o \ / / V 
 
 10 r 'i r ...r 
 
 v ? 
 
 , -^ . b 
 
 -O _D 
 
 ) 
 
 ? 
 
 13 -4 
 
 14 ^^ 
 
 15 - IX 
 
 "> ") 
 
 . 5 
 
 _17 
 X 
 
 / <, i 
 
 W^ 
 
 #-^ f \> 
 .r > \ 
 
 C S ,- "^ ^ 
 
 " I- -I -C )- A ^ ^ ^ 
 
 ~*i A y v. ^ )" L-'X 

 
 LESSON V. 
 LONG VOWELS. 
 
 87. KEY. 1. Eat key peak oak hoe coach peer par 
 park. 2. Coop raw pshaw beach tame calm Maude yoke 
 pool. 8. The-loaf the-porch and-a and-the a-book-and 
 a-guide to-day to-morrow. 
 
 SENTENCES. 1. The-yoke is heavy. 2. It-is-a loaf of 
 dough. 8. It-may thaw before to-morrow. 4. Who-will 
 make-a bowl of tea? 5. Take-the pole and-leap on to-the 
 porch. 6. Sheep ought-never to roam too far. 7. Your 
 yellow pony is calm notwithstanding all-the uproar. 
 8. The-knavishhawk has both a-beak and-a tail. 
 
 88 \ \ \. r i- i. 
 
 Bee bay bah taw toe too 
 
 Me may ma caw coe coo 
 
 39. The six long vowels are denoted by a large dot and 
 dash placed beside the consonant signs at three different 
 points, called thejlrst, second, and third vowel places, being 
 respectively at the beginning, middle and end of the stem. 
 The long sound of e is expressed by putting a large dot in the 
 first place, or at the beginning of the stem, as in bee, me, eat 
 or key; the long sound of o by writing the dash in the second 
 place, or at the middle of the letter, as in toe, coe, oak, or hoe. 
 See L 1. 
 
 40. An easy way to remember the long vowels, and the 
 order of their occurence, is to memorize the following 
 rhyme: 
 
 In th-e g-ay c-a-r 
 
 S-ee gr-ay Cz-a-r. 
 In sm--ll g-o-ld b-oo-ts 
 
 T-a-11 d-o-e sh-oo-ts. 
 
 41. A word is said to be vocalized when the vowel signs are 
 added to its outline. A Nominal Consonant is any letter, as 
 I t or k cancelled, its office being simply to indicate vow- 
 el place when words having no consonant are to be written 
 
 as ./ ah or ' / awe. 
 
 -30 J
 
 $late 5. 
 
 < 7 V 
 
 TTOKD-SKiNS. 
 
 the ought 
 a an and / 
 
 already before oh of to 
 g ' . . ^ 
 
 SENTENCES. (V) 
 
 u c , 
 su v 
 
 TRANSLATE. ( 1 
 
 who all two 1 too 
 \ 
 
 / \ \ 
 
 or but on 
 
 should 
 
 v/* x r 
 
 V 
 
 - x L, XV 
 ) V - 
 

 
 32 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORTHAND. 
 
 42 
 
 .A B C 
 
 1st place. aw s 1st 
 
 a 
 
 1st 2d 3d \ 
 2d place. o > 
 
 ah 
 
 ah 
 
 3d place. ow o oo oo 
 
 \x3d e / 
 
 -;3d. 
 3d. 
 1st. 
 
 43. These dots and dashes, or the sounds they represent, 
 are denominated first, second, and third place vowels, accord- 
 ing as they occupy the first, second, or third positions. By 
 noticing Figures A B C D, above, it will be seen that a 
 first-place vowel is written at the beginning, and a 
 third-place at the end of the stem, no matter whether the con- 
 sonant is written downward, upward or to the right. 
 
 The base-line has nothing whatever to do in determining 
 the place of the vowel signs. 
 
 44. In *| eat and i oak the vowels e and o precede the 
 
 consonants | t and A;,- hence the dot and dash are writ- 
 ten before the stems, e being placed at the left of /, and o 
 abore k. In |- toe and key, the vowels come last, and 
 for this reason o is placed after, or on the right side of t, in 
 the first word, and e after or below k, in the second. 
 
 45. Dash vowels ure written so as :c stand out from the 
 stems beside which they are placed, as for example, in oak 
 and raw the dashes o and aw are placed zz right angles with 
 k and r. 
 
 46. Attention is called to the manner of writing peer and 
 par in L 1. If to the word \. pa, r should be added, the 
 character \ 5 / x par would the result. Bu f if to the 
 word ./ eer, p should be prefixed, the result would be 
 \ 5 ^/' peer, written precisely the same as par. just shown. 
 Placing vowels in angles renders the meaning uncertain, and 
 is alao inconvenent. To avoid this it is necessary to obsi-rvo 
 the rule that when a third-place dot or dash occurs between 
 two consecutive consonants.it is annexed to the second, no f , 
 to theirs/. For example the first place vowel.- inbeach an^. 
 Maude, and the second place vowels in tame and yoke (L 2) ai'o
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 33 
 
 placed beside the first consonant, while the third place vowels 
 in coop andpool (L 2) are written beside the second. The rule 
 holds good whether a sharp angle occurs between the two 
 stems or not; thus calm is written ^~^*, and not 
 
 
 
 47. Caution The student must njt forget that short- 
 hand is Avritten *>y sound. Vowels in the sense here used do 
 not refer to the letters, a, e, i, etc., but to the vowel sounds 
 that are actually heard in the distinct utterance of any 
 word. Hence, to write a word properly, no regard whatever 
 should be had to its spelling. In yoke, for instance, there is 
 but one vowel, that of o long; final e, being silent, is not rep- 
 resented. A good plan is to speak each word aloud before 
 writing it; or better s'Jll, have the list distinctly pronounced 
 to you by another person. 
 
 48. Remark. Only one 0ut of many hundreds of vowels 
 is actually written in taking short-hand notes; but enough 
 more are indicated by the manner of combining the conso- 
 nant signs, to render the system entirely legible. The possi- 
 bility of reading almost solely from the consonants may be 
 shown by the fact that a page of print is easily decipherable, 
 all the vowels having been previously blotted out; for in 
 such cases the consonant element, which is the more impor- 
 tant, still remains, and the blots indicate where the vowels 
 are to be supplied. This crudely, and very inadequately, il- 
 lustrates the method employed in short-hand. 
 
 49. The vowels are used rarely; nevertheless they must be 
 thoroughly mastered, in order that they may be inserted 
 without a moment's hesitation when a rapid report is being 
 made. The pupil is cautioned against forming the long-vow- 
 el signs too small, a common error, which results in confus- 
 ing them with short vowels. 
 
 The word-signs in this lesson are difficult. The memory 
 will be aided by observing that each one is in fact the prin- 
 cipal vowel-sign in the word it represents. They are given 
 different positions for the sake of distinction.
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-IIAXD. 
 
 50. THE. Any one of the three ticks which denote 1 or 
 he may also be used to indicate the, that one always being 
 selected which secures the best angle. This tick has no posi- 
 tion of its own. In the-porch, and the-loaf (L 3), the is iirst 
 written above, and then on the line. 
 
 51. A, an, and, in phrasing are all denoted by a brief tick, 
 written horizontally or vertically (downward), as angle may 
 require, as in a-book-and a-guide. See L 3. When cither 
 tick maybe used, the horizontal should' be given the prefer- 
 ence. 
 
 62. The tick signs for a, an, and, and the are more com- 
 monly used; the dots being written when a tick is inconven- 
 ient, or does not join well. The pupil should guard against 
 the common error of forming these ticks too large; make them 
 as short and light as possible. 
 
 53. The words which in this book the pupil is required to 
 vocalize, are the very ones which will be most likely to re- 
 quire vowels when regular reporting work is to be done. A 
 fuller explanation of this subject will be found in Lesson 35 
 
 Vocalize the following list, observing the rule explained 
 in section 46 above. In the last three lines the long vowels 
 only are to be written. 
 
 54. 1 Ate tea ace. saw sea low oaf foe ail ache gay 
 2 aid dough awl ale lea ape Poe paw Joe shoe 
 
 A 3 thaw jaw aim woe gnaw knee nay Esau oar (ar) era 
 
 4 (ar) ado age aught fee hay oat ode sew. 
 
 5 (1st place) Cheek chalk heap heed tall leaf leap 
 
 6 meal peal bawl beak beam beer hawk deal kneel (el) 
 
 7 leak peach reap sheep team teeth wreath wreathe 
 
 8 Neal (el) Paul. 
 
 9 (2nd place) Cake coach coal comb dale dame bail bowl 
 
 10 cape joke fame gale game jail choke knave lame 
 
 11 loaf nail (el} pole porch vale abate bore (ar) roam (ar) 
 
 12 rogue rope babe bait poll dome goal loathe pail 
 
 13 poke pope rake robe tale tape vague Job. 
 
 14 (3d place) Tool root balm mar doom rood tomb; (us- 
 
 15 ing ar) lark tar czar tour jar.
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 35 
 
 16 (Long vowels only) Antique aurora (ar) boquet foliage 
 
 17 elate jubilee oatmeal parade pillow pony potato up- 
 
 18 roar yellow Ada Cora Edith Eva Laura Nora lower 
 
 19 (ar) (1406:452:45). 
 /^"55. PHRASES. All-are all-his all-my all-right ail-that 
 
 all-the-way all-which all-you all-your and-have as-it-should 
 
 r'TSefore-his before-the before-you but-a but-may but-that 
 
 , but-the but-as for-a for- which has-a have-a of-that of- 
 
 the-way in-the-way of-theni on-that should-be should-do 
 
 should-never should-have take-the to-him to-live to-love- 
 
 ~them too-many who-may who-was. 
 
 EXERCISE 5. 
 
 56. 1. The-day is coming and you-may-look for-a vic- 
 tory before-long. 2. Should-you-come to-day Maude and- 
 Laura will-make a-boquet and-an. antique foliage wreath 
 for-you. 3. Are-you-going to-go to sea to-day? 4. Paul, 
 take your oar and-go-and row a-league. 5. The-knave is 
 taking coal into-the coach. 6. They-have-a tall coop in-the 
 park. (652:301). 
 
 57. Speed Sentence. Cora, you-may-go and help Laura 
 make oatmeal cake for tea. (3 1). 
 
 ^To THE TEACHER. The young learner and the adult stu- 
 dent take hold of short-hand in a manner entirely different. 
 The young pupil does not execute so well, but takes more de- 
 light in the merely mechanical operation of writing and re- 
 writing the characters many times. The older person forms 
 the outlines better, but dislikes practice. He prefers to study, 
 while the young student would much rather spend his time 
 writing. This is why in the long run the young succeed 
 best. Short-hand writing is something to be done, not mere- 
 ly thought about; learning the art requires the application of 
 the hand more than the head.
 
 LESSON VI. 
 DIPHTHONGS AND THE S-CIRCLE. 
 
 58. KEY. 1. Type voice vow boy oil cow Illinois wide. 
 
 2. Spy sauce doze ooze sow seed Saul snail assignee. 
 
 3. Spell search goes zinc zeal sense Tom's bells ring. 
 
 4. Owing owes owed wipe wife Viola loyal twice 
 surveyor. 
 
 5. PHKASES. As-far-as as-far-as-may be-such does-he 
 does-never how-many in-any-case has-he. 
 
 6. WOKD-SIGNS. How high now its several special 
 subject advantageous always. 7. Knowledge acknowledge 
 January February electricity something sufficient forsake 
 for-the-sake-of. 
 
 SENTENCES. 1. The-savage toils a-long-time before-he 
 slays the shy fowl. 2. The-slave knows how to sail the-big 
 ship on-the sea. 3. But-the voyage to Hayti will-be too-long 
 for-the boy Guy. 4. Rufus may-make many rhymes, but 
 it-was Poe who wrote the rich poetry which all admire. 
 
 5. James, do-you think it will tire you to carry this wide 
 vase two-miles? 6. I-think all of-your boys ought-to come 
 to-the service on Sunday. 
 
 DIPHTHONGAL SCALE. 
 
 59 - ; v I as in n-t-ght. ; A oi in c-ot'-l. 
 
 | A ow in end-ow. J L wi in wi-pe. 
 
 The diphthongs i, oi, and ow are represented by angular 
 signs as shown in type, voice, vow. L 1. They always point 
 either up or down, no matter whether the consonant beside 
 which they are placed is slanting or otherwise, /may be 
 written in the 1st, 2nd or 3rd vowel place, according to 
 convenience, as in spy. L 2. 
 
 60. The triphthong wi and the three dipthongal signs, 
 may occasionally be joined to consonant letters at the be- 
 ginning or end of words, as in oil, cow, wide. (L 1). When 
 
 A 
 
 medial, however, they cannot be joined; thu-. f cowl 
 
 36
 
 Plate 6. 
 
 
 \ 
 
 C 
 
 ), T 
 
 3 V 
 
 \ 
 
 rttHASKS 
 P \ I I 
 
 A / * 
 
 J^N ' WimU-SHJNS. 
 
 \ 
 
 ES. (T) 
 
 
 / s 
 
 r 
 
 x> 
 
 r 
 
 fe) f 
 
 ^ 
 
 \ / XI 
 
 1 V^ vW^i 
 
 \, 
 
 448626
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SffOBT-HAXJ). 
 
 cannot be written A/*" since this character would be 
 ambiguous, expressing either cowl or coil. 
 
 61. THE CIRCLE. S and z are denoted in outlines by a 
 small circle. This, when joined to curved letters, is written 
 within or following the direction of the curve, as in sense, or 
 bells. L 3. 
 
 62. When the circle is attached to a straight letter, at the 
 beginning or end of a word-form, it is always written upon 
 the right of the letter if downward, as in spell; on the left of 
 upward letters, as in search; and upper side of horizontal let- 
 
 ! ters, as in goes. See L 3. 
 
 63. The following table, which illustrates the proper man- 
 ner of attaching the circle to straight and curved stems, 
 should be copied many times, until the pupil can, without 
 taking thought, execute it properly. Written exercises should 
 be compared with it every day until errors cease to be found. 
 When joined to straight letters the circle is struck with a h-ft 
 movement, as the letter o is written in long-hand. This rule 
 will enable the learner to test the accuracy of his writing. 
 For Jbtinction, s when represented by the circle, is called 
 
 iss. and the combined characters | , f , b , etc., may be named 
 either iss-te, iss-de, de-iss, or ste, sed, des, etc. 
 
 64. TABLE OF 8-CIRCLE JOININGS. 
 
 \> Xb b / Q-Di-oVoVoC 3 3 6 d<3~OQ-PQ-p C> ^^ 
 
 65. S and z being cognates, are both expressed by a sin- 
 gle sign, namely the circle, with no danger of ambiguity. 
 The circle is not employed *o denote z when it begins ;i word 
 as in zinc, zeal. L 3. 
 
 66. The possessive or plural of sword, formed in long- 
 hand by the addition of s or es, is indicated in short-hand by 
 affixing the s-circle to its word-sign, or outline, as in Tom's 
 bells ring. L 3. 
 
 67. S and z when standing alone, as in ooze or sow, can-
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 30 
 
 not be represented by the circle, which it is impossible to 
 vocalize. L 2. .p 
 
 68. The character | is read seat, the order of pronunci- 
 ation being, first, the circle; second, the vowel; and third, 
 the stem. 8 is read first, although e is actually placed be- 
 fore, that is, at the left, of it. If e should be read first, the 
 word would be east; but this plan would be worse, since the 
 circle cannot be vocalized. The stem J s would have to be 
 employed in east, as in all words where s is preceded by a 
 vowel. See seed, Saul, L 2. 
 
 69. The vowel word-signs i but and ' or are not com- 
 monly phrased; for, since a and and are written in the same 
 manner, ambiguity would be the frequent result; thus, l 
 
 would express either and-go, or but-go, and / either or. 
 acknowledge, or and-acknowledge. 
 
 70. Caution. Beginners are disposed to write the s-circle 
 too large. There is very little danger of getting it too 
 small. The diphthongal signs should be made light, rather 
 small and sharp-angled. The word -sign n you should be a 
 complete semi-circle, and quite small; not large and flattened 
 
 out, thus /> 
 
 71 . In forsake, composed of for and sake, the letter V^ / is 
 used for the first part because it is the sign for the 
 word /or. But in \^y forage, which is in no wise a com- 
 pound word, the first syllable for cannot be expressed by V^ 
 simply. The learner is cautioned against using word-signs 
 in any way, except to express just those words which they 
 ^taeeintended to represent. 
 
 72. 1 % Using diphthongs, write: Tie pipe vile knife 
 2 mile defy boil coil foil row toy vouch Guy buy die 
 
 ^JJ__chime couch coy dike fowl hide nigh owl foul pike 
 
 4 pile rhyme shy sigh spike dye thigh tire (ar) toil annoy 
 
 5 diet envoy royal Isaac sour (ar). Using dot vowels 
 
 6 also; tU Elijah Eliza Ida Myra. 
 
 ,. .
 
 40 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-I1AXD. 
 
 7 Using the s-circlc: Case safe save sale sake said 
 
 8 same famous fix harness immense less Sabbath safety 
 
 9 savage scale (el) sell senate sketch service summer de- 
 
 10 vise refuse police story soon small smith son smoke 
 
 11 solid slave suppose spell study Sunday space this yes 
 
 12 Saturday cell cemetery notice sex sink skip sledge slim 
 
 13 sling slip spark spool such sun surface/surge surpass 
 
 14 survey swing Swiss valise stay wages wax Horace 
 
 15 James Rufus Samuel Thomas; (using ar) cellar Caesar 
 
 16 force spare sir circus. 
 
 17 Vocalize: Lace seal seat site slow snow sail race 
 
 18 choose dose abase choice geese gaze spoil vice pause 
 
 19 seam scene raise voice invoice nice noise soul chase 
 
 20 cheese dice entice sage sauce siege slay vase sleeve 
 
 21 slope sly snail (el) snake soap sole sty repose Miles 
 
 22 (using ar) soar score spire. (168 6 3:15). 
 
 73. PHRASES. All-such all-this be-said be-ihis before- 
 this do-such do-this does-it does-that does-the does-this 
 does-your for-such for-this has-this have-them have-such 
 have-this how-may in-its-own in-this is-this it-make 8 such- 
 was to-his to-this which-has which-makes. 
 
 EXERCISE 6. 
 
 74. 1. That boy of-yours makes enough noise. 2. Do- 
 you say he-is going to tie the-rope to-the cow's neck? 8. 
 He ought to-make less noise so that-he-may keep his seat 
 in-the Senate. 4. May honesty be-your policy notwith- 
 standing your name may become less famous. 5. I- will 
 help-you take-an invoice of all-your-stock. 6. You-should 
 never for any reason or on-any day make-a foolish vow. 
 7. Do-you endorse the study of-such-a subject as-this? 8. 
 Yes, and I-think you-should study it thoroughly oq-all days 
 but Sundays. 9. I-suppose you-will make-it your special 
 object to know it all before the-month of November. 10. 
 Several boys have come to-day to-sell milk. 11. You-will 
 have-no magazine for sale in-this language for-several days. 
 12. It-was said in-the Senate of-Illinois that for the space
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 of two days all bells should ring the-alarm. 13. The Sen- 
 ate of-this republic will long be famous for-its safe and-dig- 
 nified policy. (175-52). 
 
 75. SPEED SENTENCE. How- many-days do-you suppose 
 he- will-be in surveying enough space for-the cemetery? 
 
 (5-1) 
 
 76. TRANSLATE. 
 
 ^ \o \ / VP 6 V^ 8 x 2 \o 
 
 '-N, / ^ . W_ ^ , 3 ( I / 
 , A_P > M C \ . * C, ^*rs_ 
 
 r ^r r *y > n/x ^_^ 
 *- \ \ ^ r ' M.X c F 
 
 ^ _^n^-^\cv_A 
 
 To THE TEACHER. To the novice the short-hand letters 
 a r e all very much alike in appearance. By holding up to 
 th-e learner the features of dissimilarity, each individual let- 
 ter will be more quickly recognized, and firmly fixed. The 
 elementary characters may be differentiated in the follow- 
 ing manner: Consonants. These may be classified, 1st, (on 
 the basis of form) into straight and curved; 2nd, (as to size) 
 into light and heavy, 3rd, (as to attitude) into vertical, hor- 
 izontal and oblique. Vowels. These are, 1st, long and short; 
 2nd, light and heavy; 3rd, first, second and third place; 4th, 
 dots, dashes and angles; 5th, simple and diphthongal.
 
 DIPHTHONGS. 
 KEY. 1. Pie gibe Ike fie vie ice eyes isle lie rye. 
 
 2. Foy roy hoy bough Dow ouch mow wow Howe 
 
 cite. 
 
 3. Seip spice sty Tice guise scythe sire mice sine 
 
 hies. 
 
 4. Joyce soil Royce spouse douse scow sour rouse 
 
 mouse ounce. 
 
 5. Slice Sepoy Sinai Eli silo solo Iva Ina Isa Rio. 
 
 SHORT VOWELS. 
 
 6. Dick Jim jig itch dig fib Fitch fig rid lid. 
 
 7. Mill nib gib kip lick myth nick nip pig ship. 
 
 8. Chess deck ebb Ed etch ledge neck peck peg 
 
 sedge. 
 
 9. Hess Jess knell mesh check chef ell Israeli wreck 
 
 shed. 
 
 10. Add ash rash chap rap fang batch jam lamb 
 
 ram. 
 
 11. Map Mab match Madge mack lang rat nab nag 
 
 rag. 
 
 12. Knob notch mock lop cop Lodge rock top rod 
 
 rob. 
 
 13. Bus fuss gum lull cubj muff muss rug rum rung. 
 
 14. HUBS mush mum nudge Russ rush rut rub sup 
 
 sub. 
 
 15. Puss nook rook shook muddy ferry folly funny 
 
 volley shadow. 
 
 TEST EXERCISE. The learner is recommended to copy 
 the engraved exercise on the page opposite a number of 
 times. Then write in Short-hand the entire list of words 
 given above and compare your work with the engraving 
 Repeat the operation several times if errors are found 
 As a flnal test, transcribe the engraved exercise into long- 
 hand. Compare your transcript with the key printed 
 above, mark your mistakes and try again.
 
 
 v c 
 
 L A X / L 
 
 
 s/ L \ I / /7 
 
 *>/ r 9 z 
 
 10. 1 
 ii 
 
 S\ /\ \
 
 LESSON VII. 
 SHORT VOWELS. 
 
 77. KEY. 1. Big job beg cup tack shaggy echo poem 
 fiat. 2. Assail lazy rose rosy sense essence race racy. 
 3. Herb Arab array audit borrow buggy cameo elbow. 
 
 4. WORD-SIGNS. We with were would what New- 
 York-City public publish-ed for-the-purpose-of. 
 
 5. PHRASES. As-we for-we-were were-it what-is-it 
 what-would-be with-advantage would-know would-rather. 
 6. As-to-do he-should-be for-his-purpose how-much how- 
 you think-you-may what-it-is does-nothing. 7 and 8. For 
 key see list words sec 86. 
 
 SENTENCES. 1. I-saw him buy a tall silk hat. 2. We 
 shall soon dig a ditch along the road. 3. Samuel Adams 
 will lay a gas pipe in-it. 4. What-would you-like to-have 
 to eat? 5. Now you-may-make some coffee to-take to-the 
 picnic. 6. I-will also boil some cabbage and-take some 
 mellow peaches. 7. They-may thiuk-that-we live in-a 
 palace. 
 
 78. SHORT-VOWEL SCALE. 
 
 | it [ et ,| at I ot | ut I oot (as in f-oo-t). 
 
 The six short vowels here illustrated are indicated by 
 a small light dot and dash written in the three vowel places. 
 For example, a light dot when written in the second place 
 has the force of e in beg, and a light dash the same power as 
 u in cup (L 1). A light dash, first place, is equivalent to 
 o in job. The learner will observe that the short vowel 
 signs are quite small. This is necessary to render them 
 easily distinguishable from the long. 
 
 These mnemonical rhymes will aid in recollecting the short 
 vowels, and the order in which they occur : 
 
 j Bill gets bat; j Lot cuts wood. 
 
 I Kills red rat. j Dot does good. 
 
 79. By referring to L 1 the pupil will see that in tack and 
 shaggy the third-place vowels are located beside the second
 
 Plate 7, 
 
 L /, _ 
 
 Q_9 <_P 
 
 WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 PHRASES. 
 
 e 
 
 SENTENCES 
 
 X> 
 A 
 
 T \ 
 
 onniaira 
 
 y:-.i i v / 
 \ 
 
 T ^ v . r ^ 
 
 L J C 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 u 
 
 V
 
 46 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND 
 
 consonant, rather than the first. This is according to the 
 rule governing third-place vowels, occuring between t\\<> 
 consonants. Second-place short vowels, also, are appended 
 to the second stem, and in this respect the rule differs from 
 that governing second-place long vowels, which, it will be 
 remembered, are written by the first consonant. The fol- 
 lowing figures illustrate the entire rule, and will aid in 
 remembering it. The numbers 1, 2, 3, represent first, second 
 and third-place vowels, those that are long being signified by 
 the full-faced type. 
 80. A .B C D 
 
 81. This rule for placing vowels, both long and short, 
 between two consecutive consonants, may be briefly stated 
 as follows : 
 
 Write beside the 1st consonant : Beside the 2nd consonant : 
 First-place long vowels, Second-place short vowels, 
 
 First-place short vowels, Third-place sho rt vowels, 
 
 Second-place long vowels. Third-place long vowels. 
 
 Stated in the fewest possible words, the rule is : 
 Second-place long and all first-place vowels are written by the 
 first stem, and all others by the second. 
 
 82. Besides keeping vowels out of angles, a further ad- 
 vantage of this rule is that second-place vowels, though they 
 be insufficiently or wrongly shaded, are known by the 
 
 tion they occupy by the first or second consonant ; thus 
 would be read bake, because the writer evidently meant to 
 make the dot large, since it occupies a position where a large 
 dot only could properly be placed. For a similar reason, 
 
 the character \ . would be read beck. The few exceptions 
 to this rule are given in lesson XXXV.
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 47 
 
 83. The vowel in herb (L 3) is represented by a second- 
 place dot, rather than the light dash. Strictly, however, the 
 e in herb (and words where it occurs before r) is not the same 
 as e in met, or u in cup, although the dot, rather than the 
 dash, is used in such cases. Other shades of vowel sound, 
 also, are unprovided for in the Scale ; but for all practical 
 purposes these are indicated clearly enough by the signs for 
 those vowels which most nearly approach them. 
 
 r 
 
 84. In |~ Dio it is necessary to place two vowels on one 
 
 side of a letter. Here v t is put nearer to | d than - o, 
 since the symbols should be written in the same order in 
 which the sounds occur. See also cameo, L 3. 
 
 When two concurrent vowels occur between two conso- 
 nants, the first vowel is placed by the first stem, and the 
 second by the last, without reference to what place either of 
 the vowels may occupy. See poem, fiat, L 1. 
 
 85. Since every vowel is of necessity in the first, second 
 or third place, the stem ) s must be written if a vowel occurs 
 in connection with it ; for if a dot or dash were placed beside 
 a circle, there would be nothing to show whether a first, 
 second, or third-place vowel were meant. Hence if s is pre- 
 ceded by an initial, or followed by a final vowel, the full-length 
 stem, instead of the circle, must invariably be used. See 
 assail, lazy, racy, L 2. This rule holds good in all cases 
 whether tlie vowels are actually written or not, since the use of 
 the stem in these circumstances indicates where the reader 
 is to supply them. For example, the circle is used in sense 
 and rose, but the stem must be employed in essence and rosy. 
 See L 2. 
 
 86. 1 Write : 111 kick lock rock chorus edge egg else 
 
 2 gui,ss kiss mass haughty enemy alas Asia gem valley 
 
 3 malice autumn lion idiom idiot maniac mazy dozy 
 
 4 posy daisy gauzy dizzy hazy noisy espy acme agony 
 
 5 allure ally alto apex dock appease bang botch chip 
 
 6 chop cob coffee dairy duck dumb Lutch epic essay
 
 48 REPORTING STYLE OF SfTORT-ffAXI). 
 
 7 foggy gang gas gaudy hobby mug lag lap pack lash 
 
 8 latch lath leg lip luck lung mellow mess mob odd 
 
 9 opera palace palm pith rack shock silk solemn Stoic 
 
 10 tally Adam Amos Ellis Emory Jesse Agnes Anna 
 
 11 Ella Emily Emma Hannah (using ar) arrow attire err. 
 
 (9662) 
 
 87. PHRASES. And-we as-it-should for- we have- we 
 such-as that-you we-do we-have they-were we-were what- 
 all what-do what-does with-the with-that would-say 
 would-never how-you. 
 
 / EXERCISE 7. 
 
 88. 1. Rub your sore eye with-your elbow. 2. They-that 
 talk too-much effect nothing. 3. He*t-d a-gossip as-j'ou won Id 
 a -liar. 4. You - will- never sell your fowls on- a rainy 
 day. 5. Do-you-acknowledge that-the sky is hazy in au- 
 tumn? 6. Yes, but it-is-never so in summer. 7. Iha\t'-no 
 memory of any-such tale as-that in-your book. 8. To edit 
 such-a book is-a big job. 9. It-is-in-no-way sufficient for- 
 this purpose. 10. "The-Idiot aud-the Maniac," is-the sub- 
 ject of-my poem. 11. You-may-receive-the essay and-takr- 
 it to-the notary. 12. They eat nothing but milk and-eggs 
 on Sunday. (1113:151:30). 
 
 89. SPEED SENTENCE. All-the ships of-the navy will soon 
 sail into-tbe sea and-engage with-the haughty enemy. 
 
 (4-1.) 
 
 SUGGESTION. It is well to encourage ihe tendency, which 
 is quite natural, of picturing? in one's mind the characters 
 which represent words heard spoken in conversation, also 
 to cultivate the habit of mentally outlining and phrasing 
 words and sentences. Word and phrase signs must be so 
 thoroughly learned as to be written and read instantly. 
 Spare hours may be given with advantage to writing and 
 reading these abbreviations over and over man^ times.
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHOUT-HAND. 49 
 
 90. TRANSLATE. 
 
 . 'V ^v ^ P -v / I x'" N I 
 
 ) \r^ f F v/T I* x 
 
 / ' ' 
 
 / . 
 
 To THE TEACHEK. Vowels trouble most students, mainly 
 because they are not well learned. But they are so few that 
 one can easily become as familiar with them as with the 
 faces of his own brothers and sisters. Vowels are so impor- 
 tant that no good teacher will omit a brief review of them as 
 a part of the regular daily program. Each member should 
 be able when required to give the place, size, form, length, 
 and kind of every one. This review should be partly oral, 
 the long vowels for convenience being named, tee, toy, tah, 
 taiv, toe, too; and the short, it, et, at, ot, ut, oot. The whole 
 class may be called upon to repeat them both forwards and 
 backwards, individually and in concert. Then give all first- 
 place, tee, taw, it, ot, oi, I; next second-place, and last, third- 
 place. The teacher will observe that the more thoroughly a 
 pupil learns a thing, the better will he like it; and, per 
 contra, the better he likes it, the more he will want to learn 
 of it. This is true particularly of anything intrinsically 
 scientific and beautiful, as the vowel scale.
 
 LESSON VIII. 
 CONSONANT POSITION. 
 
 91. KEY. 1. King me deep leave occupy teach at- 
 tach allowed attack. 2. Nigh away awake ahead July 
 purify ago nuisance. 
 
 WORD-SIGNS. 8. Common each watch hear her ever 
 give-n dollar thing. 4. Whom home large much thank 
 youth hath had advertise advertising. 5. Anything En- 
 glish-language A. M. P. M. however must-be forthwith to- 
 become single. 
 
 SENTENCES. 6. Talks on-the subject of electricity will- 
 be given in-the-month of July. 7. It-is-a common-thing 
 to hear her laugh aloud at-your huge fool's-cap. 8. The- 
 Judge said that-the jury should occupy this cool room. 9. 
 They will to-day say what-the damages in-this-case should- 
 be. 
 
 PHRASES. 10. By-and-by by-the-by by-the-way in-as- 
 much-as she-shall a-year-ago for-a-long-time. 11 Of-the- 
 case as-long-as-it-may many-think-that ought-to-be long- 
 enough shall-never. 
 
 92. What is called consonant position is a contrivance 
 made use of to save writing vowels in a certain limited num- 
 ber of common words. With reference to the line of writ- 
 ing, words occupy three different places, known as the first, 
 second, and third consonant positions. Second-position words 
 rest on the line. Most words which have already been in- 
 troduced are of this class. 
 
 93. First-position horizontal words are written one space 
 above the line, as king and me. Other first position words 
 are written half a space above the line, as deep, leave occupy, 
 teach. Here, in each case, the first descending letter rests 
 half a space above the line. L 1. 
 
 94. Third-position horizontal words are written just be- 
 low the line, as ago and nuisance. Other third-position 
 words are written through the line, the first descending 
 letter resting one-half a space below it, as in awake, ahead, 
 purify. L 2.
 
 Plate 8. 
 
 
 
 - I 
 I I I 
 
 - /v- 
 
 SENTENCES. 
 
 \ 
 
 10 
 
 11 
 
 ...X : 
 
 I 
 
 PHRASES. 
 
 TRANSLATE. 
 
 ) - 
 
 X 
 
 ' - r 
 
 f . ... \ l_o 
 
 -^ ^
 
 68 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 95. There are only a few hundred words, all told, that 
 there is any need of writing elsewhere than on the line. 
 These are specified in the lessons which follow, and should 
 be memorized by the pupil. It would be inexpedient at this 
 time to attempt to explain fully the general theory of Con- 
 sonant Position. It is sufficient to state that words which 
 are written in the first position usually contain a. first pltice 
 vowel, and those in the third position, a third place vowel. 
 The learner, however, will distinctly bear in mind that it is 
 by no means true that all words which contain first or third 
 place vowels are for that reason to be put in the first or third 
 positions. 
 
 96. The student who consults other text-books, or a ste- 
 nographic dictionary, will find a large number of words 
 marked for the first and third positions. It is nevertheless 
 true, however, that practical reporters generally, no matter 
 what system is followed, or text-book studied, write nearly 
 all the words on the line in actual reporting. The notes thus 
 taken are perfectly legible, although such words as music, 
 academy, month, factory, etc., are written in the second posi- 
 sion rather than in the third. Our aim is to teach the art as 
 it is practiced by the best stenograpliers. This subject is treat- 
 ed at length in Lesson XXXIV. 
 
 97. 1 Write in first position: Cause cease song these 
 2 wise since sight side seek sing office city offset ear 
 8 weakness sin seen seem abide by she ease easy easily 
 
 4 enjoy fall (el) feel (el) joy joyous law leave lie meek 
 
 5 avoid mill my occupy thy thee if off pity see talk 
 
 6 weak assign right Deity miss size; (ar) fear fire. 
 
 7 Third position: Allow at out atom back cap catch 
 
 8 aloud allowed view abuse eulogy fool lack laugh 
 
 9 loose purity sat suit; (ar) power poor room our hour; 
 10 thou use due few issue outside await advice. 
 
 (842:301:30). 
 
 98. PHRASES. By-his by-it by-many by-our by-that by- 
 you by-your by-which by-which-many by-which-you for-if
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 53 
 
 if-they in-anything many-times my-love shall-give she-says 
 she- was with-each some-may take-the-case think-this 
 whh'h-is which-the-times as-that for-fear for-his-advantage 
 he-has-never I-beg I-feel I-know I-know-nothing I-know- 
 that I-like in-effect in-his by-many in-that-day is-it is-it-a 
 is-it-as is-it-so is-it-you long-way many-have may-also 
 no-knowledge say-so so-be-it so-would was-right all-is. 
 EXERCISE 8. 
 
 99. 1. You-may-write-a review of all our many sayings. 
 2. On-the fourth Sunday of February we-were at-the smok- 
 ing ruins of-that large hotel. 3. We all know-that tire 
 ruins many mills. 4. You-may-write off the-eulogy on-the 
 life, laws anil-power of-the Jewish king. 5. I-will carry 
 that small watch this week and-if-it keeps the-right time I- 
 will give-you $25 for-it. 6. The huge earth moves along its 
 path many miles an hour. (83 2:15 1). 
 
 100. SPEED SENTENCE. To-study the-lives and -laws of-the 
 Jewish kings is-a common thing in our day and-age. (4 1) 
 
 L 
 
 To THE TEACHER: The following items form an impor- 
 tant and indispensable part of the program of every reci- 
 tation. Each member should be required to bring to the 
 class for the teacher's inspection a carefully prepared copy 
 of the list words, exercise, and speed sentence. It is also 
 well to require a long-hand, or type-written, copy of the 
 Translation. No conscientious teacher will neglect to give 
 at least a little time to the correction of each pupil's work at 
 every recitation. If the class is large it will be necessary to 
 correct such papers out of class hours. The different mem- 
 bers maybe called on miscellaneously to read each a sentence 
 from the translation, also from the exercise, also a number of 
 the list words. This must be done promptly and without 
 hesitation. Hence thorough preparation before-hand in the 
 way of writing and reading the lesson over many times, is 1 
 absolutely necessary.
 
 LESSON IX. 
 8-CIBCLE JUNCTIONS. 
 
 101. KEY. 1. Desk deposit maxim kasteu lesson pen- 
 cil facility vessel. 2. It-is-of-advantage submissive and- 
 his-life atheism exhibit Mexico bask. 
 
 WORD-SIGNS. 3. Us whose hope happy though whole 
 wholly young to-be. 4. Etc. (et cetera) disadvantage ex- 
 change post-office expect domestic salvation holy own. 
 
 PHRASES. 5. At-the-time by-such for-the-same-reason 
 it-is-ready it-is-to-be long-since it-is-so. 6. Such-has-never 
 which-is-no who-has-this with-the-same would-receive this- 
 period which-some. 7, 8 and 9. For key see list- words,' 
 sec. 116. 
 
 SENTENCES. 1. It-is our custom to-sell for cash. 2. 
 Tou-will however be allowed to exchange your map for-a 
 hat or cap or anything-else that-you-may lac-k. 3. The 
 rustic takes counsel with-the judge for half-an-hour but 
 says nothing. 4. For-some purpose he dispatches his son 
 to Cincinnati. 
 
 102. The rule laid down in Lesson VI. for joining the cir- 
 cle, applies only when s begins or ends a word. When the 
 circle occurs at the angle formed by the juncture of two 
 Btems, however, it should be written according to the follow- 
 ing directions: 
 
 103. When the circle is to be written, 1. At the junction 
 of two straight letters, it should be placed outside the angle, 
 as in desk or deposit. But when the two straight letters are in 
 a direct line forming no angle, s is written on the upper, or 
 right side of the stem, as in Mexico. 2. At the junction of a 
 straight letter and a curve, it should be written within, or 
 following the direction of the curve, as in maxim, hasten. 3. 
 At the junction of two curves, if it cannot follow the direc- 
 tion of both, as in lesson, pencil, vessel, it should almost al- 
 ways be written within the first curve, as in submissive, athe- 
 ism. Sometimes it is more convenient to attach it to the 
 second curve, as in facility. See Ls 1 and 2. 
 
 -54
 
 Plate 9, 
 
 
 x> x 
 
 V - 
 
 WOKD-SIGKS. 
 
 ->- ~ 
 
 -v 
 
 _ 
 
 WORD- FORMS 
 
 -7 
 
 SENTENCES. 
 
 >
 
 66 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 104. These rules have precisely the same application to 
 all phrases of which s forms a part, as in it-is-of-advantage, 
 and-his-life. L 2. 
 
 105. la bask (L 2), it will be observed that the vowel is 
 
 placed at the angle between \ b and k, which, it would 
 
 appear, is contrary to the rule laid down in Lesson VII. But 
 if the dot were placed at the end of k, the order of pro- 
 nunciation would necessarily be, b-s-a-k. Evidently the 
 rule in Lesson VII does not apply when a circle occurs be- 
 tween the two stems. In bask, and a few similar words, the 
 vowel must be placed in the angle, that is by the first stem, 
 so that it will be read before s. But the occasion for vowels 
 so situated is rare. 
 
 106. Beginners almost without exception write the vow- 
 el word-signs too large. They should be only one-fourth the 
 size of standard letters; e. g. i before, one-fourth of | d, 
 
 ^ to, one-fourth of \ p, n you one-fourth of / v ra, etc. 
 
 107. Placing the circle between two straight letters, write: 
 
 1 Custody dispatch discuss dispose exhibit dispel gazet 
 
 2 gospel justice succeed capacity Tuesday bestow dis- 
 8 guise dusk gossip hostile receipt restless upset re- 
 4 store custom task rustic risk. 
 
 6 Between a straight and curved letter: Citizen desire 
 
 6 desirous disarm dislike excel Harrison message music 
 
 7 resolve instil musical pacific society specify answer 
 
 8 dismiss visitor visit reason receive vivacity honesty 
 
 9 Massachusetts Minnesota Erastus (ar) Missouri officer 
 10 sarcasm (ar). 
 
 Between two curves: Innocence insanity mason scarce- 
 ly Cincinnati refusal (el) license (el) offensive; also write 
 sophomore sorrow genius science sublime Minneapolis. 
 
 (692:151:15). 
 
 108. PHRASES. Any-business at-such at-that at-this at- 
 your he-said it-is-a of-some since-that some-such take- 
 such that-is-never that-is-it this-bill this-day this-reason 
 this-time to-receive to-your was-some which-is-this who- 
 is-the who-is-it.
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 57 
 
 EXERCISE 9. 
 
 109. 1. The-citizeu deposits his salary in-the bank of- 
 Massachusetts with scarcely any risk. 2. The gazette says 
 that Harrison's army will leave Mexico on Saturday of-this 
 week. 3. It- will march all-the-way to Minneapolis, Minne- 
 soto, by-way of Missouri. 4. The-justice informs counsel 
 that-they-may if-they wish discuss the-case before-the-jury 
 for two hours. 5. Do-you-think that-the jury will say that- 
 the youth is insane? 6. Yes, they-have already said-so. 7. 
 He-receives the-message in despair. 8. Many also hear it 
 with sorrow and-dismay. 9. The young sophomore, they 
 say, has-a rare genius for poetry and-music. 10. I-hope 
 the-saying has no sarcasm in-it. 11. I-know, however, 
 that-he excels in science. 12. He never fails to exhibit vi- 
 vacity in society. 13. Instil right maxims into-the souls of 
 our youth. 14. You-will see that-they will-be the happier 
 for-it. (1513:151:30). 
 
 110. SPEED SENTENCE. I-hope, however, that-you-will 
 give-the youth whom-you teach the whole story of young 
 Absolom g (4 1). 
 
 111. TRANSLATE. 
 
 > V
 
 LESSON X. 
 PHRASEOGRAPHT. 
 
 112. RET. 1. I-die I-do I-had give-me pay-him alto- 
 gether I-think-that I-know-you. 
 
 WORD-SIGNS. 2. Lawyer similar similarity influence 
 Catholic speak speech spoke. 8. Because significant in- 
 significant why Justice-of-the-Peace continue falsehood 
 company. 4. Hence witness testimony mostly may-as- 
 well December thus those. 5. Happiness holiness enlarge 
 postmark mistake if-you-wish Savior. 
 
 PHRASES. 6. Because-of because-nothing because-we- 
 have cause-and-effect for-as-much public-service. 7. Those- 
 days to-expect continue-it to-whom too-much was-seen 
 what-say-you which-represent. 8. For-as-many who-sup- 
 pose-that as-if as- well-as-usual as-long-as-it-is for-the-same- 
 reason. 9. Have-seen have-to-be that-is-the they-said-so 
 they-speak this-notice this-purpose which-seems. 10 and 
 11 For key see list words, sec. 117. 
 
 SENTENCES. 1. Paul, going before-the Justice-of-the- 
 peace, says that Miles carried off some of -his live-stock. 
 2. The-justice sits and hears the-testimony of-each witness 
 in-the-case. 8. The-lawyer thinks it-would-be of no use 
 to-make-a speech to-the jury. 4. The-testimony shows him 
 to-be the-thief . 5. He-is now in jail. 
 
 113. Every stenographer must decennine for himself the 
 precise extent to which he can apply phraseography to ad- 
 vantage. Many do not phrase enough; while possibly some 
 do too much. Students, accustomed in long-hand to disjoin 
 words, invariably find phraseography a hindrance at first; 
 but the practice, once acquired, lessens the labor of report- 
 ing, and also adds to speed and legibility. Three words can 
 be phrased while two of them are being written separately; 
 hence the gain in speed. But words separated by the slight- 
 est rhetorical pause, or mark of punctuation, should not be 
 joined together. This adaptation of phraseography to syntax 
 renders short-hand notes far more legible than they would 
 otherwise be.
 
 Plate 10. 
 
 ' 1 ~. 1 , 
 
 _ Y-, 
 
 WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 \ 1 
 
 \ 
 
 K^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 O ^ 
 
 
 10 
 
 11 
 
 (T 
 
 ^N V<1 
 
 SENTENCES. 
 
 -J - \ ^_x 
 
 
 I
 
 60 REPORTING STYLE OP SHORT-HAND. 
 
 114. The first word of a phrase, which for convenience we 
 will call the leader, should be written in its proper position; 
 the words which follow may then be allowed to occupy what- 
 ever position with reference to the line that the phrasi , in 
 due course, may give them. For example, / is the leader in 
 I-think-that, and I-know-you; give, the leader in give-me. In 
 these sentences, that, know, and you, are thrown out of posi- 
 tion, but the writing is none the less legible on this account. 
 The real value and beauty of phrasing, and its philosophy 
 also, will be better understood after the learner has had 
 some experience as a practical short-hand writer. The sub- 
 ject is more fully treated in lesson XLII. 
 
 115. By reference to I-die, and I-had (L 1), it will be seen 
 that the first word can sometimes be so written that the 
 second, also, shall occupy its proper position. Generally, 
 however, the reader does not regard the position of words 
 after the first or second, but relies upon the context, which 
 is a sure guide. The necessity imposed on the writer of 
 locating words out of their proper position, occasions no 
 drawback upon legibility. 
 
 116. The phrase should be discontinued when an unusual 
 word occurs, or one that must be written in its proper posi- 
 tion in order to be unambiguous. E. g., give-him, and pay- 
 me, should not be joined, for fear of conflict with give-me 
 and pay-him. L 1. 
 
 117. 1 Vocalize: Male female dismay parody Caleb; 
 
 2 1 pos.: sky cog knock mock nick. Without vowels. 
 
 3 1 pos.: oppose rise scheme arise (ar). 3 pos.: amuse 
 
 4 accuse pass passage passive sad induce absence south. 
 6 2 pos.: reach assume form (ar) evade series speed 
 
 6 speedy sphere beauty dominate alleviate cavity cool 
 
 7 Jewish academy academic factory ensue disobey 
 
 8 anxious audacity besiege caustic chastise luxury 
 
 9 depository despair (ar) expire (ar) extinguish* gasp 
 
 10 Augustus Justus disengage dismal dissolve egotism 
 
 11 immensity maximum cohesive solicit vestige veracity 
 
 12 decimal clastic exile felicity garrison pacify parasol
 
 EEPORT1NG STYLE OF SHORT-IIASrD. 61 
 
 13 spasm tenacity velocity Joseph assassin incendiary 
 
 14 muscle exterior cancel (el) chancellor (ar) counsel (el) 
 
 15 counsellor (ar) damsel domicile fasten gymnasium 
 
 16 salary search solitary scarce (ar) malicious select 
 
 17 resume besides disease deceit deceive decide design 
 
 18 despise decease excite exceed false insight incite 
 
 19 inside likewise business mix offence paradox Scotch 
 1 go sleep sweep epistle alike (el) misery reside resign 
 
 21 revise righteous sincere recite rejoice anxiety* excuse 
 
 22 animosity casual casualty apostle* subdue tax absorb 
 
 23 rescue reduce affair botany deviate dialogue efficacy 
 
 24 embody indemnify ingenuity intimacy involve nomi- 
 
 25 nate bachelor beneath demagogue dialect dogma 
 "*^6~ enigma epidemic aesthetic gypsy* infect pathetic 
 
 27 ramify topic Anthony Timothy Tennessee Louisiana 
 
 28 apology obviate eminence apologize assets avarice 
 
 29 debase delicious depose diffuse factious fictitious 
 
 30 obvious* paradise survive various vex severe (ar) 
 
 31 enforce (ar) ethics poetic. (1876-2:30.) 
 
 118. PHRASES. Because-of had-the do-you have-seen 
 those-that those-which to-such-a to-suppose was-said 
 which-is-now which-is-the which-shall who-are-you who- 
 come ' be-seen that-day that-is-it that-we that-time they- 
 that they-think-that to-take was-it-so was-it-said was-so 
 which-many which-may which-you will-it-be you-may 
 you-make at-those-times by-as-many by-reason-of in-the- 
 same-way it-is-to-be it-is-long many-such many-things 
 never-said of-as-many of-his-own of-several. 
 
 EXERCISE 10. 
 
 119. 1. Your son is-a wise youth, because he seeks to-do 
 right. 2. In our city we-have much snow in-the-month of 
 December. 8. Joseph Jackson the-lawyer has-a-large in- 
 fluence, and-he-may resign his office. 4. We-think of going 
 into-a business scheme together. 5. Our affairs are now in- 
 such shape that-we may do-so if-we wish. 6. Your absence 
 in Alabama may restore your health, and-thus be-the cause
 
 62 REPORTING 3TYLJ* OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 of-rauch happiness. 7. How-long-do-you think you-will re- 
 side in-the South? 8. I- will leave for Dakota in-the-month 
 of May. (9931.) 
 
 120. SPEED SENTENCE. As-to-his design in seeking the 
 house of-the justice-of-the-peaee, the-witness spoke a-fal-c- 
 hood in-giving his testimony to-the jury (3 1.) 
 
 121. TRANSLATE. 
 
 SUGGESTION. Most pupils press the pen too hard upon 
 the paper, making both the light and heavy lines heavier 
 than they should be. This extra pressure means, more fric- 
 tion, more labor, more time, less speed. The rapid sten- 
 ographer always touches the paper lightly. It is an excellent 
 plan to cultivate lightness of touch by frequent practice in 
 writing the thin stems as fine as possible, ^executing them 
 rapidly, barely touching the paper with the pen. 
 
 The learner who also cultivates a compact style of writing, 
 will in the end be both more rapid and accurate. By com- 
 pactness of style is meant that the characters be written not 
 only small, but closely together. The hand-writing of most 
 all beginners is too large and sprawling.
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 63 
 
 QUESTIONS FOB REVIEW. 
 
 How many letters in the consonant alphabet? Name 
 them consecutively. Name the light stems; shaded stems. 
 What is the rule for writing words with reference to the 
 base line? What is the proper length for a stem (consonant 
 letter)? (See Sec. 5.) May one outline represent more than 
 one word? (Sec. 9.) How may ambiguity be avoided in 
 such cases? What is the value of shading? (Sec. 10.) Is it 
 strictly necessary in all cases? Is this system orthographic 
 (following the common spelling), or phonetic? (12.) Give 
 examples of the difference between these two methods of 
 writing. What are the equivalents of x, g, and wh? (Note, 
 p. 21.) What is a word-sign? A sign-word? (16.) How are 
 proper names indicated? (18.) Why is el sometimes used 
 instead of lay? (21) Which is the more used, ar or ray? 
 (26.) What are some of the advantages of ray over ar? 
 What is phrasing? (27.) Define a phraseograph; a phraseo- 
 gram. How in phrasing is /expressed? (27.) He? (28.) 
 You? (29.) What is the difference between chay and ray? 
 (31.) How are they distinguished* Give specific cases 
 where ar is to be used; also ray. (32.) What is the number 
 of long vowels? (38.) Give them in order. How many 
 vowel places? (39.) Repeat the rhyme in Sec. 40. Explain 
 the nominal consonant and its use. (41.) How are vowels 
 placed with reference to consonants, in order to be read first? 
 (44.) In phrasing, how are the, and, a and an expressed? 
 (50-51.) Name the diphthongs. (59.) On which side of 
 straight stems is iss written? (62.) Curved stems? (61.) 
 How many short vowels? (78.) Give them in order. State, 
 in your own words, the rule given in Sec. 81. When should 
 s be expressed by the circle, and when by the stem? (85.) 
 How many consonant positions? (92-94.) Describe each. 
 What is the purpose of the scheme of position? How is the 
 circle written when it occurs between two straight stems? 
 A straight stem and a curve? Two curves? (103.) What 
 is the first word of a phrase called? (114.) What are some 
 of the restrictions placed on phrasing? (115-116.)
 
 LESSON XI. 
 SEZ-CIRCLE, BMP AND COALESCENTS. 
 
 122. KEY. 1. Races chases pauses noises gazes reposes 
 system necessary. 2. Enthusiast success successes suc- 
 cessor exercises subsist Mississippi. 8. Camp ample 
 temple thump sympathize ambitious embark ambiguous. 
 
 4. Wet wed muse mule quack wood squeeze Delia 
 
 5. Web fuse yam nephew Utah now (or knew) Yankee. 
 
 6. Walk wit weep York ague weed cue war. 7. Sweet 
 switch weave wing Quebec liquid Idaho Julia. 
 
 WORD AND PHRASE SIGNS. 8. Important importance 
 improve improvement may-be simple simply impossible. 
 9. Temperate temperance square acquit acute senior 
 Junior nevertheless. 10. Failure uniform unite unity 
 Europe quick howsoever idea. 11. Height higher white 
 eye yet ye year beyond. 12. Iowa highway highly 
 United-States is-seen is-said it-is-simply this-is. 13. This- 
 syatera gives-us takes-us loves-us is-such as-soon-as in- 
 this-city. 14. Is-his (or his-is, is-as); as-has (or as-is, as-his, 
 has-his); because-such it-is-something it-is-sufficient this- 
 has-never. 15. For key see list-words, sec. 132. 
 
 123. The syllables sis, sys, sez, ces, sus, and other j similar, 
 are denoted- by a circle fonned some five times lai ger than 
 the small one representing s. See races, chases, system, and 
 all words in Ls 1 and 2. 
 
 124. The two labials \ p and \ 6, when occurring after 
 > m, are sometimes indicated by shading this curve, as in 
 camp, ample, embark. See L 3. This thickened m is called 
 
 *-** emp, and has the force of mp or mb. 
 
 125. The principles of abbreviation explained in this les- 
 son are also made use of in phraseography. In may-be, for 
 example, ^^ m, the sign for may, is shaded to denote the 
 following \ be. Emp in this case is in reality an abbrevi- 
 ated phraseograph, and is called a phrase-sign. The words 
 "is-said" are expressed by the phrase-sign sezde, which is 
 obtained by enlarging the circle in f said. 
 
 -64
 
 late II. 
 
 1 x? f 
 
 n O 
 
 4 c 
 
 ./-IN 
 
 7. 1 / V 
 
 U U 
 
 12 
 13 
 
 14 
 15 
 
 
 P 
 
 O
 
 06 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HANi*. 
 
 KEY TO PLATE 11 B. 
 
 126. Ls 1, 2, I. For key see list words, sec. /!&. 
 Ls 4, 5, 6. For key see phrases, sec. 133. 
 
 SENTENCES. 7. You-may-write this and-au succeeding 
 exercises with red ink if-you-wish. 8. We would much 
 rather that-you would use simply the-common ink however. 
 
 9. A-large lamp was sitting by-the door in-the white temple. 
 
 10. That-is what-the Yankee's Irish wife said she saw. 
 
 11. Our temperance-speaker 's quick in wit, with-which he 
 unites much irony. 
 
 127. The time has now come for us to inquire into the 
 small half-circle word-signs, some of which are w yet, * we, 
 5 what, > would, and you. How are they obtained? 
 Let us see. First, if to the stem | t we prefix ye, the word 
 yet is the result. Now, instead of using f yay to express 
 the y, the light dot vowel is modified, or rather transformed, 
 into a semi-circle. This little half-circle represents the 
 double sound of ye in the word yet, which maybe written 
 thus, w yet. The pupil will take notice that the semi-circle 
 is similar to the dot in two respects. ^Lrst, it is light, and 
 again, it occupies the second vowel-place. They differ only 
 in form, one being a dot, and the other a semi-circle. The 
 word-sign ^ yet is derived by simply dropping the | t. Then 
 further, the sign ~ beyond is derived by dropping all except 
 
 the half-circle in ^C beyond. Here, the half-circle ex- 
 presses the double s *~-1 sound yo, and differs in form only 
 
 from the first-place light dash (which signifies the short 
 sound of o), being like it in respect to vowel-place, and the 
 absence of shading. The two semi-circles, above described, 
 differ in this respect: That the first bows downward, the 
 other upward. All semi-circles in fact which express the 
 union of y with a dot-vowel, bow downwards, while the y 
 dash-vowels bow upwards. W dot-vowels bow to the left, as 
 in wet, wed; and w dash-vowels to the right, as in wood. See 
 L4.
 
 - 
 
 2 V. O 
 
 sj 
 
 8 > .. / 
 
 9 -/~ r 
 
 6 * 
 10 ... 
 
 U...^.... 
 
 X^L 
 
 'C 
 
 L 
 
 SENTENCES. 
 
 "t 
 
 ) r 
 
 TRANSLATE. 
 
 1 U ' 
 
 J ) 
 
 b 
 
 S 
 
 S
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 The Boys and the Horse shoes. 
 
 A MEMO It Y KELP. 
 
 C ^ 
 
 EXPLANATION. The w-coalescents are horizontal, as 
 distinguished from the y-coalescents, which are vertical, as 
 shown by the arms of the first and second boys respectively. 
 The Ws dot to the left, and dash to the right; the Ys dot down- 
 wards, and dash upwards. 
 
 129. The learner will distinctly bear in mind that the pre- 
 fixing of w or y to any vowel simply transforms the dot or 
 dash into a semi-circle; and this semi-circle is light or shaded 
 according as the vowel is long or thort, and invariably occu- 
 pies the same vowel position. 
 
 180. The coalesce nt signs should be formed as small as 
 possible, and should be complete half-circles, neither angular 
 or flattened out. 
 
 131. In the following table the signs have a force equiva- 
 lent to that of the FULL-FACED and italic type in the corre- 
 sponding words. 
 
 TABLE OF COALESCENTS. 
 
 W-SERIES. 
 
 we 
 
 wa-ve 
 
 wa-s 
 
 wa-lk 
 wo-ke 
 woo 
 
 ttn'-th P wo-t 
 we-t s t0o-rst 
 
 t-wa-ng ^ woo-\ 
 
 Y-SERIES. 
 
 132. 
 
 ye 
 yea 
 ya-rn 
 1 Sez-circle: 
 
 yaw-n 
 yo-ke 
 
 you 
 Cases 
 
 ^ yt-m 
 u ye-t 
 w ya-m 
 paces 
 
 yo-n 
 you-ug 
 
 vices fixes census 
 
 2 supposes refuses notices decisive desist excess exces- 
 
 3 sive exercise exist hypothesis necessity insist emphasis 
 
 4 emphasize analysis* (el) Texas Jesus senses surpasses 
 
 5 molasses.
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 69 
 
 6 Using Emp: Pump damp encamp example* lamp 
 
 7 lump sample sympathy imbecile* ambiguity* embellish 
 
 8 embezzle* empire limp pomp symbol Sampson. 
 
 9 Using coalescents: Dke hew cube cubic duel India 
 
 10 witch swing wash equip ice ^nf 1 " 1 Irish (shay) 
 
 11 irony (ar) item dew widow. 
 
 12 (See Vocabulary for outlines.) Acquiesce anguish 
 
 13 annual ave:iue barrier exquisite genial ingenious 
 
 14 luxurious requisite tedious. (70 2 1.) 
 ^133. PHIIASES. (The first twenty-one of these phrases are 
 engraved in Ls 4, 5, and 6 of Plate B, the order of arrange- 
 ment being different.) That-this-is-the this-never no- 
 njicessity was-necessary this-is-new this-is-never jt-is- 
 un necessary it-is-as is-as-far-as this-is-nothing thafc-it-may- 
 be that-is-now since-this-is-the-case: that-is-necessary many- 
 cases if-necessary in-his-system have-likewise for-example 
 as-soon-as-that as-5t-may as-soon-as-the as-this-is is-neces- 
 sary it-is-such such-cases that-if-necessary that-this-is-now 
 this-is-become this-is-it that-is-never this-is-now they-never. 
 
 EXERCISE 11. 
 
 134. 1. Howsoever much you-may wish to change our 
 money-system, the subject of-importance to discuss this year 
 
 1 is-that of temperance. 2. This-is our regular summer uni- 
 form. 3. It-is-to-be seen in-the United-States camps always 
 at-this-time of year. 4. It-is-never to-be seen in Europe 
 however. 5. He loves-us and-he shows his love in-all-that- 
 he does for-us. 6. This city lacks some necessary improve- 
 ments. 7. This-system has already come into use, especial- 
 ly in many of-the large cities. 8. It will soon be in common 
 use in-the United-States. (9821.) 
 
 135. SPEED SENTENCE. Temperance is-an important item 
 in-the improvement of-the health of-the United-States army. 
 
 (5-1.)
 
 LESSON XII. 
 
 DOUBLE CONSONANTS. THE L-HOOK. 
 
 136. KEY. 1. Pel bel tel del chel jel kel gel fel vel 
 thl thel shel. 2. Blow bowl glass black settle sickle 
 playful angle bushel. 3. Diploma collegiate total deli- 
 cacy Mitchell Angelica coeval mythological postal. 
 4. Tell till blew apply able awful full flew call clew. 
 
 WORD AND PHRASE SIGNS. 5. It-will until at-all com- 
 ply people belong follow angel capable challenge. 
 6. Each-will which-will children much-will equal difficult 
 difficulty glory glorious deliver. 7. Develop develop- 
 ment humble neglect negligent they-will as-it-will such- 
 will tell-us. 8. Most-likely collect recollect respect re- 
 spectable respectability collect-on-delivery (C. O. D). 
 
 PHRASES. 9. As-long-as-possible as-much-as-possible in- 
 its-place is-it-likely it-is-difficult peculiar-people till-his- 
 own-time. 10 and 11. For key see list words, sec. 142. 
 
 SENTENCES. 1. Philosophy will clip an angel's wings. 
 2. You emphasized the-wrong syllable in class. 8. This 
 will -never do at-all. 4. You-should use this-system as- 
 soon-as you-are able. 5. Much-will-be the-time that-it-will 
 save you. 6. The-reason is that-it-is-a speedy as any, be- 
 sides being far easier. 
 
 137. The liquids I and r, by reason of their vowel elements 
 unite intimately, or coalesce, with other consonants which 
 immediately precede them. For example, I unites very 
 nearly with p in play, and with fin Jit/; r unites closely with 
 p in pry and with/ in offer. These double-sounds are of very 
 frequent occurrence in our language, and are usually ex- 
 pressed by a modification, or "hooking," of the stem of the 
 first consonant. 
 
 138. To express an added I, straight stems are formed 
 with a small hook at the beginning, placed on the right, or 
 s-circle side. To illustrate, \ called pel, has the force of 
 pi in playful, diploma, etc. This hook is written on the con- 
 cave side of curved stems, thus v__ jl, \ thl. The letters of 
 
 70
 
 \ - v r f 
 v xr 
 
 c c 4 
 
 .*_ V 
 
 r r * ...... * \ 
 
 WOI!I)-8I(JNS. 
 
 v-v 
 
 _..f f .__.__. 1. 
 
 1VORD-PORM8. 
 
 A 
 
 L 
 
 11 
 
 SENTENCES. 
 
 . f 
 
 DC r 
 
 >-t <
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 the 1-hook series are named pel, bel, tel, etc. See Ls 1, 2, and 
 8. These hooked or double letters are vocalized like other 
 consonants, as blow, glass, total, coeval. But the double let- 
 ter is not used if a vowel occurs between the two consonant 
 sounds denoted by it; thus, in bowl, the hook cannot be em- 
 ployed, because the vowel o occurs between b and I. But in 
 blow, in which the sounds of 6 and I blend, the double conso- 
 nant \ bel is used. The hook may and should be employed in 
 all places where no vowel intervenes between any of the double 
 consonants, pel, bel, etc., given in Ll. Sometimes the book is 
 used in cases even where a short vowel comes between, as in 
 tell, till, full, etc. This is common in words of more than one 
 syllable, as delicacy, collegiate, L 3. 
 
 139. The s-circle is prefixed to the double consonants of 
 the 1-hook series by being written within tlie hook, as in settle, 
 sickle. In such cases, in order that there may be space for 
 it, 8 is jrmed quite small and somewhat flattened. 
 
 140. The adjective ending ful is usually expressed by the 
 doubl consonant./eJ, as in playful. 
 
 141 The hooked consonant should be written with one 
 strok^ of the pen. By so doing, not only is speed iacreased, 
 but the liability is lessened of forming the hook too large or 
 too cramped. 
 
 142. 1 Write: Assemble assembly available battle 
 
 2 blame Jrianaeless blank blush chapel circle claim class 
 
 3 eiergy climax close club clumsy clothe declaim double 
 
 4 emblem employ enclose English entTEIe fable faculty. 
 
 5 festival imply implicit globe legal Illegal (el) inflame 
 
 6 level local mingle ..admirable novelty noble oblige ob- 
 
 7 stacle parable place pledge poetical radical reflect 
 
 8 stable staple table technical initial* tenable dimple 
 
 9 unable syllable uncle variable vital vocal ability 
 10 Florida display disclaim disclose exclaim invisible 
 
 '71 possible visible academical amicable bashful Bible 
 12 blemish bliss block blossom cattle chemical classify 
 18 closet couple likely declivity despicable devil displace
 
 ^ 
 
 V 
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 14 dissemble Episcopal fatal flesh fling flour fluency 
 
 15 foretell (ar) gable glimpse gloom horrible jingle joy- 
 
 16 ful reply label miserable nimble placid plague plank 
 
 17 plastic plausible pliable pliant plum plump plus rival 
 
 18 shelf * shingle smuggle stubble survival tackle tangle 
 
 19 terrible click tumble typical village vehicle wrinkle 
 
 20 Clarence HannibalJ^Olara Flora; (using ar) clear clerk 
 
 21 declare implore deplore desirable ramble irresistable*; 
 
 22 (vocalize) applause bleak clay clue fleece glue clump 
 
 23 ply Abel Mabel blue; 1 pos. clock clog gloss clause 
 
 24 climb calling evil feeble liable official* please title 
 
 25 idle; 3 pos. allowable clash clasp pupil suitable; phil- 
 
 26 osophy* philosopher* kill. (17563). 
 143. PHRASES. All-classes all-places all-respects be- 
 cause-possibly I-call in-any-possible is-it-possible it-is-clear- 
 ly take-place tell-him tell-such tell-them tell-you that- 
 difficulty those-places till-some till-such till-that till-this 
 till-you which-has-possibly which-possibly with-equal-ad- 
 vantage with-equal-effect would-possibly. 
 
 EXERCISE 12. 
 
 V / 144. 1. A snake declares war on-an eagle. 2. They en- 
 gage in fearful battle. 3. They display no delicacy. 
 4. They-make-the air vocal with-the clash of arms. 5. The 
 snake has-the advantage. 6. He-will likely kill the-poor 
 eagle. 7. A-rustic looses the-coil of-the snake. 8. The 
 eagle flies away forthwith. 9. The escape of-the eagle in- 
 flames the snake. 10. His poison flies into-the rustic's 
 milk bottle. 11. The-rustic knows nothing of-the 
 possible evil. 12. He applies the-bottle to-his lips. 
 13. But-the eagle flying back delivers him. 14. He seizes 
 the-bottle with-his claws aud carries it up mto-the sky. 
 
 (10321). 
 
 145. SPEED SENTENCE. They- will continue to-come until- 
 you tell-him that-it-will most-likely be unnecessary to-collect 
 the class together (4 1).
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 146. 
 
 TRANSLATE. 
 
 MNEMON1CAL AIDS. 
 Fig. A. Fitf.B. 
 
 L-Hook R-Hook 
 
 L(eft)-Hand R(ight)-Hand 
 
 L (ess) commonly used R(epeatedly) used. 
 
 SEMICIRCLES. The very apt little stanza of Mr. Benn Pit- 
 man will greatly aid the pupil in remembering the coal- 
 escents: 
 
 Floating boats are ye, yay, yah; 
 
 Capsized, are yaw, yo, you. 
 Waning moons are we, way, wah; 
 
 And waxing, waw, wo, woo.
 
 QUESTIONS FOB, REVIEW. 
 
 What is the relative size of the sez-circle? What syllables 
 does it represent? Without referring to the book, give five 
 words in which this circle should be used. How may it be 
 employed in phrasing? What is the name applied to the 
 shaded m? What consonant double sounds does it repre- 
 sent? How is it used in phrasing? How many w-coales- 
 cents? Y-coalescents? Repeat all the coalescents in or- 
 der. Name those which bow upwards; downwards; to 
 the right; to the left. What is the form of character which 
 is used to represent coalescents? How do they compare 
 with the vowel signs as to place and shading? Name five 
 sign-words which are represented by semi-circles. Name 
 the 1-hook series. Where is this hook located with reference 
 to straight letters? Curved letters? In what cases must 
 I be expressed by the stem instead of the hook? Name five 
 words from memory in which the 1-hook should be used. 
 Cite cases where this hook is used in phrasing. 
 
 RrQUIREMENTS. 
 
 Give three words that contain the sez-circle ; the 1-hook; 
 emp; 1-hook and iss; iss and emp; iss and sez; 1-hook 
 and sez. Render the following skeleton words: Iss-k-sez, 
 iss-b-sez-t, iss-k-emp, m-l-sez, pl-sez, pl-emp, gl-emp- 
 iss, fl-m-z, kl-iss-r, kl-iss-t, kl-emp, iss-m-gl. 
 
 To THE TEACHER. A familiar knowledge of the word- 
 signs is so desirable that the pupil should be encouraged to 
 learn them as well as the letters of the alphabet itself. Some 
 students commit them to memory in the order in which they 
 are presented in this book. This is far from a waste of time; 
 indeed, all learners would find it time saved in the long run 
 to do likewise. Every teacher who intends using this book 
 to some extent is advised to commit to mind the title of each 
 lesson it contains, and in the order given. 
 
 75
 
 LESSON XTTT. 
 
 B-HOOK SERIES. DIV. 1. 
 
 148. KEY. 1. Per ber ter der cher jer ker ger. 
 2. Pray brow gray destroy disturb exaggerate program 
 crystal. 8. Cross-eyed cypress quaker trouble diagram 
 criticism Nebraska operator. 
 
 WORD AND PHRASE SIGNS. 4. Appear principal prin- 
 ciple practice practical liberty member remember 
 number brother degree. 5. Truth true doctor dear 
 during dark each-are which-are much-are danger larger. 
 6. Christian-ity care occur cure accurate inaccurate 
 accuracy dear-sir withdraw. 7. Correct character liberty- 
 of-the-people liberty-of-the-press Member-of-Congress 
 Member-of-the-Legislature practicable proficiency. 
 
 PHRASES. 8. Any-person I-am-truly in-the-church take- 
 care my-dear Member-of-the-Bar Christian-principles 
 many-persons. 9. All-churches in-person may-bring such- 
 appears take-courage was-truly young-person. 10. For 
 key see list words, sec. 152. 
 
 SENTENCES. 1. The eye sees what-it brings the-power to 
 see. 2. Truth-and ceremony are two things. 3. Characters 
 never change. 4. Genius is-the faculty of growth. 5. Life 
 is-a comedy to-him who thinks, and-a tragedy to-him who 
 feels. 6. The-truth of -truths is love. 7. The-drama is-the 
 book of-the people. 8. What vigor absence adds to-love. 
 
 149. Another initial hook, written on the left of the stem, 
 or side opposite t/ie l-kook, indicates the added r, and is 
 attached to the eight straight letters, and to eight of the 
 curves. The consonants modified by the attachment of this 
 hook are called per, ber, ter, etc. L 1. The r-hook should 
 always be employed where no A r owel occurs between the two 
 sounds expressed by the double consonant, as in pray, brow, 
 gray. L. 2. 
 
 150. The r-hook occurs mostly at the beginning of words ; 
 but sometimes it is to be written medially, or in the middle 
 of the word, as in destroy, disturb. Here the circle is located 
 on the 1 ft side of the stem out of its usual position in 
 
 -76-
 
 t A \ 
 
 V'V 
 
 }J!atr 13. 
 1 / 
 
 X 
 
 f. 
 
 WORO-8IUN8. 
 
 _ ..... \ A .._9.._.5X_ ........... -A A - ( 
 
 
 ..._. ( \ _ 
 
 " 7 
 
 ^^f) / 
 
 7 
 
 6 
 
 WORD-FORMS. 
 
 ,KVi) 7 
 
 SENTENCES. 
 
 ~"1 ( V C ~\T^~A. 
 
 I \\ ^o V_p 
 
 V-- 
 
 MI ru^ 
 
 ;s c>. 
 
 "T xffi 
 
 / c,
 
 78 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 order that the hook may be prefixed to t. Strictly, however, 
 it is not a hook, but an offset, which serves the same purpose. 
 The hook is sometimes expressed also by retracing the pre- 
 ceding consonant, as in program, diagram. Ls 2 and 3. 
 
 151. It is easy for the learner to get the 1 and r hooks 
 mixed. Figures A and B will be found useful as memory 
 helps. It will be seen that the 1-hook is obtained by bending 
 the index finger of the L-Hand (L-eft Hand). On the con- 
 trary, the r-hook is produced by bending the first finger of 
 the R-Hand (R-ight Hand). As there are more > than I 
 sounds in our language, so the r-hook occurs more frequently 
 than the 1; and the r-hand, also, is used more than the 1-hand. 
 "^152. 1 Write, using the r-hook and \o\vels : Brace breech 
 2 bribe broil grow brake praise tribe utter acre brawl 
 8 caprice crape crawl crew crow dray grape grass 
 
 4 growl odor pauper powder prize prose pry slaughter 
 
 5 taper trace trail 4oiiiuiuiLjtJtTTr Beatrice Bertha Grace; 
 
 6 1 pos.: Greece cry creek Greek. Without vowels: 
 
 7 Abbreviate approach appropriate -attoni&y__break baker 
 
 8 broke breathe brevity breach bring _courags crazy 
 
 9 create creator critic cruel crusade currency deciv;i.-e 
 
 10 democracy depress distress drug dress drill drink 
 
 11 drop drum drunk educator embrace encourage extra 
 
 12 extreme proceed trump gradual gfttsp gravity grocer 
 
 13 impress industry* indusliiimu* keeper labor ledger 
 
 14 liberal lucre Ludicrous major maker matrimony 
 15~microscope jnistress neighbor operate paper parallel 
 
 16 precious presence press pearl prepare pretty precede} 
 
 17 process (sez) progress propose prosper provoke redress 
 
 18 reproach soldier treason triumph vapor vigor abridge 
 
 19 April arbitrary ardor ascribe barber beggar betray 
 
 20 produce brass broker broom brush butcher cathedral 
 
 21 charter chemistry cherish copper courageous* courtesy 
 
 22 cracker grub crimson criticise* crook crop crucify 
 
 23 crumb crush crutch dexterous digress dipper Peter 
 
 24 garter gracious grumble Hebrew cream fibre manager*
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 79 
 
 25 monogram obtrusive patrol intrigue personate poker 
 
 26 trustee trap track trim tropic trunk Ambrose Andrew 
 
 27 Edgar Patrick; 1 pos. Agree crime try cross daughter 
 
 28 draw dream dry across eager increase preach. 
 
 (18768.) 
 
 EXERCISE 13. 
 
 153. 1. He that-takes a wife takes care. 2. If-you would 
 create something, you-must-be something. 3. Prayer is-the 
 voice of faith. 4. All things with-which we deal preach to 
 usXo. A-Member-of-the-Bar became a-Member-of-Congress. 
 
 l He spoke in praise of-the liberty-of-the-press. 7. He said 
 ^~that-it-should publish but-the simple truth. 8. If so, the- 
 liberty-of-the-people would-be in no danger. 9. The-pupil 
 who wishes to-become a-quick writer should practice daily. 
 10. Dear-sir, I-am now able, and I-will write-you in-these 
 funny characters telling you the-news. (104 2 1.) 
 
 154. SPEED SENTENCE. Your brother has-as-much to-do 
 as-a New- York ^aker at Christmas-time. (6 1.)
 
 LESSON XIV. 
 K-HOOK SERIES. DIV. 2. 
 
 156. KEY. 1. Fer ver thr ther sher zhr mer ner. 
 2. Phrase favor throttle bother harsher glazier merge 
 machinery. 8. Virginia either Thursday numerous sugar 
 farmer tiger generous. 
 
 WORD-SIGNS. 4. Every very Mr. mere remark remark- 
 able more mercy humor. 5. There their they-are other 
 from pleasure measure therefore commercial. 6. Hear 
 nor honor honorable manner owner universe universal 
 university. 
 
 PHRASES. 7. All-their any-more be-sure each-other 
 from-church in-refereuce-to in-respect-to from-some-plarr. 
 8. From-the-plaee in-the-same-manner in-this-maniH-r 
 many-more more-likely there-is-never there-is-such there- 
 may-be. 9 and 10. For key see list words, sec. 160. 
 
 SENTENCES. 1. So sad, so fresh, the days that are no- 
 more. 2. You-arrive at-truth through poetry, and-I ar- 
 rive at poetry through truth. 8, Lay a-bridge of silver for- 
 a flying enemy. 4. What-is becoming is honorable, and 
 what-is honorable is becoming. 5. The eyes of-other peo- 
 ple are-the eyes that ruin us. 6. Wise judges are-we of 
 each-other. 
 
 157. In writing the word ^ oval, the 1-hook is, accord- 
 ing to rule, written within, or on the concave side, of the 
 curve v. The hook cannot be written conveniently on the 
 opposite, or convex, side of the curve. Then how shall we 
 write over, where r instead of I, is to be expressed ? This is 
 
 done by merely reversing v. vl, the character ^ vr 
 
 resulting, over being expressed thus, i. The reversing of 
 fel, vel, thl, etc., brings the hook upon the left or r-hook side 
 of the stems. No conflict is occasioned thereby, since r is 
 not attached to ~^ r ~*\ w, ; s, ) z. LI. 
 
 158. To express the added r, "-^ m and ^_^ n are modified
 
 ;v > 
 
 ) 
 
 *> 
 
 WOHD-SION9. 
 
 ^\ 
 
 WORD-FORMS. 
 
 V- 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 ) .f ; v
 
 83 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 by both prefixing the hook, and thickening the stem; thus 
 ^"^ mr, ^^ nr. No ambiguity results from this shading 
 
 of the consonants m and n, since no hook is attached to either 
 mp or ng. See merge, machinery, numerous, generous. Ls 2 
 and 3. 
 
 159. In some word-forms containing mr, where it is in- 
 convenient to express the hook it is entirely omitted, thick- 
 ened x-v m, (mp), being employed in lieu of mr, as m farm- 
 er. L 8. 
 
 160. Write: 1. Rumor tremor Homer energy* dinner 
 2 banner exhonorate lunar over tanner Christopher 
 8 Frauds Frank average* offer camphor Denver over- 
 4 sight Friday silver leisure pressure treasure censure* 
 6 exposure inniivuiaaiy diverge livery Luther dishonor* 
 6 perverse throng verb verge verse Oliver wager Arthur 
 
 ^J Roger Victor treacherous* favorite pffS^erb prefer 
 
 8 gather &luiriff three umbrella repress slipper spider 
 
 \9 tragedy -teag|c_ traitor problem* profess professor* 
 
 10 prolong propriety recur prairie preface premise proni- 
 
 11 ium primary prior. Vocalize, throw; 1 pos. auUw+P' 
 
 12 authority crisis (sez), decree former fever froe preside 
 18 prime minor oppressive prereTse (sez) price Christmas; 
 
 14 8 pos. address affirm presume scatter -Bsmtw troop 
 
 15 through; San Francisco apprehend. (88-2:30 1:30). 
 
 161. PHRASES. All -others be-there be-very but-their 
 do-their from-a from-among from-this from-him from- 
 many from-our from-you from-your had-their it- 1 '" their 
 there-have there-was there-will in-a-measure they-are- 
 so through-many ' 
 
 EXERCISE 14. 
 
 162. 1. A-dog crosses a-bridge with-a piece of flesh in-his 
 mouth. 2. He sees his-own shadow in-the crook bel'>w. 
 8. He takes-it to-be-that of-sonoe^-other dog with-a piece of 
 game double his-o\vn in size. C 4. He therefore drops his 
 piece and-vigorou&ly attacks the-other dog. 5. His desire
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 is to-take the-larger pitce from-him. 6. In-this-way he 
 loses both pieces. 7. He loses that-which he grasps for in- 
 thf-creok, because-it-is-a shadow. 8. He loses his-own be- 
 cause-the-creek washes it away. (94 1 -.45 :45). 
 
 1G3. SPEED SENTENCE. I-suppose he-has too-much hon- 
 or t >-be-the author of-such-a rumor in-reference-to Oliver 
 tlif-philosopher. (92). 
 
 TRANSLATE. 
 
 \ 
 
 HINTS TO THE STUDENT. In learning the list-words a good 
 
 plan is to write the proper characters in a column at the left 
 
 margin of a sheet of practice paper, afterwards filling out 
 
 each line by writing the words over and over, gradually in- 
 
 ;ng the speed. 
 
 Always carry in your pocket some short-hand book, manu- 
 scri pt or exercise to read at leisure moments, while traveling, 
 waiting for cars or steamboats, for lazy people to keep ap- 
 pointments, or whenever an opportunity for a few minute's 
 study may be had. The sign-book is suitable for this pur- 
 pose.
 
 LESSON XV. 
 
 TRIPLE-CONSONANT SERIES. 
 
 165. KEY. 1. S-pr s-br s-tr s-clr s-chr s-jr s-kr s-gr. 
 2. Spree streak soaker cider suffer sooner discourage 
 subscribe. 8. Secrecy sister prescribe disgrace sacrifice 
 separate disaster supreme. 
 
 WORD-SIGNS. 4. Express surprise suppress Scripture 
 describe secure such-are such- were external as-it-were. 
 6. Merciful mortgage neighborhood overwhelm probable 
 probability proper property. 6. New-Hampshire West- 
 Virginia forgive America North-America South-America 
 disappear disagree. 7. Everlasting more-or-less perhaps 
 messenger apprehend apprehensive this-will. 
 V__PHRASES. 8. Very-much was-as-much here-and-there 
 in-the-manner I-assure-you in-each-other how-very there- 
 possibly. 9. Nor-is-this for-some-reason-or-other nothing- 
 more there-are-some there-is-as-much there-is-probably 
 Holy-Scriptures. 10 and 11. For key see list words, sec. 169. 
 
 SENTENCES. 1. March grass never helps the-farmer. 
 2. In age we suffer for-the sins of our youth. 8. From say- 
 ing to doing is-a long stretch. 4. The stream comes to-the 
 mill from afar. 5. A smooth stream washes away its banks 
 6. Give the-devil his due. 
 
 166. If to the word pray the s-circle should be prefixed, 
 
 the word ^f spray would result. If, however, the hook 
 should be omitted, and the circle written in its place, the 
 character V would result. This character is used to* ex- 
 press spr; (it cannot be mistaken for \ sp, since the circles 
 are on opposite sides of the stem.) Hence spray is properly 
 
 written \ Time is saved and nothing lost by the use of 
 
 the triple consonant. See L 1. All straight stems of the 
 r-hook series are modified in this same manner to express a 
 preceding s, as in soaker, cider, L 2. 
 
 167. But when the circle is to be prefixed to j fr, it
 
 15. 
 
 1 
 
 \ 
 
 ^s, 
 5 
 
 8 
 9 
 
 10 
 11 
 
 WORD-FORMS. 
 
 / / 
 
 V A 
 
 \ 
 
 * 
 
 WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 'N 
 
 "T 
 
 
 
 -ve 
 
 ( 
 
 So 
 
 ' 
 
 t-
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SffORT-BAXD. 
 
 must be written within the hook, as in suffer ; otherwise it 
 
 would be written ) sr, and have the force of s-r simply, 
 instead of s-fr. The same principle holds true of all curved 
 consonants, vr, thr, shr, etc. See suffer, sooner, L 2. 
 
 168. In the outlines for a few such words as discourage 
 and subscribe, where it is inconvenient to write the r-hook, 
 it is entirely omitted, r being readily supplied from the con- 
 text. 
 
 69. 1 Write : String spring struck -aetmrg*- scribe 
 
 2 -eeber~suffer scrub sltmuiih strap stress eti'cLck sumy- 
 
 3 .cjwte-.uupusllrtUut* -supper stray siijuaiiruu^L*; 1 {>. 
 
 4 strike scream ; 3 pos. scrap istrnttch. strew. Using 
 
 5 both the 1 and r hooks: Agreeable brutal clamor clatter 
 
 6 flatter flavor proclaim trsuel triangle trouble verbal 
 
 7 calibre chronicle clapper clever clover ri'.ulle- flutter 
 
 8 girdle glitter grapple fcudofiurc perplex propel trifle 
 
 9 triple tropical scruple treble^struggle. (52 1:30 1.) 
 
 PHRASES. 
 
 170. Which-their in-favor nor-such of-their such-a- 
 manner that-there-are their-reasons there-are-now there- 
 are-persons there-has-never there-is-nothing there-is-now 
 there-is-possibly through-as-many till-their very-drar Y.TV- 
 true which-thcre but-there do-there some-reason-or-otht-r 
 very-many-of-them very-rare till-there all-probability 
 have-probably may-probably some-probability will-perhaps 
 will-probably at-church. 
 
 EXERCISE 15. 
 
 171i 1. Liars should-have quick memories. 2. Two 
 eyes see much; four see more. 3. It is unwise to sing triumph 
 before victory. ' 4. A-fox with-a straw tail is afraid that-it- 
 will catch tire. 5. The shovel makes game of-tlu; poker. 
 6. To-a person baking a-pie you-may give a-piece of-your 
 cake2> 7. Such-things must-be if-\vc sell ale. 8. Too-many 
 cooks spoil the-broth. (671 : 15 : 30.)
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 87 
 
 172. SPEED SENTENCE. There-are-many ways to kill a-dog 
 besides hanging him. (8 1.) 
 
 TRANSLATE. 
 
 <i^ 
 
 D J. _L, V 
 
 DICTATION PRACTICE. When two or more per_^ns meet 
 together for dictation practice the following plan may be 
 adopted: Be seated all atone table. Limit your attention 
 to the lesson upon which you may be engaged. Do not prac- 
 tice for speed upon any exercise until you have first learned 
 to phrase and outline it correctly. Each student should in 
 turn read to the other members of the group, the exercise 
 being read, not from the print, but always from the notes 
 l;i<t taken. When all the members of the circle have read 
 in turn, compare the last draught carefully with the original, 
 and repeat until errors cease to be found. Write the list- 
 words a number of times, reading them as often. Dictate 
 slowly at first, gradually increasing the speed. Afterwards 
 ascertain which student is able to read the entire list in the 
 shortest time. In dictating an exercise, read the sentences 
 in the natural way, not as a clock ticks, but as they would 
 be delivered by a public speaker, allowing the intervals to 
 occur between clauses rather than between words. When 
 the members are not equally advanced, those Who can do so 
 may write each word or sentence dictated twice or three 
 times, or oftener, instead of once only. It is by no means 
 necessary that all the members of such circle shall have made 
 the same progress in order to derive great benefit from it.
 
 LESSON XVI. 
 
 KEL-HOOK, ASPIRATE TICK AND DOT. 
 
 174. KEY. 1. Mel nel rel ler hw hi hr hm hk hg. 
 2. Camel tunnel coral color Colorado analyze sentinel. 
 8. Temporal globular release diagonal original millennial 
 millennium. 4. Hail whisper harm hem humbug Hershcl 
 horsewhip hiccough. 6. Abraham mayhem cahoot hither 
 hoax hook hecatomb homologous. 6. Likelihood alcohol 
 Hector harbor adhere whiskey Gaylord. 
 
 WORD-SIGNS. 7. Rely reliable real reality rail roll 
 rule railroad. 8. Railway railway-car railing Jesus-Christ 
 Lord-Jesus-Christ only unless behalf. 
 
 PHRASES. 9. It-is-only less-and-less in-his-behalf as- 
 much-as-we at-his-own-time in-as-far-as lower-and-lower 
 in-this-respect. 10 and 11. For key see list words, sec. 178. 
 
 SENTENCES. 1. A-thing of beauty is-a joy forever. 
 2. Custom is-the law of fools. 3. Faith is necessary to vic- 
 tory. 4. Fear has many eyes. 6. Gayety is-the soul's 
 health, sadness is its poison. 6. Her ample page is rich 
 with-the spoils of time. 
 
 175. An initial hook, written quite large to distinguish it 
 from the w-hook (explained in the next lesson), is attached 
 to I, r, m, and n. The four resulting double-consonants, sig- 
 nifying Ir, rl, ml, and nl (named ler, rel, mel, nel), are called 
 the Bel-hook series. Since the double-sound lei dc^js not 
 occur frequently, the compound stem obtained by attaching 
 the large hook to I, is employed to represent the commoner 
 sound ler, as in color. See Ls 1 and 2. 
 
 176. A short tick, signifying the aspirate h, is prefixed to 
 I, r, m, k, and g. It is so written as to form a sharp angle 
 with the stem to which it is attached. It is placed on the 
 outside of curves, and when joined to other letters must be 
 perfectly straight, to prevent its being mistaken for a hook. 
 See hail, whisper, harm, etc. L 4. 
 
 177. In Abraham (L 5) h could not well be used, since it 
 would make an insufficient angle at its junction with ^^ m. 
 In this and similar cases the aspirate is denoted by a small 
 
 -88-
 
 ; 
 
 Plate 16. 
 
 WORD-FORMS. 
 
 10 
 
 SKNTKNCBS. 
 
 \ -^-i -r\ 
 
 V^^- xTN^-^ i.1 / 
 
 ^ ' r> 
 
 \k 
 
 D-SIGNS. \ ^ 
 
 XL ..... , ... 
 
 <S Q_X 
 
 r 
 
 r
 
 90 REPORTING STYLE OF SHOBT HAND. 
 
 dot written just before the vowel, as in mayhem, hither. 
 This dot is written by the side, not at the end, of the dash 
 vowels, as in cahoot. L 5. 
 
 "^ 178. 1 Using the large hook, write : Animal signal penal 
 2 finally* family nominal relish paternal relic criminal 
 8 colonel scholar abdominal autumnal barrel canal 
 
 4 chronology gallery polar pitl asalogy* spinal relate 
 
 5 temporal* tribunal venal ; 1 pos. collar folionee*. 
 
 6 Using the tick : Holiday harp hell hQmte-kle wheel j*4rip 
 7-wbistle hair horse. Vocalize, hare heal hoax hum 
 8 hale hall -hire hollow *ag. (46 1:15 : 45.) 
 
 PHRASES. 
 
 179. Have-only as-it-seems-to-me as-much-as-it-is as- 
 much-as-they as-much-as-was at-these-times in-his-own-case 
 in-the-case-of it-is-also long-time-ago of-something-to-his- 
 advantage on-such-a since-it sinee-nothing since-which 
 so-it-seems-to-me such-as-may such-is-the-case that-has- 
 never that-is-nothing that-is-so that-is-to-be to-his-advan- 
 tage to-his-knowledge to-his-own-advantage to-which-you- 
 
 EXERCISE 16. 
 
 180. 1. Unto-the pure all things are pure. 2. For hope 
 is but-the dream of-those-that wake. 8. Innocence is always 
 unsuspicious. 4. Kings ought to-be kings in-all things. 
 5. Knowledge is power. 6. Laugh if-you-are wise. 7. Ami- 
 he that-livt's to-live forever never fears dying. 8. To-li\f- 
 long it-is-necessary to-live slowly. (56 1 : 20.) 
 
 181. SPEED SENTENCE. He thinks that-it-is-possible for- 
 the colonel to-ride all-the-way to Colorado on horseback. 
 
 (5-1.) 
 
 CAUTION. Be careful to make your hooks and circles 
 quite small, and avoid the common error of getting them on 
 the wronji side of the st'in.
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SffORT-HA.\D. 91 
 
 182. 
 
 To THE TEACHER. The zest which the element of compe- 
 tition lends to a class exercise, may be utilized in the matter 
 of reading as well as writing. A few brief directions are 
 submitted for the instructor's benefit. First: Read an exer- 
 cise plainly and slowly to the class. Those who miss any 
 words may fill them in afterwards. The first object is to see 
 how many can read it through, without error, in a limited 
 number of minutes. Second: How many can read it through 
 without having ** use at any time more than five seconds? 
 Third: How many can read for the space of one minute with- 
 out pausing at any time more than three seconds? Fourth: 
 Who can read the entire exercise in the least time? Fifth: 
 Who can, without error, cover the most ground in thirty or 
 sixty seconds? Sixth: Call on a pupil to read until he stops 
 three seconds. The person who first sees an error maybe 
 allowed to continue in his stead. Seventh: To cultivate an 
 ability of daily use in. reporting, mention some prominent 
 word, which occurs but once in the exercise, the point of 
 competition bring, who can find it first in his iiotcs? 
 
 All these teats should be frequently repeated. The list- 
 words should also be employed as an exercise for these pur- 
 P-..-CS. In all such trials the learner must be required to use 
 only his own notes for such reading and reference.
 
 LESSON XVII. 
 W-HOOKS, BRIEF WAY AND YAY. 
 
 183. KEY. 1. Tw dw kw gw wl wr wm wn. 2. Twig 
 dwell quiet languish quail tweezers twinkle twill twitter. 
 3. Wail swear swim wilderness quorum welfare Walter 
 Wednesday willing. 4. William choir wine-glass squawk 
 squash quoth wharfage whale. 5. Wage wedge wave 
 unweighed wax wag wad wot. 6. Yore Yates yarrow 
 Yeddo yacht yawl woof yule. 
 
 WORD AND PHRASE SIGNS. 7. We-are where aware we- 
 will while well awhile when whence. 8. With-me with- 
 my with-him we-may we-may-be with-whom whenever 
 whensoever. 9. As-well very-well where-ever welcome 
 with-reference-to with-respect-to commonwealth. 
 
 PHRASES. 10. Everywhere-else is-it-worth-while it-is- 
 worth-while on-oue-side that-is-only this-one-thing when- 
 they-were. 11. Whereby -you-may as- well-as worse-and- 
 worse with-one working-classes works-of-God. 12 and 13. 
 For key see list words, sec. 187. 
 
 SENTENCES. 1. We-are near waking when we dream 
 that-wedream. 2. When you give, give with joy and smiling. 
 8. Necessity does everything well. 
 
 184. A large hook, signifying an added w, is prefixed to 
 t, d, k and g. It is struck on the 1-hook side. The double 
 consonants thus formed have the force of x " w, kw and gw, 
 as in twig, dwell, quiet, etc. L 2. 
 
 185. For two or three reasons "^ way and f yay are 
 sometimes expressed by shorter signs known as Brief Way 
 and Yay. Either of the two horizontal semi-circles, c and 
 3 , may be used to express w, and either of the two vertical 
 semi-circles, or />, may signify y. In every case, choice 
 must be made of that sign which forms a good angle with the 
 stem to which it is prefixed. See wage, wedge, wave, yacht, 
 etc. See Ls 5 and 6. These brief signs are chiefly used in 
 cases where "^ w and f y are not convenient, or when their 
 use does not secure angular outlines. 
 
 98
 
 94 REPORTING STYLE OF snORT-HA^J). 
 
 186. But whenever w occurs before f I, / r,s~^ in, or 
 ^_x n, the first of the two half-circles c is used ; and it is so 
 modified, or adaptc-l, when joined to these letters, as to form 
 an initial hook, as in w!, wr, win, wn. L 1. It is important 
 to clearly understand that this hook, which is derived from 
 the brief w, is itself the w, and after the analogy of the s-cir- 
 cle, is read before the consonant stem to which it is prefixed. 
 This hook differs from the r-hook, or the large w-hook, just 
 explained, for instance, in this respect, that in c acre, r is 
 
 read after k, whereas in c wine, the hook w is read before n. 
 
 See wail, swear, swim, etc. Ls 3 and 4. The aspirate tick 
 may be prefixed to the w-hook, as in wharfage, whale. L 4. 
 
 187. Using tw, dw, etc., write : 1 QuiU squeal squirm 
 2 squeak squad squaw squirrel* squash quiz Gaelph 
 8 qnizical equator* quake quietly squabble squiL quip 
 
 4 quiver squall. \V-hook: Wealth wall ware beware 
 
 5 worm wolf swoon Edwin worker* won willingly* work 
 
 6 worth worthless worthlessly wtrrthlrs-nt'ss worthy well 
 
 7 willing window one wear warm acquire weary wool 
 
 8 Wales wane wean willow wire. (50 1:15 :45.) 
 
 PHRASES. 
 
 188. Any-one by-one for-one if-we-are it-is-one no-one 
 of-one one-way one-of-these-days nor-which this-one 
 
 "when-it when-shall when-that when-they while-they 
 worth-notice worth-while as-well-as-possible. 
 
 EXEUCISE 17. 
 
 189. 1. The-laborer is worthy of-his hire. 2. In-lovo 
 we-are all fools alike. 3. He who aspires to nothing, who 
 creates nothing, is unworthy of-living. 4. Love may hope 
 where reason would despair. 5. He-is no fox that hath but- 
 one, hole. 6. When-the wine is-in the wit is out. 7. Stay 
 but-a while, you lose a-mile. 8. There-is but-one Paris. 
 9. We place, a >IL> nal Hag of red color on-tho railroad near- 
 the tunnel to signify danger. 10. The-teacher offers a-pri/e 
 for-an exercise t hat-is really correct. 11. It-N-a family h 
 
 of bay color, and-every pupil should try to win it if-possihJe.
 
 REPORTING STYLE OP SHORT-HAND. 
 
 95 
 
 12. There-is-no harm in-having a holiday once-in-a while. 
 18. But it-would-be well if-the scholar should take-them 
 only rarely. (1362:15: 45.) 
 
 190. SPEED SENTENCE. Beware of sitting by-the railway- 
 car window while we-are crossing over the-dangerous bridge. 
 
 (6-1.) 
 
 191. TRANSLATE. 
 
 ... ' -) r . <s 
 
 ( . . X 
 
 v> P....X j ....I.....:, f v. f ...i. 
 
 To THE TEACHER. Time is valuable, and too much of it 
 must not be spent in waiting on Students who, for any rea- 
 son, have not learned the lesson well enough to read off any 
 portion of it instantly when called upon. The learner who 
 is dull, but earnest, deserves the teacher's indulgence; but 
 the idler must not be allowed to waste time which belongs to 
 the class.
 
 LESSON xvm. 
 
 F-HOOK. 
 
 192. KEY. 1. P-f b-f t-f d-f ch-f j-f k-f g-f h-f r f 
 2. Cough cave puff beef tough deaf chaff Jove huff 
 roughs. 3. Hoofs strives relief dwarf prophesy havoc 
 rove heave provincial. 
 
 WORD AND PHRASE SIGHTS. 4. Onght-to-have whatever 
 it-would-have out-of which-ought-to-have whichever 
 which-have which-would-have prove approve. 5. Such- 
 ought-to-have such-have such-would-have each-will-have 
 which-will-have much-will-have careful belief believe. 
 6. Differ different difference try-to-have poverty derive 
 twelve it-will-have set-off set-forth. 7. Which-are-to-have 
 whieh-were-to-have such-are-to-have such-were-to-have 
 govern government said-to-have whoever who-have. 
 8. Just-had laws-of-life 1 a ws-of- health is-said-to-have ever- 
 lasting-life ever-and-ever forever-and-ever. 
 
 PHRASES. 9. Must-come must-have so-much I-am-sat- 
 isfied by-wire by-rail telegraphic-messages. 10. To-which- 
 you-refer course-of-business agreeable-to-you how-many- 
 passengers by-express those-who-have we-always. 
 11. Right-away right-of-way this-property House-of-Repn-- 
 sentatives by-United-States-express Common-carrier dur- 
 ing-the-summer-season . 
 
 SENTENCES. 1. Poverty and-love are difficult to hide. 
 2. True love never grows hoary. 3. If Jack is in love he- 
 is no judge of Jill's beauty. 4. He who-would have love 
 must-give love. 5. He that hath no jealousy hath no love. 
 
 193. The hooks that have been learned in the past few 
 lessons are termed initial hooks, because they are written at 
 the beginning of letters. Final hooks are those which are 
 placed at the end of stems. The first of these, called the 
 f-hook, is attached to straight consonants only, and lias the 
 force of for v. See cough, cave, puff, etc. L 2. This hook 
 is invariably written on the right-hand, or circle side, of the, 
 stem, and is used only in connection with the ten straight 
 letters shown in L 1. A following s may be expressed by 
 
 -90
 
 glate 18. 
 
 WORD-SKINS. 
 
 / 
 
 \ 
 
 L L_|___/ / .../_ 
 
 L I L 
 
 2 ...z- 
 
 1 
 
 \, 
 
 11 
 
 SENTENCES.' 
 
 9... 
 
 C C _i 
 C 
 
 / 
 
 ./x-v 
 
 -/ 
 
 ^. 
 
 f
 
 98 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAX-D. 
 
 writing the circle within the hook, as in hoofs, strives. L 3. 
 
 194. The fact that either oneof any pair of cognate sounds 
 may be represented by the same sign, with no danger of 
 ambiguity, has been fully shown in the case of the circle, 
 which is sometimes used for ft and sometimes for z, as sen<e 
 may demand. This plan is safe because s and z are similar 
 sounds. So al^so are f and v. Hence no uncertainty of 
 meaning results from using a single hook to express both, as 
 in the sentence, "They may well c *, considering their cause 
 of e '." It is easy to determine here when the short-hand 
 character c " should be read grief, and when grieve. 
 
 195. Since this hook is attached to straight letters only, 
 the stems V_/" and V_ v must be used whenever forv are 
 to be added to any curved letter; for example, ^r^ knave is 
 
 written with the stem V. v , f r the reason that, according 
 to the rule, the hook cannot be attached to the curve n to 
 express the following v. F, like the circle ., is written on 
 the left, not the right-hand side, of up-strokes. See rove, 
 heave, L 3. 
 
 196. Using the f-hook, write: 1 Cuff root devout crave 
 
 2 hive bereave beverage bluff cuvalry cavil deaf dwarf* ! 
 
 3 gave glove gruff incentive octave primitive province j 
 
 4 river rough scoff sensitive strife strive David Stephen; ^ 
 
 5 1 pos. drive grieve grief. (30 :40 :'JO.) 
 
 PHRASES. 
 
 197. Be-satisfied they-beiieve think -perhaps thi.-difTi- 
 culty to-satisfy you-refer book-keeper charge-(of-the)- 1ms-, 
 iness half-rate of-importanee by-telegram for-the-mail 
 how-many-cases in-error in-this-case over-charges saniple- 
 cases telegraphic-dispatches this-claim time-table very- 
 important very-irregular very-regular very-many your- 
 reply your-telegram. 
 
 EXEKCISE 18. 
 
 J98. l. Beauty buys no beef. 2. Love nows no meas-
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 ure. 3. Likely lies in-the mire while unlikely goes over. 
 4. Ths-devil was sick, the-devil a-monk would-be. 5. The- 
 devil grew well, the-devil a-monk was he. 6. You-may 
 safely give-a rope to-one who talks of hanging. 7. Fish and 
 visitors smell in three days. 8. What once were evils are 
 now the-manners of-the day. 9. Joys are our wings; sor- 
 rows are our spurs. (75 1:15 -.25.) 
 
 199. SPEED SENTENCE. Yon-mnst-be governed by-the 
 la \vs-of -health if -you would have relief from sickness and- 
 distress. (o 1.) 
 
 200. 
 
 TRANSLATE 
 
 % ' <l s~ L. ( 
 
 L 
 
 \ 
 
 
 flTV _ ...I 
 
 x
 
 LESSON XIX. 
 N-HOOK. 
 
 201. KEY. 1. P-n b-n t-n d-n ch-n j-n n.-n g-n h-n 
 r-n. 2. Tone roan twine queen Eugene adjourn econo- 
 my brain. 3. Sustain stricken abstinence cistern strain 
 chagrin tangible Unitarian. 4. Henry discipline barbar- 
 ian tenacious Conrad Michigan sudden Spanish. 
 
 WORD AND PHRASE SIGNS. 5. Happen punishment 
 spoken begin begun began religious religion general 
 imagine. 6. Denominate denomination denominational 
 providential doctrine darken eternal benevolent beiu-vo- 
 lence. 7. Question questionable western northwestern 
 European such-a-one at-length determine. 8. Circum- 
 stance circumstances beneficial larger-than rather-than 
 again-and-again over-and-over-again Washington. 
 
 PHRASES. 9. As-far-as-can as-far-as-you-can as-much-as- 
 can a.s-much-as-can-be as-soon-as-can-be as-soon-a.s-it-can- 
 be been-done been-taken. 10. Can-you have-spoken who- 
 lias-done nor-can it-is-plain so-that-there-haf -been call- 
 upon. 11 and 12. For key see list words, sec. 203. 
 
 SENTENCES. 1. If-you-wish to-marry suitably, marry your 
 equal. 2. There-is-no fear in love. 3. Hope, alas, it-is our 
 waking dream. 4. How populous, how vital is-the grave. 
 5. Humor is wit and-love. 
 
 202. The next final hook, signifying n, is annexed to both 
 straight and curved stems. When joined to stiaight letters 
 
 I it is written on the side opposite the f-hook, as m ione, roan, 
 ' twine, L 2. The n-hook, when attached to up-strokes, is 
 necessarily placed on the right-hand side, as h-n, r-n, L 1. 
 
 203. Vocalize: 1 Cain chain dawn dine pain rainbow 
 
 2 stain spine tone bane bean bone dean deign pan pin 
 
 3 tin pine reign Jane Jean join keen coin dainty can- 
 
 4 opy marine acorn spoon beacon. Without vowels: 
 
 5 Again been can run stone ten pen gain abstain bunch 
 
 6 burn corn cotton deacon surgeon denounce* abandon 
 
 7 detain pinch disdain kitchen Latin mechanic mourn 
 
 8 obtain ton candy hen upon skin done open y 
 
 10.1 .
 
 Pate 19, 
 
 \ 
 
 gj- 
 
 P S \ P/ 7 i 1 ' 
 
 3^ I D V r 3 J /] ^1/ 
 
 <-S> </ 
 
 4^^ I VX/ 7 J r-^ O 
 
 ^ OX ^T) 
 
 _ WORD-SIGNS. / / 
 
 , \ \ 
 q.__.\_,,_ ^\-_,.. ^ ... ^^^ . 
 
 aj_l ^L_, L 1 3 
 
 8j> ^ u, 
 
 *" S ^C^ ^^.-i- 
 
 J < ^ 
 
 WOBD-FOP.M9. Ot 
 
 / CX* XP A 
 
 o 
 
 ^O '* \ -^ 
 
 SENTENCES. '
 
 102 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 9 cannon sponge ordain origin pagan reckon weapon 
 
 10 retain scorn* taken turn obstinate torn vacancy* 
 
 11 denote wagon ribbon banish waken barn* beckon 
 
 12 tinge bench born bounty canton canvass captain 
 18 chicken chin county cunning den din disjoin expunge 
 
 14 foreign* hurricane laconic maiden mitten panic 
 
 15 Austin Dan John enjoin gone attain; 3 pos. June 
 
 16 brown town down; (using ar) organ Oregon; (1-hook) 
 
 17 chaplain* planet blown glen plunge Blanch; (r-hook) 
 
 18 drone branch libertine train drench stricken groan 
 
 19 grown trench retrench virgin chronic. (135 3 1:30) 
 
 PHRASES. 
 
 204. As-has-been which-has-been as-well-as-can-be a>- 
 well-as-it-can-be be-done be-so but-can can-be can-do 
 can-have can-it can-it-be can-never bad-been has-been 
 has-done have-been have-done have-taken how-can sudi- 
 a-plan such-as-can such-can such-has-been that-has-been 
 that-plan they-have-been this-has-been till-then to-which- 
 you-can upon-which was-done which-can you-may-then. 
 
 EXERCISE 19. 
 
 205. 1. Pain may-be said to follow pleasure as-its shadow. 
 2. Peace is rarely denied to-the peaceful. 3. Pity is akin 
 to-love. 4. Pity is love when grown into excess. 5. Prayer 
 is to religion what thinking is to philosophy. 6. To-pray is 
 to-make religion. 7. tie that-has-no cross deserves no 
 crown. 8. The-Bible is-a window in-this prison of hope, 
 through which we look into eternity. 9. Nothing speaks 
 our grief so well as-to speak nothing. 10. Speaking much 
 is-a sign of vanity. 11. The soul knows no persons. 12. He 
 who-is in evil is also in-the punishment of-evil. 13. The- 
 rose is fair, but fairer we it deem, for- that sweet odor which 
 doth in-it live. 14. Keep true to-the dreams of-th^ youth. 
 
 (128 2 :40.) 
 
 206. SPEED SENTENCE. It-has-been spoken again-aml- 
 again by-the chaplain that-the doctrine of-the Christian- 
 religion is-that life is eternal rather-than a-brief span only. 
 
 (72.)
 
 To THE TEACHER. A pleasant recreation, and valuable 
 discipline, are both combined in the following described ex- 
 ercise, designed to cultivate verbal memory. Fens should be 
 laid aside by the class, and dose attention given. One of the 
 exercises in this book may be selected for the purpose. Read 
 off distinctly a short sentence. Call on a member to repeat 
 it. If he fails in the slightest particular, pass to the ntxt. 
 Bear in mind that one of the chief purposes is to impress 
 upon the pupils the importance of precision in reporting. 
 Not only must the pupil return the identical words, but repeat 
 them in the exact order in which they were pronounced by 
 the instructor. Gradually proceed to longer sentences. 
 After a few drills, some pupils will be able to give back sen- 
 tences containing thirty or forty \v >rds. Occasionally read 
 two short sentences, requiring the learner to repeat both, 
 giving the last one first.
 
 LESSON 
 
 N-HOOK, CONTINUED. 
 
 208. KEY. 1. V-n th-n z-n zh-n ng-n mp-n w-n y-n. 
 2. Fawn noun varnish menace fringe iron financial al- 
 manac. 3. Means thence mechanism density dense 
 chance transpire resistance. 4. Punctuate punctuation 
 June than examine fancy intrinsic minstrel. 5. Learn 
 amanuensis tavern silence ransom Kansas credence ven- 
 geance. 
 
 WORD AND PHRASE SIGNS. 6. Men man human audi- 
 ence providence opinion union heathen within. 7. Heaven 
 organize darkens darkness upon-his opens some-one our- 
 own experience. 8. Obedience responsible more-than at- 
 once every-one cross-examine human-life deliverance. 
 
 PHRASES. 9. For-instance in-his-situation all-your-own 
 by-his-opinion by-some-means by-means-of have-shown 
 human-being. 10. In-his-opinion in-the-mean-time no- 
 more-than this-instance all-circumstances working-man 
 all-situations. 11 and 12. For key see list words, sec. 218. 
 
 SENTENCES. 1. Kings' chaff is worth other men's corn. 
 2. A-man may love his house well though he never rides on- 
 its roof. 8. It-is rare to see a rich man religious. 4. No 
 man's religion ever survives his morals. 
 
 209. The n-hook is also attached to curves, as in fawn, 
 noun, varnish, etc., L 2. Since a hook can conveniently be 
 written only within, or following the direction of a curve, 
 but one hook can be attached to this class of letters. This 
 hook is properly chosen to express n, rather than f and v, 
 for the reason that n occurs rruch more frequently than both 
 the other two. 
 
 210. When the n-hook is joined to a curve, a following s 
 may be expressed by placing the circle within the hook, as in 
 means, thence, mechanism, L 8. At the end of a word, how- 
 ever, the two consonants ns are expressed, after straight 
 letters, by locating the circle on the n-hook side, as in dense, 
 chance, resistance, L 3. But when ns follows a curve, the cir- 
 
 -104
 
 $iate 20. 
 
 V> C J 
 
 2 Vi 
 3 
 
 4 V 
 
 WORD-SIGHS. 
 
 \ 
 
 \ 
 
 d 
 
 10 I 
 
 WOBD-rOBJiS. 
 
 rv 
 
 11 
 
 rv s-i I 
 
 V; J -> 
 
 \ 
 
 12 
 
 (T 
 
 
 
 J / 
 
 -V 
 
 / / 
 
 C I 
 
 c-xfb r 
 __________________ J 
 
 f 
 
 V*^'^ 
 
 J 
 
 V 
 
 ^N 
 
 *j 
 
 ' 
 
 J C 1 
 
 <-/ ^O
 
 106 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 cle is necessarily written. within the hook, as in ^^ vines; If 
 
 written otherwise it would express v^, vice instead. 
 
 211. Btu this principle does not apply when n is medial, 
 that is, occurring in the middle of a word, even though joined 
 to a straight stem. See mechanism, density, L 3. To illus- 
 trate, the character o is ambiguous, for it may be read 
 either k-skr or kns-k. To avoid this, k-skr is written s 
 
 and kns-k thus: 3 When, on account of the peculiar 
 formation of an outline, the hook cannot well be written, n 
 is often entirely omitted, as in transpire, L 3. In such cases 
 n is supplied readily from the context. 
 
 212. The n-hook is frequently made use of in phrasing to 
 express than, one, and own, as in some-one, our-own, more- 
 than, Ls 7 and 8. 
 
 213. 1 Using the n-hook: Lean loan Ethan Julian 
 
 2 Adaline Maine main known none coffin campaign* 
 
 3 cognomen dominion* earu (ar) finish* infancy ar- 
 
 4 range* (ar) Italian lengthen machine maintain* man- 
 
 5 age minute saloon Monday monarch* monotonous 
 
 6 Roman season* sermon (ar) situation then specimen 
 
 7 villian vain anonymous German French London ad- 
 
 8 monish amen arraign (ar) battalion brilliancy* cle- 
 
 9 mency diminish diminutive domain feminine finance* 
 
 10 frown fun infringe launch lone lunch minimum* 
 
 11 monopolize monopoly moon muslin ocean omen 
 
 12 orphan outline permanence million* phenomenon* 
 
 13 Prussian raven refine refrain shun summon sunshine 
 
 14 tavern* thin throne tuition* urn (ar) van vanish 
 
 15 venom vine violin workman Aaron Allen Alonso 
 
 16 Benjamin Franklin* Jonathan Napoleon Nathan Or- 
 
 17 lando Solomon Helen Josephine Lillian Susan; 1 p<>s. 
 
 18 even evening often line mine mean meaning line 
 
 19 shine thine; 3 pos. noon. Fence lance opulence pesti- 
 
 20 lence ransom* renounce* patience excellence* thence
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 107 
 
 ! 21 violence France silence lonesome specimens cadence 
 
 f 22 decadence glance guidance occurrence* bronze prince 
 
 ] 23 residence resistance semblance tense distance pretence 
 
 j 24 expense trance transitory dense instance dispense 
 
 { 25 extensive eloquence* disdains detains Lawrence Penn- 
 
 I 26 sylvania* Wisconsin*; 8 pos. chance dance towns 
 
 } 27 appliance trac^pose transpire organism transverse 
 28 transcribe. (16131:30.) 
 
 PHKASES. 
 
 214. All-means and-U;en by-the-means by-which-means 
 do-you-mean for-even have-known in-mine in-vain many- 
 a-man my-opinion one-man some-means some-one-or-other 
 sons-of-men such-a-man than-in-the that-a-man this-even- 
 ing this-opinion what-man what-means working-man 
 which-is-know*i will-thence within-a that-is-necessary. 
 
 215. 
 
 TRANSLATE.
 
 108 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 EXERCISE 20. 
 
 216. 1. Men are April when-they woo, December when- 
 they wed. 2. All of-heaven we- have below. 3. Nothing 
 maintains its bloom forever; age succeeds to-age. 4. To 
 err is human, to forgive divine. 5. Many men know how 
 to flatter, few-men know how to-praise. 6. Learn to-lal><>r 
 and-to wait. 7. No man flatters the-woman he-truly loves. 
 8. Love is-a reality which-is born in-the fairy regions of 
 romance. 9. Shallow men believe in luck; strong men be- 
 lieve in-cause-and-effect. (83 1:15 :25.) 
 
 217. SPEED SENTENCE. Every-one who-begins the study 
 of human-life will believe more-than ever before in Provi- 
 dential guidance. ;5 1 . ) 
 
 LESSON XXT. 
 
 SHT7N-HOOK. 
 
 218. KEY. 1. Caution auction passion option station 
 separation section secretion occupation. 2. Ambition 
 remuneration translation missionary relations associations 
 veneration abbreviation. 3. Diction election portion re- 
 ception obligation fraction suspicion. 4. Dictionary 
 exhibition restriction plantation dejection ction pro- 
 jection. 5. Transgression assertion exception.*! additional 
 prevention discrimination subscription. 6. Injunction 
 sanction function operation oppression temptation pre- 
 sumption. 
 
 WORD AND PHRASE SIGNS. 7. Confession generation ob- 
 jection expression information revelation revolution sus- 
 pension perfection. 8. Dissatisfaction destruction delib- 
 eration examination cross-examination explanation 
 inclination. 9. Invention reduction reformation repre- 
 sentation signification connection determination. 
 
 PHRASES. 10. All-directions all-stations by-permission 
 rising-generation there-is-oocasion for-collection J-have-no-
 
 1. I 
 
 o 
 
 $Iate 21* 
 
 % J 
 
 3 
 
 ~\> 
 
 J 
 
 I 
 
 -3 
 
 10 
 
 11 
 
 12 
 
 j 
 
 - i 
 
 WORD- FORMS. 
 
 r 
 
 SEKTKNCES. 
 
 V 
 
 ^J? 1 
 
 ' (A 
 
 ^^ 
 << V > 
 
 b x OJ 
 
 V
 
 110 REPORTING STYLE OF SHOXT-HAtfD. 
 
 objection. 11. Desire-to-say by-special-train answering- 
 your-many-inquiries please-acknowledge wholesale-prices 
 it-is-generally. 12. For key see list words, sec. 222. 
 
 SENTENCES. 1. Education is-the chief defence of nations. 
 2. Love is-the piety of-the affections. 8. All-is holy where 
 devotion kneels. 4. We ask advice, but we-mean approba- 
 tion. 5. Truth makes the-face of-that person shine who 
 speaks and-o\vns it. 
 
 219. A large final hook, corresponding with the rel-hook 
 in size, is used to denote the frequent endings, tion, sion, 
 don, dan, etc. This hook is written within, or on the con- 
 cave side, of curves, as in ambition, remuneration, transla- 
 tion, L 2. 
 
 220. In caution, auction, passion and option (L 1), the shun- 
 hook'is attached to straight stems, and is written on the side 
 opposite the vowel (except in cases where there are two 
 vowels, as in [j addition, when the hook is struck on the 
 circle side). This rule applies when the straight stem is pre- 
 ceded by no letter, hook, or circle. But when such stem is 
 preceded by another consonant sign, it will be found the 
 more convenient to strike the hook on the side opposite what- 
 ever sign may so precede. Referring to L 1, it is seen that 
 the hook in section is on the lower side of k, because the circle 
 is above it, while the reverse is true in secretion. In occupa- 
 tion the hook is at the right of p, k being on the left. See 
 also L 3. By observing this rule the writer may more easily 
 preserve the straightness of the stem. This may be illus- 
 trated by writing section a number of times, placing the hook 
 first above and then below k. In dictionary, L 4, shun may be 
 struck on the upper side of k, so that r may be more easily 
 written. 
 
 221. To express these Carious syllables, this hook some- 
 times represents shn, as in mission, and sometimes zhn, as in 
 vision. K, following ng, is often omitted, as in injunction, 
 sanction. L 6. 
 
 222. 1 Placing shun on the circle side, write: Omission
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. Ill 
 
 2 attention animation dissipation definition* 11 dissension 
 
 3 designation desolation devotion discussion elevation 
 
 4 evasion expedition intimation rational irrational lim- 
 
 5 itation motion locomotion nation notation oration 
 
 6 repetition revision selection session submission ammu- 
 
 7 nition dictation dimension amputation ascension 
 
 8 assassination assimilation coalition decapitation delu- 
 
 9 sion division emulation expectation exultation invasion 
 
 10 isolation location negotiation* obsei-vwtion pension 
 
 11 petition population resolution resurrection solution 
 
 12 violation volition mission occasion viwion addition 
 
 13 dissolution reputation;. (1-hook) declamation acclama- 
 
 14 tion exclamation inflammation; (r-uook) depression 
 
 15 emigration impression probation prosecution profession 
 
 16 provision aggregation promotion celebration digression 
 
 17 exportation extermination nutrition penetration per- 
 
 18 petration persecution preservatioa profusion progres- 
 
 19 sion suppression supervision termination* creation 
 
 20 approbation. 
 
 21 Placing S^MW on then-hook side, write: Auction passion 
 23 exception execution education induction invocation 
 
 23 restitution, section crucifixion institution aspiration 
 
 24 restoration adoration abduction adoption affection 
 
 25 benediction benefaction edification expiration faction 
 
 26 infection fiction specification substitution vacation 
 
 27 variation visitation diction agitation elocution avoca- 
 
 28 tion, (1-hook) exclusion leflection* recollection* classi- 
 
 29 fication exploration explosion application; (r-hook) 
 
 30 inculcation friction attraction prolongation. 
 
 (13331:30.) 
 
 PHRASES. 
 
 a23. Every-directioa in-the-direction one-instance to- 
 mention would-mention would-occasion because-that-can- 
 be railroad-man by-the-train early-train for-the-mail-train 
 mail -train through-train a-few-days-ago at-your-expense 
 at-the-same-price wholesale-rates I-know-there-has-been
 
 118 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 no-instance in-the-morning in-many-instances that-is-a- 
 question that-it-must-be-done there-has-been would-happen 
 would-instance. 
 
 EXERCISE 21. 
 
 234. 1. Whatever is popular deserves attention. 2. I- 
 know no-manner of speaking so offensive as-that of giving 
 praise and-closing it with-an-exception. 3. The-only-things 
 in-which we-can-be-said to-have any-property are our-actions. 
 4. We begin life with high expectations. 5. Affectation dis- 
 covers sooner what one is than it-makes-known what one 
 would fain appear to-be. 6. No decking sets forth anything 
 as-much-as affection. 7. We-are-never like angels till our 
 passion dies. 8. Charity is-a wish for-a perfect education. 
 9. Take away ambition and-vanity and-where will-be your 
 heroes and-patriots? (101 1:30 :40.) 
 
 225. SPEED SENTENCE. The-lawyer makes objections to- 
 the cross-examination for-the-reason-that-it-has-no relation 
 to-the examination-in-chief. (4 1.) 
 
 To THE TEACHER. The short-hand reporter must be able 
 to write many thousands of different words, but nine-tenths 
 of all the writing he does consists in taking down over and 
 over many times only a few hundred very common words. 
 Evidently the first requisite to skill in stenography is a high 
 degree of familiarity with just this class of words and phrases. 
 The reporter writes is, may, will-be, I-can, do-not, hundreds 
 of times to ocean, extracting, calibre, indigo, delve, etc., once. 
 He may take time occasionally to write a hard word in long- 
 hand, but he will fail almost certainly if he is obliged to hes- 
 itate for an instant before writing one of these frequent 
 words or phrases. Hence the Teacher will drill his classes 
 daily, and require the pupil's practice to be devoted mainly 
 to this class of words.
 
 To THE TEACHER. A'Phe. "dical differenc-. ; n principle be- 
 tween iiiili^l and firia^'hooks may be illut^ratsd by showing 
 that vowels do not occur'between the two consonants repre- 
 s :'ted by initially hooked stems; whereas a vowel always 
 < and always must occur between every stem and any 
 fin ill hook (,/, or v,) which may be attached to it. 
 
 A USEFUL READING TEST. Dictate a few sentences back- 
 wards. Phrasing is nc*. to be employed in writing them. 
 Call on the pupil* to read their notes backwards. This will 
 cause the meaning to appear. For occasional practice this 
 is excellent. The dictation should of course be slow. 
 
 \
 
 LESSON XXTT. 
 
 8-SHDN AND IN-HOOKS. 
 
 227. KEY. 1. Imposition physician decision precision 
 civilization dispensation transitions cessation. 2. Enslave 
 unsalable inscribe inspiration inseparable insecurity in- 
 solence. 3. Unscrupulous unsociable insomnia uncere- 
 monious insoluble insurrection insatiable. 
 
 WORD AND PHRASE SIGNS. 4. Unseasonable unscriptural 
 unselfish in-sorae in-as-many in-consideration in-his-usual. 
 5. In-his-expression in-his-experience in-seeming in-his- 
 description in-his-life in-expressing in-describing. 
 
 PHRASES. 6. In-any-position in-successiou that-supposi- 
 tion in-some-cases give-possession judges-decision my-own- 
 supposition. 7. All-expenses all-sums-of -money fee-simple 
 notary-public any-thing-else-that can-you-remember knowl- 
 edge-and-belief. 8. Personal-knowledge cause-of-action 
 legal-representative from-your own-knowledge I-will-ask- 
 you for-trial. 9 and 10. For ke> see list words, sec. 230. 
 
 SENTENCES. 1. Bvery-man at forty is either a-fool or-a- 
 physician. 2. He that knows nothing knows enough if-he 
 knows how to keep his tongue. 8. When a-fool has spoken 
 he-has-done all. 4. The unlucky man breaks his neck upon- 
 a straw. 5. An Englishman's house is-his castle. 6. There- 
 is-never enough where-nothing remains. 
 
 228. Any one of the syllables denoted by the shun-hook, 
 when it occurs after an s-circle, may be expressed by con- 
 tinuing the stroke until a small hook is formed on the side 
 opposite, as in imposition, physician, decision, L 1. The 
 learner is cautioned to write, not merely a straight tick, but 
 a well bent hook, or oval, as if about to form another circle. 
 See L 1. The plural is formed by writing the circle within 
 the hook, as in transitions. 
 
 229. A small hook-sign, called the in-hook, employed at 
 the beginning of certain words-forms, denotes in, en or un. 
 See enslave, unsalable, L 2. This hook is used instead of 
 ^ ' n when followed by a circle and curve, with which the 
 stem would not join conveniently. The n-hook is also used 
 
 114
 
 Pate 22. 
 
 J rv^ 
 
 )-SIGNS.\ 
 
 SENTENCES. 
 
 s 
 
 % 
 
 V- 
 
 i 
 
 \j -S 
 
 v 
 
 V 
 
 v 
 
 \l 
 
 ^ V- 
 
 CV 
 
 \ _ o 
 
 .\... 
 
 o
 
 116 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HA.VD. 
 
 in connection with the triple-consonant series, as in inscribe, 
 inspiration, inseparable, L 2. This hook should be written 
 small, and well curved. 
 
 230. 1 Write: Deposition dispositions accession position 
 
 2 positions propositions sensation* supposition civiliza- 
 
 3 tion exposition procession requisition succession v-x- 
 
 4 ation dispensation; 1 pos. opposition acquisition; 3 pos. 
 
 5 accusation possession powessions. 
 
 6 Also write, using the nr/roer hooks: Curtain drain 
 
 7 drove engrave explain cram graphic grave matron 
 
 8 patron plain plenty prmnunce* prudence utterance 
 
 9 restrain train venerabi* -worn decline economical 
 
 10 tribune incline woman* criterion demonstration* fur- 
 
 11 niture* paragraph* reference" transgress transmission; 
 
 12 1 pos. qualification* women- clean cleave clime green; 
 
 13 3 pos. crown drown plan traffic plantation. 
 
 (62 1:30 :45.) 
 
 PHRASES. 
 
 231. Wouiu-expect you-expect ail-claims at-my-office 
 give-notice original-owner at-what-time can-you-recollect 
 tell-the-jury know-all-men law-journal personal-property 
 take-notice legal-profession how-long-have-you. 
 
 EXERCISE 22. 
 
 232. 1. As-the fool thinks, so the-bell tinks. 2. Custom 
 will make a-man live in-a lion's mouth. 3. Three persons, 
 if-they unite against*a-town, will ruin it. 4. Liberty and- 
 Union, now and-forever, one-and inseparable. 5. Keep a- 
 thing seven years and-then in-some-way it-will-be of use t<>- 
 you. 6. Innocence and-mystery*never dwell long together. 
 7. It-is-a poor wit that-lives by borrowing the-inventions 
 and-decisions of-others. 8. Never-make business an-excuse 
 to decline the-offices of-humaniry. 9. As we-are born to-work, 
 so others are born to watch over us while wo-.-uv working. 
 10. Love lessens woman's delicacy and-im-riMs.'-; man's 11. 
 In law nothing is sure bnt-the expense. (121 1 :45 :50.)
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 117 , 
 
 I 
 
 233. SPEED SENTENCE. The-physician says that in-his- 
 experience he-has-had occasion many-times to-prescribe to- 
 men-and-women of all nationalities. (4 1.) 
 
 234. 
 
 TRANSLATE. 
 
 To THE STUDENT. Do net neglect your orthography 
 English spelling is a horrible atjage, but one which the sten- 
 ographer is obliged to face. Many good writers fail to hold 
 a situation on account of deficiency in this branch. It is 
 only a matter of prudence to saaDrove yourself, if lacking in 
 this respect. Learn to spell to* writing; with the pen, rather 
 than the tongue. Written anm wal spelling are two different 
 things.
 
 118 REPORTING STYLE OF SIIORT-I1AXD. 
 
 LESSON XXIII. 
 8T AND STR LOOPS. 
 
 235. KEY. 1. List must stump stage disposed justify 
 against gestation. 2. Boaster obstruction distribution 
 stranger illustration spinster strong strength. 8. Gesture 
 manifest enlist stubborn statistics digestion honestly dis- 
 traction. 
 
 WORD. AND PHRASE SIGNS. 4. First at-first by-the-tirst 
 at-the-first almost next next-time just-what post-pone. 
 5. Must-like must-make we-must north-west Baptist one 
 of-the-most one-of-the-best. 6. For-the-first-time Ccmstitu- 
 tion-of-the-U.-S. circumstances-of-the-case suggestion sten- 
 ography stenographer stenographic. 7. One-or-two two- 
 or-three three-or-four four-or-five five-or-six six-or-seven 
 seven-or-eight. 8. As-fast-as by-way-ol-illustration from- 
 first-to-last just-been almost-always he-supposed most- 
 important. 9. Ohio mystery extraordinary in-reply-to 
 in-response-to everlasting must-expect. 
 
 PHRASES. 10. We-love as-well-as-most before-Christ 
 just-now just-as must-necessarily must-also. 11. Must- 
 never to-the-best-advantage one-must such-as-must-be be- 
 supposed must-generally it-is-generally. 12. For key see 
 list words, sec. 238. 
 
 SENTENCES. 1. The-first blow is half the-battle. 2. When 
 it rains in August it rains honey and wine. 8. The hen 
 which cackles most lays least. 4. Life is real, life is earnest. 
 5. No fool can keep silence at-a feast. 
 
 23i> (S is very often followed by t, forming the consonant 
 double-sound sf, of very frequent occurrence in our language. 
 To express this added t, the s-circle Is elongated, as in lt*t. 
 must, stump. This loop, called ist, is made quite narrow, and 
 extends to the middle of the stem. Zd, which is a cognate ! 
 of at, is also denoted by this loop, as in disposed. Like- in 
 circle, ist may be followed by the s-shun hook, as in gestation; 
 and implies n by being located on the n-hook side cf straight 
 letters, as in against. L 1.
 
 $Iate 23. 
 
 '< <. 
 
 \> V 3 
 
 / 
 
 Qixf 
 
 a 
 
 WORD-8HJNB. v 
 
 4 <? i . 
 
 \ *^ "A 
 
 o S* LK^ O~ <r~^ ' 
 
 7 ^^N Vv J/^ V , V n o ^1^ ^1 
 
 9 ^ 
 
 10 rV 
 
 11 X-^S. >, 'S r- ^-c-^ CT^X Vv X 
 
 -Vs 3 'V^ ^ 
 
 SENTENCES. 
 
 i\. 4 ;-z7\ x i A.vf^!
 
 ISO REPORTING STYLK OF SHORT-HAXD. 
 
 237. 1st, when written somewhat longer and considerably 
 broader, denotes the added r, as in boaster, obstruction, 
 stranger, L 2. This large loop we call ister. It also may be 
 followed by the s shun hook, as in illustration, and implies n 
 when struck on the left side of the stem, as in spinster. The 
 learner is cautioued to write ister with attention to length 
 rather than breadth, to prevent its being mistaken for sez. 
 To secure facile outlines, the s-circle, instead of the loop, is 
 often used in phrasing, as in must-like, must-make, L 5. 
 
 238. 1 Vocalize: Beast boast coast feast ghost host 
 2 post toast taste steal waste steel; 1 pos. moist steam 
 8 steep accost. Without vowels: Placed cast chest dust 
 4 fast guest haste just list arrest (ar) detest disgust 
 * dishonest earnest harvest disposed infest invest in- 
 
 6 wstigation* molest must most pretext stage star state 
 
 7 stead stole stop stomach store test testify text utmost 
 
 8 vast west stump destiny* adjust bequest* twist* best 
 
 9 bust digest fist forest inquest* jest nest request robust 
 
 10 rust statesman* statute stem stern stiff sting stitch 
 
 11 storm stubborn stuff stumble* vest worst. 1 pos. August 
 
 12 cost least still stock style honest honestly*; 8 pos. 
 
 13 last past stamp attest; (r-hook) breakfast distrust 
 
 14 trust intrust breast abreast crest frost grist incrust 
 13 protest priest; (1-hook) blest; (n-hook) dentist fantastic 
 
 16 manifest. 
 
 17 Also write: Cluster lustre master monster plaster 
 
 18 Sylvester minister* register bluster strange; 8 pos. 
 
 19 administer abstraction. (123 31:30.) 
 
 PHRASES. 
 
 239. All-the-rest at-most be-pleased have-just I-am- 
 pleased I-must it-is-just it-is-most must-mean must-receive 
 their-most they-must must-take so-must so-you-must \iry- 
 best what-most which-must-be. 
 
 EXERCISE 23. 
 
 240 . The-presence of-those \vhom wo-lovc is-as ft-
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 double life; absence in-its anxious longing and-sense of ^a- 
 cancy is-as a-foretaste of death. 2. We-that-live to-please 
 must please to-live. 3. It-is-best to-be with-those in-time 
 that- we hope to-be with in eternity. 4. They- that govern 
 must-make least noise. 5. Grace was in-all her steps, heaven 
 in her eye. 6. By gaming we lose both our time and-treas- 
 ure, two things most precious to-the lifeof-man. 7. Genius 
 always gives its-best at-first, prudence at-last. 3. Haste 
 is of-the devil. 9. Though I-am-always in-haste, I-am-never 
 in-a hurry. 10. Men love in-haste, but-they detest at-leisure. 
 11. Hope is-a lover's staff. 12. That-man lives twice thatr 
 lives the-first life well. 13. The-grave is-a common treasury 
 to-which we-must all be-taken. 14. Choose always the-way 
 that seems the-best, however rough it-may-be. 
 
 (1652:151:15.) 
 
 241. SPEED SENTENCE. One-of-the-best and-most earnest 
 of-the ministers in-the North-west has-just-been advanced 
 to a higher post. (5 1.) 
 
 THE TYPE-WRITER. Type-writing is much more rapid, 
 and ir. various ways far superior to pen work. A knowledge 
 of this art itself is very valuable, and has become entirely 
 indispensable to the professional Stenographer. The Private 
 Secretary is almost invariably required to make use of a 
 writing machine in preparing transcripts and copies. He is, 
 moreover, expected to be familiar with its operation before 
 he accepts a situation, and skill in manipulating it should, if 
 
 Eracticable, be gained while the course in Stenography is 
 eing taken. 
 
 There are a dozen or more different kinds of writing ma- 
 chines. Some of the cheaper instruments do good work, 
 but lack in speed, a requisite entirely indispensable when 
 used in connection with short-hand. The Remington is used 
 most. There are, in fact, so many offices supplied with this 
 excellent type-writer, that it would be policy for every 
 stenographer to learn to operate it, even though he should 
 own or use some other style of machine. If you have no 
 machine to practice on, send for a draught of the key-board 
 and thoroughly learn the location of each letter.
 
 TBANBLATB. 
 
 Mi 
 
 / C* . I V* 
 
 I X 
 
 v^ 
 
 ^ \ 
 
 
 /' 
 
 r- x \ 
 
 ex 
 
 A c 
 
 "U 
 
 r i/' \
 
 LESSON XXIV. 
 LENGTHENING PRINCIPLE 
 
 843 The writing of a curve double its usual length signifies 
 the addition, first, of thr (see L 1), second, tr (see L 2), ami 
 third, dr (see L 3). The writer's aim should be to write the 
 lengthened curve more than twice its usual length, rather 
 than less, in order to obviate any liability there may be to 
 confound it with standard letters. For convenience long 
 curves are named fetter, vetter, thetter, metier, etc. These in 
 proportion to their length are bent much less than standard 
 stems. To illustrate, metier extends but a trifle further above 
 
 the line than m, as the figure ^- ^ -^ shows. The occa- 
 sions for lengthening y and zh are very rare. Lengthened / 
 adds tr only; for if the numerous words containing l-thr and 
 l-dr also, were expressed by lengthening I, it would be too 
 much burdened with values. 
 
 244. The lengthened mp adds r only, signifying mpr or 
 mbr, as shown in L 4. Lengthened ng adds kr or gr only. 
 See L 5. 
 
 245. The three consonant positions are the same for 
 lengthened as for standard length horizonal stems. Down 
 strokes are written in the following manner: 1 pos., on the 
 line; 2 pos., one-half below the line; 3 pos., two-thirds below 
 the line. See whither, water, fatter, L 6. For upstrokes, 
 1 pos., beginning half a space above the line; 2 pos., begin- 
 ning on the line; 3 pos., beginning half a space below the 
 line. See lighter, later, latter, L 6. 
 
 246. A suffix may be expressed by adding a consonant 
 sign to a lengthened letter, as in L 7. When a stem is 
 lengthened, the vowels are always read before the added thr, 
 tr, etc.; but the final hook or circle is not pronounced until 
 afterwards. L 8. For example, in eastern, the final n is not 
 pronounced until after tr; in furtherance, ns is not read until 
 after thr. 
 
 247. This principle is utilized to quite an extent in phras- 
 ing. (See Ls 10 to 13.) Lengthening a curve adds there, their, 
 
 -123-
 
 124 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 or other. Final ng is sometimes lengthened to add there or j 
 their. See L 12. 
 
 248. KEY. 1. Father mother weather further farther- 
 more another. 2. Letter reporter material entirely 
 legislator oyster. 3. Order surrender calender murder 
 wander shudder. 4. Timber chamber cumber pamper 
 lumber damper. 5. Conquer anger banker finger hun- 
 ger longer. 6. Whither water fatter lighter later latter. 
 7. Rendered orderly loitering tenderness waterfall with- 
 ers. 8. Entrance furtherance eastern northern southern 
 lantern obliteration. 9. Flatter stronger whether swifter 
 central diameter immaterial. 
 
 PHRASES. 10. For-their toave-their may-there from-there 
 in-tbeir some-other. 11. Stronger-than have-their-own 
 some-other-one further-than live-there was-there. 12. Liv- 
 ing-there making-their think-there-is if-there-were in-their- 
 case no-longer-than. 13. At-one-another for-their-satisfac- 
 tion in-their-possession neither-of-them such-matters 
 through-their whether-or-no. 
 
 SENTENCES. 1. It-is-a well-known saying that murder 
 will out. 2. Hunger makes raw beans sweet. 3. One bar- 
 ber shaves another. 
 
 249. 1 Write: Centre eccentric enter hinder hindrance 
 2 material maternal matter literal render senator tender 
 8 thunder thermometer wonder yonder entire neither 
 4 neutral caster eastern thither voter nitre mitre mutter 
 6 sifter smatter laughter Anderson Alexander re-enter 
 
 6 hunter sunder slender winter bewilder smother 
 
 7 swifter literary alter chronometer temper slumber 
 
 8 limber amber cucumber hamper distemper scamper 
 
 9 cumber sombre angry anchor tinker clinker hanker 
 10 rancor drinker handkerchief. (60 1-20 1.) 
 
 PHRASES. 
 
 250. All-the-matter another-instance anothcr-opinion 
 another-question another-time enter-into for-their-sake 
 for-there-has-been for-there-U for-there-were in-siich-mat-
 
 Pate 24*
 
 126 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 ters in-their-opinion in-their-place no-further of-the-matter 
 one-another that-is-another there-is-another to-have-their 
 what-matter what-was-the-matter whenever-there-has-been 
 whenever-there-occurs think-there-has-never think-there- 
 h as-been. 
 
 EXERCISE 24. . 
 
 251. 1. To step aside is human. 2. Music washes away 
 from-the soul the-dust of-every day life. 8. Obstinacy is 
 ever most positive when-it-is-most in-the-wrong. 4. They- 
 who forgive most shall-be-most forgiven. 5. Passion costs 
 me too-much to bestow it upon every trifle. 6. To climb 
 steep hills requires slow pace at-first. 7. Every noble work 
 is-at-first impossible. 8. Time is generally the-best doctor. 
 
 9. In-poetry, which-is all fable, truth is still the-perfection. 
 
 10. Poetry is truth dwelling in-beauty. 11. Ye stars, that 
 are-the poetry of-heaven. 12. Praise is only praise when 
 well addressed. 13. Solid pudding against empty praise. 
 14. Live this-day as-if-the last. 15 Who-makes the-fairest 
 show means the-most deceit. 16. Small service is true ser- 
 vice while it-lasts. (1311:451.) 
 
 252. SPEED SENTENCE. The-senator calls a-swifter re- 
 porter into another chamber to-fu'ther the-taking of testi- 
 mony in-the murder-trial. (5 1.) 
 
 NOMEN JLATUKE. It is a matter of considerable importance 
 in teaching, that the more common elements of the system 
 be provided with suitable names. These names, if charac- 
 teristic, will be easily remembered by the learner, and 
 abridge and give precision to the teacher's work. 
 
 The 1-hook series may be designated, pel, bel, tel, chel, vel, 
 etc., the r-hooks, per, der, jer, ther; n-hooks, pen, ben, fen, 
 shen; f-hooks, pef, tef, jef, hef . Stems doubly hooked, plen, 
 dref, flen, mern, delf, twen, kwef, wern; also, kayshun, 
 beeshun. vcoshun, velshun, pershun, nershun, relshun, etc.
 
 REPORTING 8Ttt.lt OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 127 
 
 The circles are called iss anJ sez. The loops, ist and ister. 
 
 Lengthened curves may be signified by adding ter to the 
 letter to be doubled; thus, emter, enter, efter, ithter, wayter, 
 veeter, etc. 
 
 The teacher will not, however, overlook the fact that when 
 the pupil hears splen, or any other mere name, he does not 
 picture this character in his mind as clearly as when he sees 
 it plainly written on the blackboard. His mental grasp of 
 the system is yet too imperfect. Hence, use names sparingly, 
 and chalk liberally. Blackboard illustrations impress the 
 learner's imagination most forcibly, and he gets a clearer 
 idea of the teacher's meaning, and remembers it longer. 
 
 253. 
 
 TRANSLATE.
 
 LESSON XXV. 
 
 HALVING PRINCIPLE. 
 
 254. KEY. . Bit bed cut code gait art quote slate 
 start about act. 2. Bolt giant violet twilight exert 
 merit uncertain suspect. 3. Adjacent debtor inhabit 
 circuit educate precept prerogative nutshell. 4. Captivate 
 legitimate strict reciprocate transmit discredit pre-emi- 
 nent. 
 
 WORD AND PHRASE SIGNS. T. Without almighty em- 
 phatic nature natural posterity after afternoon somewhat 
 is-it as-it use-it. 6. Yesterday intellect heart associate 
 sometime intelligence intelligible interchange territory 
 or-not. 7. Heretofore manuscript postscript hesitate for- 
 it better-than in-the-second-place human-nature. 
 
 PHRASES. 8. After-which at-the-present-time it-is-better- 
 than at-times quite-certa!" though t-we-were almost-certain 
 after-we-have quite-as-well. &U.**. 10. For key see list 
 words, sec. 260. 
 
 SENTENCES. 1. I-love sometimes to-doubt as-well-as know. 
 2. Habit is-the deepest law of human-nature. 3. If fame 
 is only to-come after-death I-am in-no hurry for-it. 4. Every- 
 man is-the architect of-his-own fortune. 5. Where no hope 
 is left is felt no fear. 6. Let them obey who know how to 
 rule. 
 
 255. One of the most useful contrivances in the entire 
 system is that by which a letter, when shortened to half its 
 usual length, is made to express an added t or d. Thus, 
 \ 6, when shortened in this manner, is read N bt, as in bit, 
 or \ bd, as in bed; k, when halved, has the force of kt, 
 as it cut, or kd, as in code. Tand d are the most frequently 
 recurring consonants, and being cognates, or similar sounds, 
 no ambiguity results from the expression of both by the 
 same contrivance. 
 
 256. Learners are cautioned not to write the shortened 
 letters more than half the usual, or standard length, else the 
 two will become confounded. The practice of the writer 
 
 should be rather to form these brief signs a trifle less than the 
 -IK-
 
 Plate 23. 
 
 V C. 
 
 4 TV 
 
 WORD-SIONS. 
 
 6 ( .. 
 
 "V L 
 
 \- 
 
 10 X 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 -V 
 
 r 1 , 
 
 \ , 
 
 J 
 
 vA^XV 
 
 r 
 
 V
 
 ISO REPOET1NQ STYLB OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 standard length. To avoid confusion not only must the 
 halved letters not be too long, but those of standard length 
 also should not be too short. 
 
 257. Shortened curves are, in proportion to their length, 
 bent somewhat more than full lengths; as an illustration, 
 
 it will be seen that ^ mt extends almost as far Above the 
 line as / - m. This practice adds to the angularity of many 
 word-forms. 
 
 258. First position words composed entirely of shortened 
 stems, or of a mixture of half-length and horizontal letters, 
 are written one full space above the line, as in bit; third posi- 
 tion words are written almost entirely below the line, as in 
 about, act. 
 
 259. In gait, L 1, it will be seen that the added t is pro- 
 nounced after g, but not, however, until the vowel a has 
 been sounded. The rule is, read all vowels before pronounc- 
 ing the t or d expressed by the shortening principle. 
 
 260. In the following list t is indicated by halving: 
 
 1 Vocalize: Boat boot coat cat vault sect mate dolt 
 
 2 nut saint dote; 1 pos. cheat. Without vowels: Date 
 
 3 get bet debt hate late net met let fate note vote 
 
 4 sent left lift accent enact exact tact adopt better 
 
 5 insect accept acceptable insert little result smart 
 
 6 limit motive native rabbit recent arithmetic alphabet 
 
 7 instigate assent artifice agent intimate repeat promote 
 
 8 capital* locomotive certify* certificate* mathematics 
 
 9 ratify petrify rusticate support reject auditor (ar) 
 
 10 remit (ar) imitate report magnetic resolute resort 
 
 11 adjunct agitate cognate cottage dogmatic export ex- 
 
 12 tinct inject intact peasant submit musket theft upstart 
 
 13 captive certain* circuit* debate decent deject designate 
 
 14 desolate eject elect (el) except execute habit habitual 
 
 15 eminent emulate erect (ar) estate* innocent irritate 
 
 16 legislate originate sentence* abject Hamlet; (1-hook) 
 
 17 implicate pleasant vegetable duplicate fluent; 1 pos. 
 
 18 client climate; (r-hook) intricate present private pro-
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 131 
 
 19 duct promote prospect protract subtract tract trans- 
 
 20 late attribute bracelet precinct project restrict thrift 
 
 21 tribute decrepit affirmative* aggravate appreciate* 
 
 22 October credit deprecate detract extract transcript* 
 
 23 approximate. (14532.) 
 
 PHRASES. 
 
 261. After-a after-that after-the at-present be-certain 
 be-thought better-than better-way does-not recent-time 
 has-not have-no-doubt have-sent have-thought I-am-quite- 
 sure I-thought-that is-not no-doubt not-a-man not-enough 
 not-possibly not-much not-that not-every-one present- 
 instance present-time so-little think-there-is-not that-such 
 that-which which-must-not. 
 
 EXERCISE 25. 
 
 262. 1. Always rise from table with-at appetite and-you- 
 will-never sit down without-one. 2. When-we feel a strong 
 desire to thrust our advice upon others, it-is usually because 
 we suspect their weakness; but-we ought rather to suspect 
 oar-own. 3. To-be happy we-must-be true to nature and 
 carry our age along with us. 4. Beauty is-a possession not 
 our-own. 5. The-beautiful are-never desolate, but some-one 
 always loves them. 6. It-is-better for-a young-man to blush 
 than to turn pale. 7. Every Christian is born great, be- 
 cause-he-is born for-heaven. 8. That-which-is-so universal 
 as death must-be-a benefit. 9. We speak of educating our 
 children. Do-we know that our children also educate us? 
 
 10. Fortune is-the rod of-the weak and-the staff of-the brave. 
 
 11. The-chains of habit are generally too-small to-be felt 
 until-they-are too strong to-be broken. 12. Keep thy heart 
 with all diligence, for out-of-it are- the issues of- life. 
 
 (1742:151:30.) 
 
 263. SPEED SENTENCE. We-will-certainly be-able very 
 soon to-make verbatim-reports of-the eminent speakers in- 
 the debate by-means of-the stenographic art. (4 1.)
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SlIORT-HAXD. 
 
 TRANSLATE. 
 
 r ^ r \ 
 
 CORRESPONDENCE. Letter-writing in short-hand is no 
 more interesting than it is helpful to the learner. You will 
 naturally write more carefully when you expect that your 
 letter will be read by some one at a distance; and this prac- 
 tice will in time give you a habit of accuracy. The perusal 
 of the letters you receive will prove a most valuable drill in 
 reading. You will be compelled to rely entirely upon the 
 short-hand notes; whereas, in reading what you have previ- 
 ously written yourself, you are aided in a measure by mem- 
 ory. It is a mistake to suppose that you must complete your 
 course before undertaking such a correspondence. The 
 better plan is to begin early, writing a mixed hand, that is, 
 all the words stenographically that you are able, and the 
 balance in long-hand. Two points are to be guarded: 
 1st. Do nqt put words that you have not learned into short- 
 hand. 2nd. Do not fail to employ characters for all words 
 that you have learned. Your instructor will be able to fur- 
 nish you letters of introduction, particularly if you are 
 taught by mail.
 
 LESSON XXVI. 
 
 ADDED D. 
 
 265. When t or d is followed by a final vowel, it cannot 
 properly be expressed by the halving principle; for if it were 
 so indicated, it would be impossible so to place the final 
 vowel that it would be read last. To illustrate, t in might 
 may be expressed by shortened m; but the employment of 
 the stem t in mighty indicates the fact of a following vowel. 
 
 266. Shortened consonants, when standing alone, are 
 usually employed to denote words that contain but one 
 vowel; for example, half-length d is used for date, while in 
 edit full-length dt must be written. This rule applies also in 
 writing void, avoid, bate, abate, etc. L 1. Increased legibil- 
 ity is thus secured, since the reader is expected to supply but 
 one vowel when a shortened consonant stands alone. 
 
 267. The plural of -j-.coat is expressed by affixing the cir- 
 cle s, thus -y coats. This is simple so far as the writer is 
 concerned. But the reader is liable to miscall it coast, sup- 
 posing that the circle s is to be sounded before the added t. 
 The invariable rule, however, is to read t first and s last. If 
 s actually occurs before t, the loop should be employed, as in 
 
 ^=> coast. 
 
 268. Outlines composed entirely of horizontal shortened 
 letters are usually writen in the first position when the 
 accented vowel is first-place, as in void, esteem, swift. The 
 halving principle is used to express the past tense of regular 
 verbs, as obliged, avoided, stopped. 
 
 PHRASES. 
 
 269. Future-time if-it-were-only of-its-own could-have-it 
 this-world's-goods good-time many-facts an-actual-fact 
 ceilain-causes bad-example good-many-times could-not-be- 
 sent would-not-have-been.
 
 184 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 270. KEY. 1. Might mighty date edit void avoid bate 
 abate gate agate. 2. Obliged avoided stopped stood 
 covered comrade infidel betide esteem immature. 3. Evi- 
 dence fortune per-cent swift rhetoric susceptible judicial 
 integrity catalogue. 4. Estimate ultimate evident Con- 
 necticut adjudicate captivate multiply went acquired 
 between. 5. Intentional perpetual apart abstract hermit 
 antagonism Presbyterian prominent return. 6. H at 
 taught sort assimilate athlete dissipate exult ostentatious 
 added. 7. Schedule seldom despite mutual necessitate 
 beautiful delicate district integral. 8. Prejudice transact 
 promulgate federal intolerable acquaintance wayward 
 photograph intention. 9. Advocate defective splendid 
 distinct distribute stimulate instruct invested. 
 
 WORD AND PHRASE SIGNS. 10. Feature future fact as- 
 tonish astonishment establish establishment onward wis- 
 dom quite history world. 11. If-it it-ought it-would 
 it-had at-it do-it had-it of-it have-it have-had people-of- 
 God. 12. Historian Act-of-Congress at-all-events east- 
 and-west fear-of-God good-and-bad in-the-world all-the- 
 world. 
 
 PHRASES. 13. As-good-as as-good-as-possible could-never 
 could-not God's-love church-of-God in-which-you-are-en- 
 gaged what-did. 14. Was-received which-is-intended 
 which-made could-nevertheless as-good-as-it if-it-did it-is- 
 admitted that-is-intended. 15. For key see list words, 
 sec. 271. 
 
 271. 1 Added d: Bed could good shade stood decided 
 
 2 comrade method* instead evidence* educated invade 
 
 3 infidel. 
 
 4 In the following list both t and d are expressed by 
 
 5 halving: 1 pos. east bottom got did light bid God 
 
 6 meet invite might indeed fit knot lightning lot soft 
 
 7 spot. Vocalize: feat beat naught caught fought dot 
 
 8 tight deed shot night slight naught sift ieed knight 
 
 9 neat salt sheet spite steed tide; 2 pos. accelerate per-
 
 S 
 
 8 
 9 
 
 10 
 11 
 12 
 13 
 14 
 15 
 
 Pate 26. 
 
 < 
 
 X 
 
 -1 
 
 .A 
 
 v 
 
 
 T" 
 
 -^ L b 
 b- <~- I 
 
 "XL" 
 
 v 
 
 i ^L 
 
 e_
 
 13 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 10 centage rapid notify dispute active actual* admit 
 
 11 cupidity melt dissect dissent expedite extort heredi- 
 
 12 tary phonetic stupid fault appetite-, 3 pos. act adapt 
 
 13 apt doubt foot footstep bad adult adept absent fat 
 
 14 mute; (sez-circle) systematic*; (1-hook) article* doubtful 
 
 15 emblematic hospitable notable; (r-hook) Godfrey 
 
 16 crabbed crescent proximate lubricate dramatic ener- 
 
 17 vate promote integrity; 1 pos. prominent; 8 pos. attract 
 
 18 attractive; (rel-hook) relent multiplication; (\\-hook) 
 
 19 upward* went warrant quantity* reward acquainted 
 
 20 Edward; 1 pos. wind inward awkward wild ward 
 
 21 wield; 3 pos. backward outward; (f-hook) indefinite* 
 
 22 defective; (n-hook) manipulate pattern tenant candid 
 
 23 longitude mandate opponent benefit; (shun-hook) dedi- 
 
 24 cation litigation intentional estimation*; (loops) ob- 
 
 25 struct investigate* stipulate; (past tense) packed 
 
 26 molested trusted manifested transcribed displayed 
 
 27 employed adopted dispatched solicited specified 
 
 28 searched risked kept; (halving principle applied twice) 
 
 29 capitulate recapitulate estimate illegitimate (el) detect 
 
 30 mutilate fortunate* protect* deduct latitude rectitude 
 81 cataract; 1 pos. intent* mitigate; 3 pos. aptitude. 
 
 (15032.) 
 
 EXERCISE 26. 
 
 272. 1. The-good is always beautiful, the-beautiful is 
 good. 2. Goodness is beauty in-its-best estate. 3. Men 
 often make up in wrath what they want in reason. 4. Let 
 not the-sun go down upon thy. wrath. 5. All things are 
 artificial, for nature is-the-art of-God. 6. Biography is-the 
 home aspect of history. 7. The-desire of knowledge, like 
 thirst of-riches, increases ever with-the acquisition of-it. 
 8. Life is like wine; he who-would drink it pure must drain 
 it to-the dregs. 9. Literature is-the thought of-thinking 
 souls. 10. Doing good is-the-only certainly happy action 
 of-a man's life. 11. A-life that-is-worth living at-all is worth 
 writing minutely. 12. The universe would-not-be rich
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 137 
 
 enough to buy the-vote of-an honest man. 13. Character 
 is-a perfectly educated will. 14. It- were joy to die if-there- 
 be gods, and-sad to-live if-there-be none. 15. It-is-better 
 to desire than to enjoy; to-love than to-be loved. 
 
 (16821:15.) 
 
 273. SPEED SENTENCE. True wisdom is to know what-is- 
 best worth knowing, and to-do what-is-best worth doing. 
 
 (6-1.) 
 
 274. TRANSLAl V. 
 
 KEY-BOOK. Every student should make a key-book for his 
 own use. For this purpose take a well bound blank book, of 
 a good quality of ruled paper. 
 
 After your work has been corrected, copy the exercises, 
 list-words, and translations, all in proper order, with an 
 Index showing the page upon which the key for each partic- 
 ular lesson appears. A book of this character, if carefully 
 made, and diligently used for the purpose of reference, will 
 greatly facilitate the progress of its author, and make of him 
 a more accurate reporter. 
 
 An occasional discrepancy will be discovered between the 
 outlines here taught, and those given in the Pitman Diction- 
 ary. Our rule, however, has been not to depart from this 
 generally accepted standard, only in those few instances 
 where we believed there was good ground for it.
 
 LESSON xxvn. 
 
 SHORTENED DOUBLE CONSONANTS. 
 
 275. KEY. 1. Glad brought spread gratitude degen- 
 erate overtake remonstrate discreet secret. 2. Enameled 
 cultivate British secretary overture multiform predomin- 
 ate virtual seclude. 8. Cloud suffered shrewd effort 
 predicate threat sacred verdict vertical. 4. Deplete 
 exclude migrate destroyed graduate demonstrate fertile 
 pervert penetrate. 5. Illustrated cupboard virtuous 
 freedom frustrate scrutiny chartered glide scattered. 
 
 WORD AND PHRASE SIGNS. 6. Particular opportunity 
 part party creature according according-to virtue child 
 spirit delight guilt guilty. 7. Partake majority minority 
 calculate political prosperity circulate co-operate hundred. 
 
 8. In-his-secret as-great-as from-it able-to Great-Britain 
 for-the-most-part in -order-that in -order-to in-regard-to. 
 
 9. Till-it tell-it told until-it at-any-rate able-to-give-it 
 with-regard-to at-all-its at-all-times toward towards. 
 
 PHRASES. 10. Able-to-think be-able-to British-America 
 be-told-that for-my-part Court-of-Justice holy-spirit I-am- 
 able-to with-regard-to-it. 
 
 SENTENCES. 1. Angels are bright still, though-the bright- 
 est fell. 2. Many delight more in giving of-presents than-in 
 paying debts. 3. A-book may-be as-great-as a-battle. 
 13, 14 and 15. For key see list words, sec. 277. 
 
 276. Letters of the double and triple consonant series are 
 also shortened to denote the addition of t and d, as in glad, 
 brought, spread, enameled, etc. Ls 1 to 5 inclusive. The 
 learner will observe in the examples given that both sounds 
 expressed by the double consonant are pronounced before 
 the added I. 
 
 277. 1 Using the 1-hook and vowels: Plate blade plat; 
 
 2 1 pos. fleet flight bleed clod; (without vowels) inflate 
 
 3 blood glad flood cultivation* include preclude replied 
 
 4 tumbled coupled displayed tangled entitled employed 
 
 5 smuggled doubled assembled rambled pamphlet; 1 pos. 
 
 las
 
 Plate 27. 
 
 1 c_ 
 
 
 -7 
 
 " 
 
 
 WOKD-SU4X6. 
 
 ^ 
 
 C _ 
 
 9 .1. r r ._ ........ i 
 
 Pli-itAat,. *" 
 
 10 
 
 
 SENTENCES. 
 
 13 
 
 14 
 15 
 
 WOKU-FORMS. 

 
 140 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 6 plead blot plot; (r-hook) vocalize: trait brute prayed 
 
 7 crowed cried; 1 pos. creed trite; (without vowels) 
 
 8 gathered labored prospered papered uttered shirt 
 
 9 tempered altered betrayed muttered offered silvered 
 
 10 measured treasured record* clamored flattered traveled 
 
 11 troubled fluttered glittered hammered scrupled arbi- 
 
 12 trate aristocrat* culprit perpetrate vibrate great re- 
 
 13 treat regret grade grateful celebrate democrat credible 
 
 14 degrade defraud hatred emigrate third trade hypo- 
 
 15 crite gratify bread dread intrude tread spread straight 
 
 16 Elbert Frederick Richard Robert Gertrude Albert 
 
 17 Alfred. (94-^21:30.) 
 
 PHRASES. 
 
 278. Able-to-agree able-to-do according-to-a all-particu- 
 lars be-called-upon be-told-so be-greatly called-upon 
 for-great great-affairs great-applause great-danger great- 
 deal great-difference great-difficulty great-favor great- 
 many great-men great-nation great-opportunities great- 
 pleasure great-principles great-respect great-truths great- 
 value have-greatly have-told I-am-afraid I-am-told in-a- 
 great-measure in-the-street in-this-world may-greatly to- 
 be-able-tb freedom-(of- the) -press gather-together great-ad- 
 vantage. 
 
 EXERCISE 27. 
 
 279. 1. Tc-do an evil action is base; to-do a good action, 
 without incurring danger, is common enough; but it-is-the 
 part of-a good-man to-do great and-noble deeds, though-he 
 risks everything. 2. Men resemble the-gods in-nothing so- 
 much as-in doing good to-their fellow-creatures. 3. Hcavt'ii 
 from all-creatures hides the-book of fate. 4. A-good heart 
 will at-all-times betray the-best head in-the-world. 5. The- 
 greatest trust between man-and-man is-the-trust of giving 
 counsel. 6. The-next dreadful thing to-a battle lost is-a 
 battle won. 7. It-is seldom the-case that beautiful persons 
 are otherwise of-great virtue. 8. When clouds are seen
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 141 
 
 wise-men put on their cloaks. 9. There-can-be no Chris- 
 tianity where there-is-no charity. (134 1:30 1.) 
 
 280. SPEED SENTENCE. You-shonld cultivate a-good- 
 memory in-order-that at-all-times you-may-be-able-to-report 
 the-exact evidence which in courts-of -justice is sometimes 
 given at-the rate of two hundred a-minute. (3 1.) 
 
 281. TRANSLATE. 
 
 V 
 
 "X, 
 
 ) rv 
 
 ITEMS OF INTEREST. It has been observed that the pen of 
 the long experienced stenographer follows the speaker al- 
 most automatically. It is indeed true that the reporter can, 
 to a certain extent, take notes while thinking of something 
 else. Stories are told of brilliant young writers taking a nap 
 in the middle of a speech, without losing a single word that 
 fell from the orator's lips. Some stenographers interest them- 
 selves with experiments as to how extensive arithmetical cal- 
 culations can be made while writing one hundred words a 
 minute. Many reports have been taken entirely in the dark; 
 also, by reporters who were obliged to stand, holding their 
 note-books against the wall.
 
 LESSON xxvm. 
 
 HALF-LENGTH FINAL HOOKED STEMS. 
 
 282. KEY. 1. Blind lend paved petitioned meant 
 mitten funds drafts bends grand. 2. Rou d around 
 drift dental talent superintendent stimulant suspend 
 counter random. 3. Equivalent strengthened Ireland 
 relevant supplicant frequent insolvent. 4. Landscape 
 dependent craft hint fountain surround silent candor 
 event. 5. Phantom country mankind expedient Atlantic 
 identity suspend announcement. 6. Gentle authentic 
 plunder blend bland frantic ornament. 
 
 WORD AND PHRASE SIGNS. 7. Prophet profit infinite 
 derivative temperament testament intelligent island gen- 
 tlemen gentleman imagined. 8. Cannot can-it may-nt 
 behind be-nt which-ought-nt which-nt whioh-hd-nt 
 whieh-wd-nt whieh-ought-to-hv-hd which-hv-hd which-wd- 
 hv-hd. 9. It-ought-nt it-nt it-wd-nt it-hd-nt did-nt do- 
 nt had-nt it-ought-to-hv-hd it-wd-hv-hd sueh-ought-to- 
 hv-hd such-hv-hd such-wd-hv-hd. 10. Will-nt which-are-nt 
 which-were-nt dare-nt upon-it on-the-one-hand it- 
 will-not gave-it give-it we-are-nt were-nt. 11. It-will- 
 hv-hd which-will-not have-not such-are-not such-were-nt 
 on-either-hand on-the-other-hand they-are-nt there-would- 
 nt why-nt in-point-of-fact. 
 
 PHRASES. 12. According-to-agreement at-the-same-mo- 
 ment cunnot-expect did-not-entirely do-not-say human- 
 kind if-it-did-not such-may-not-be. 
 
 SENTENCES. 1. We-must-al\vays be doing or suffering. 
 2. The-entire ocean is affected by-a pebble. 3. Beauty 
 lives with kindness. 4. You do-not believe; you on'y believe 
 that-you believe. L 15. For key see list words, see. 284. 
 
 283. Stems to which a final hook is joined are also halved, 
 both stem and hook being read before the added t or d, as in 
 blind, lend, paved, petitioned. Meant, for instance, is ex- 
 pressed by the shortened - ^ mn, which is equivalent to mn-t. 
 Here the character mn is regarded as indivisable, and is pro- 
 
 142
 
 Pate 28. 
 
 " ^ \ 
 
 ^ 1 
 
 
 -a 
 
 V @N 1 
 
 10 lr-3 5 / 
 
 ^ 
 
 ~^_? 
 
 ^ L
 
 144 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 nounced first. In such case it is not allowable to sound t 
 immediately after m, as in met, and before the reading of n 
 expressed by the final hook. Hence, in mitten (L 1), and 
 similar words in which t occurs before the sound indicated 
 by the final hook, the halving principle cannot be applied. 
 
 284. 1 Write: 1 pos. gift mind appoint* kind drift; 
 
 2 (n-hook) count tent faint fund lent mend paint vent 
 
 3 dent tend rent lend bound bend round spend stand 
 
 4 repent amend extent fount indent mound refund 
 
 5 vacant violent moment accident disappoint disband 
 
 6 husband ancient potent infant lament mount moun- 
 
 7 tain patent patient payment ardent enchant demand 
 
 8 extend tendency* depend movement valient resident 
 
 9 serpent servant argument excellent* basement attrn- 
 
 10 tive coincident detriment urgent encounter discount 
 
 11 impotent delinquent* distant document cogent instant 
 
 12 elephant enactment repugnant opulent incident amaze- 
 
 13 ment romantic* solvent subsequent* observant abscond 
 
 14 memorandum* Maryland Richmond Edmund Omnipo- 
 
 15 tent; (using el) elegant element aliment boundless 
 
 16 incidental bundle candle; (using ar) indenture sur- 
 
 17 mount venture remnant remainder slander* Raymond 
 
 18 Roland; 1 pos. bond fond augment joined occupant 
 
 19 joint point b.nd find kind appoint diamond; 3 pos. 
 
 20 amusement apparent rudiment expand land account 
 
 21 pound band cant; (n and 1 hooks) plant blunt applicant 
 
 22 supplicant gland plunder* (ar) blunder (ar); (n and r 
 
 23 hooks) grand brand front vagrant grand-jury president 
 
 24 encouragement frequent* predicament precedent pre- 
 25 vent reprimand superintend* transparent flagrant 
 
 26 profound divergent fragrant pretend fragment brilliant 
 
 27 ingredient; 1 pos. grind immigrant print; 3 pos. 
 
 28 ground; (n and f hooks) pavement extravagant cove- 
 
 29 nant achievement reverend; (n-hook twice) counte- 
 
 80 ) ance* tangent penitent liniment monument mendicant 
 
 81 abundant*; (initial n-hook) insolent insolvent; (prinji-
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 145 
 
 32 pie applied twice) respondent redundant dependent* 
 
 33 candidate resentment* sentiment amendment* vindi- 
 
 34 cate; 1 pos. treatment appointment* predominant*. 
 
 (181 4^-3.) 
 
 PHKASES 
 
 28o. According-to-agreement all-mankind by-his-own- 
 statement cannot-be cannot-become cannot-do cannot-go 
 cannot-make cannot-receive cannot-take do-not-doubt do- 
 not-admit do-not-be do-not-know do-not-necessarily for-a- 
 moment had-not-known have-found I-dare-not in-a-mo- 
 ment in-an-instant in-judgment my-mind on-account-of- 
 many on-this-point some-cannot they-will-not this-depart- 
 ment this-did-not this-point tc-the-account-of vei-y-fre- 
 qut'iitjy we-do-not what-cannot to-which-it-may-not this- 
 country depend-upon-it great-extent which-is-believed 
 you-are-determined. 
 
 EXERCISE 28. 
 
 286. 1. Idlers cannot find time to-be idle, or-the indus- 
 trious to-be at-leisure. 2. How slow the-time to-the warm 
 soul that in-the-very instant it forms would-execute a-great 
 design. 3. Nature has inclined us to-love-men. 4. In life 
 we-shall find many men that are great and-some-men that 
 are good, but very few-men that are both great and-good. 
 5. A-man is sure to dream enough before he dies without- 
 making arrangements for-the-purpose. 6. Good counsels 
 observed are claims to-grace. 7. If-there-is-anything that 
 keeps the-mind open to angel visits, and repels the-ministry 
 of ill, it-is human-love. 8. Age, that-lessens the-enjoyment 
 of-life, increases our desire of-living. 9. We-do-not count 
 a-man's years until he-has-nothing else to-count. 10. There- 
 is-no-such-thing as chance; and what seems to us merest 
 accident springs from-the deepest source of destiny. 11. Do- 
 not-ask if-a-man has-been through college; ask if-a college 
 has-been through him, if-he-is-a walking university. 
 
 (18221:15.)
 
 146 
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAXD. 
 
 28*. SPEED SENTENCE. The-greatest events of-an age 
 are-its best thoughts. It-is-the nature of-thought to-find its- 
 way into-action. (5 1.) 
 
 TRANSLATE. 
 
 * V V P x \ 
 
 \> A ^ 
 
 \ 
 
 \ 
 
 X 
 
 T 
 
 \ 
 
 ....... . ^ V 
 
 'K _../_ 
 
 u 
 
 To THE TEACHER. Dictate the following sentence to the 
 class, requiring the pupils afterwards to read it backwards : 
 Receive than give to blessed more is it that believes world 
 the tribe that all and envy hatred jokes practical sarcasm of 
 matter the in. Noel Random.
 
 LESSON XXIX. 
 
 HALF-LENGTH L, R, M, N. 
 
 289. f~ L, ~^\ r, - ^ m, ^ ^ n, are thickened when halved 
 to express d, as in read, failed, made, need, L 1. This prac- 
 tice adds to the legibility of short-hand. The characters 
 thus produced, rid, ^ rd, / " s md, ^ nd, will not be mis- 
 
 taken for shortened f y, ~*^ w, - * mp, and - "ng, for the 
 reason that these four letters are not halved, except in a few 
 specified cases, as attempt, wheat, longed, L 2. The down- 
 ward I is always used when shaded to express d, as in failed. 
 These letters, however, are not shaded to indicate d when 
 either the w or n hook is attached, as in wild, arraigned, 
 mind, wend. Also, I is struck upwards after ms, and hence 
 cannot be shaded to express d, as in ^- tf mislaid. 
 
 290. A final half-length j t, denoting tiite, tude, or ted, is 
 disjoined in some cases in order to render it distinguishable, 
 as in institute, treated, multitude, L 1. 
 
 When reading half-length stems, not only the s-circle, but 
 the st-loop, is pronounced after t or d has been sounded, as 
 in midst, didst, greatest, L 3. 
 
 291. When one or several hooks, circles and vowels are 
 appended to a shortened stem, the order of pronunciation is 
 a source of some little embarrassment to most beginners. 
 Just where or when to sound the t is the question. To 
 further clear away this difficulty, let us analyze the outline 
 
 restraints. Directing our attention to the second 
 
 syllable, we find in addition to a, six consonants all expressed 
 by one movement of the pen. The consonants of this syllable, 
 s-t-r-n-t-s, are expressed in this manner: s-t-r by the triple 
 
 consonant | str, n by the final hook (implied), t by the 
 shortening principle, s by the circle. Hei'e, t, as in all such 
 cases, is sounded before, immediately before, the final 
 s-circle. It may seem a little extraordinary that t (which is 
 
 147
 
 148 BEPOBT1NO STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 expressed by halving) should occur between nand s, although 
 these two sounds, ns, are both indicated by a single sign, 
 namely, the s-circle, strucK on the left side of the stem. This 
 may appear complicated, but it is not really so; the observant 
 learner will not be embarrassed by it. Bear distinctly in 
 mind that the final circle is always read last, and that t is 
 sounded just before it. When no final circle occurs, then t 
 is pronounced last, that is, after the stem and all appended 
 hooks, circles and vowels have been sounded. 
 
 292. KEY. 1. Institute treated multitude read failed 
 made need laid yield. 2. Wild around mind wend 
 attempt wheat longed herald standard coward defend . 
 8. Midst didst greatest Indiana afford ordinance re- 
 demption modern index undoubtedly prompt. 
 
 WORD AND PHRASE SIGNS. 4. Immediately under hand 
 hold held lord word heard hard individual. 5. Down- 
 ward forward undergo afterward behold short-hand 
 hand-in-hand before-hand great-extent Word-of-God. 
 6. Hazard hand-writing landlord understand greater-than 
 ladies-and-gentlemen advancement hardware handsome. 
 
 PHRASES. 7. May-not-be Mr. -President words-of-my- 
 text words-of-our-text this-will-not been-understood for- 
 the-Word-of-God what-in-the-world. 8. Need-not through- 
 the-world under-such world-of-nature world-to-come of- 
 whieh-it-may-not-be you-will-not if-it-do-not. 9 and 10. For 
 key see list words, sec. 294. 
 
 SENTENCES.. 1. The-path of glory leads but to-the grave. 
 2. He-makes no friend who-never had-a foe. 8. Every-man 
 desires to-live long, but no man would-be old. 4. By steps 
 we-may ascend to God. 5. They say women and-mnsic 
 should-never be dated. 6. Where there-is-no hope tln-n-- 
 can-be no endeavor. 7. Few people know how to-be old. 
 
 293. It is often inexpedient to use a half-length letter when 
 the angle formed by its juncture with another consonant 
 is not sufficient to render it read : 'y distinguishable; e. g., in 
 
 ( looked, the shortened k shoulu _:>t be used, since the
 
 u 
 
 u 
 
 WOBD-BIONS. 
 
 r r 
 
 > 
 
 8 -------------- 9 
 
 WORD-FORMS. I/ 
 
 9 U, 
 
 jC_J_V 
 
 | 
 
 \ 
 
 10 
 
 r 
 
 b 
 
 V 
 
 SEKTENCE8. 
 
 \> ( * 
 
 V^+i ^j s~+, -\ -^^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 \ 
 
 \
 
 150 EEPOBTINO STYLE OF SlfORT-IIAXD. 
 
 combination l-kt, when written quickly, would have the ap- 
 pearance of lengthened 1. For similar reasons the halved sh 
 should not be used after I; n, f, or v after t or d; t after t or 
 d, or k after /or v. 
 
 294. 1 Using Id, write : Load scold lead fold manifold 
 
 2 mould Springfield uniold old led sold crawled drilled; 
 
 3 1 pos. lead leader mild field; 3 pos. loud lad mood; 
 
 4 (rd) absurd deplored beard yard Leonard sword; 
 
 5 1 pos. kindred read (verb) redeem; (md) mud modify 
 
 6 meditate* blamed inflamed claimed blossomed drummed 
 
 7 toiled meddle; 1 pos. medium* modulation mid mid- 
 
 8 night middle midst model moderate; 3 pos. mad; 
 
 9 (nd) defend end endless* send defendant* ascend 
 
 10 ascendant descend descendant endeavor* indolence* 
 
 11 indolent indigent indivisible indulge* reasoned inde- 
 
 12 pendent* errand transcend; 1 pos. need needless (el) 
 
 13 needle (el) Indian indicate* indication intend; 3 pos. 
 
 14 sanr 1 .; (disjoined ted) dated destitute dreaded; 3 pos. 
 
 15 attitude. (791:451.) 
 
 PHRASES. 
 
 295. Have-believed in-the-country in-the-land my-good- 
 friend some-account they-did-not we-had-not be-made 
 do-not-understand have-understood I-am-informed I-un- 
 derstood my-own-understanding should-understand this- 
 understanding under-which under-this which-is-understood 
 under-the-present-circumstances absolutely-indispensable 
 do-not-have-time world-(of)-fashion world-(of)-spirits. 
 
 EXERCISE 29. 
 
 296. 1. Adversity is-the trial of-principle. 2. Whhout- 
 it a-man hardly knows whether he-is-honest or-not. 8. Act 
 well at-the moment and-you-have performed a-good action 
 to all-eternity. 4. For-my-own part I-had-rather be old 
 only a-short-time than-be old before I really am so. 5. A- 
 merry heart doeth good like-a medicine, but-a broken spirit 
 drieth the-bones. 6. Heaven's eternal wisdom has decreed
 
 BEPOBTINO STYLE OP SHORT-RAND. 
 
 161 
 
 that man of man should ever stand in-need. 7. Hatred is 
 always honest, rarely, if -ever, assumed. 8. So-much can- 
 not-be-said for-love. 9. O, how-much more doth beauty 
 beauteous seem by-that sweet ornament which-truth doth 
 give. 10. There's-a divinity that shapes our ends, rough 
 hew them how we- will. 11. Genius makes-its observations 
 in short-hand; talent writes-them out at-length. 
 
 (1411:301.) 
 
 297. SPEED SENTENCE. The-great man is-he who in-the- 
 midst of-the crowd keeps with perfect sweetness the-inde- 
 pendence of solitude. (5 1.) 
 
 298. 
 
 TRANSLATE. 
 
 O V ( x
 
 LESSON XXX. 
 
 INTEKVOCALIZATION. 
 
 299. KEY. 1. Cheer Abigail Margrave gill fill Palgrave 
 chart chill. 2. Cork gold ruliug tolerable purchase 
 arraful sport accord. 8. Child signature require foil 
 fowl lecture qualify picture. 4. Core gall shoal epicure 
 prevail jealous school corporal. 6. Persevere correspon- 
 dent preliminary fur gal carve nurse encore. 6. En- 
 gineer pilgrim utility volume balcony partial Delaware 
 guilt. 7. Miracle skill delicate derange falter Virginia 
 secure security. 8. Legislature derogatory mortal ordin- 
 ary voluntary moral insurance Baltimore. 9 to 13 inclu- 
 sive. For key see list words, sec. 303. 
 
 SENTENCES. 1. In a-better world we- will-find our young 
 years and-our old friends. 2. The child is lather of-the 
 man. 8. Admiration is-the daughter of ignorance. 
 
 800. Any letter of the double or triple consonant series 
 may be intervocalized, by which is meant the vowel may be 
 placed in such a manner as to be read between the two con- 
 sonants. E. g., c & r with the dash vowel I o struck 
 through it, is read <~H- core. Here the vowel is read after k 
 and before r. Second and third place vowels are struck 
 through the stem, but first-place dashes are written just before, 
 as in gall, L 4. When a dot vowel is to be written, a small 
 circle is used instead, and placed before the stem if long, as in 
 cheer, Abigail, Margrave; and after it if short, as in gill, L 1. 
 
 301. This principle is not of frequent application; it is, 
 however, essential thoroughly to learn the signs here ex- 
 plained. One advantage secured by the principle of inter- 
 vocalization is the use of briefer outlines than would other- 
 wise be admissible. Since it is the rule not to form any 
 outline too brief for vocalization, the sounds expressed by 
 the double consonant stems, pr, tr, pi, tl, etc., would have 
 to be written with the long ~^\ r or f~ I in many cases where 
 the hooks may now be used instead. In moral (L 8), for ex- 
 ample, the outline mr-l is proper, since it will admit of vocal- 
 
 168
 
 i 7 
 
 X 
 
 7 o 
 
 WOBD-rOHMS. 
 
 9 
 
 10 J. 
 
 SENTENCES. 
 
 30* 
 
 - <. V s / c 
 
 <x lc ~ 
 
 V 
 
 
 f 
 
 <\ i 
 
 V 
 
 <? 
 
 \ \ /^^v Q ? 
 
 * V > M / 
 
 I / 
 
 
 \ 
 
 .TV... r 
 
 <^ 
 
 \.
 
 154 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAyD. 
 
 izalion; otherwise the r-hook could not be employed. 
 
 302. The double-length curves may be intervocalized by 
 
 striking the vowel-sign through the stem, as in^v^ -^ entire. 
 
 803. 1 Intervocalize: Cur cull gull fort board port 
 
 2 chart dirt purse spur terse course college impulse 
 
 8 infer infirm invalid curb North* morality shirk pursue 
 
 4 corner ridicule darling sharp thirst till term agricul- 
 
 6 ture* capture cargo culture decorum calico distil 
 
 6 parlor* porter portray purple turkey valid George. 
 
 7 Without vowels: elaborate* enormity demoralize* jour- 
 
 8 ney nerve nervous nourish perceive perjure person 
 
 9 endorse pursued recall regulate* telegram* Thursday 
 
 10 vulgar corporate incorporate director divulge farthing 
 
 11 marble marshal* nursery nurture obscure parcel 
 
 12 shark singular* torpedo valedictory vinegar volcano 
 
 13 Charles; (sez) persist paralysis parenthesis; (f-hook) 
 
 14 gulf turf telegraph imperative narrative; (n-hook) bur- 
 
 15 den margin pardon pertain diligence jurisprudence 
 
 16 terminate German bargain cosmopolitan galvanic 
 
 17 Mormon northeastern* Morgan; (shun-hook) perception 
 
 18 circulation* partition jurisdiction corruption regula- 
 
 19 tion*; (rel-hook) journal* normal personal* phrenology; 
 
 20 (halving) carpenter garment departure (ar) invert 
 
 21 market merchant merchandise mercantile (el) particle 
 
 22 partner regard record transport Vermont Pittsburg 
 
 23 deliberate* correspond* correspondence default forbid 
 
 24 parliament persecute portrait purport recorder scarlet 
 
 25 told velvet Arnold. (1392:451:30.) 
 
 PHEA8ES. 
 
 304. In-course-of it-is-calculated political-agitation po- 
 litical-power so-sure that-is-where towards-it towards-such 
 towards-another towards-that towards-the towards-this 
 very-short very-sure which-surely as-it-certainly as-little- 
 as-possible between-the between -which by-which-it-seems 
 by-which-it-\vas East-Indies for-the-present very-certain 
 future-time if-it-be if-it-does if-it-is-not if-it-is-possible if-
 
 EEPOETINO STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 155 
 
 it-were in-fact it-is-better-than it-is-no-doubt seems-to-me 
 more-certain must-not no-better-than not-absolutely not- 
 generally ought-to-be. 
 
 EXERCISE 30. 
 
 305. 1. Action is eloquence, and- the eyes of-the ignorant 
 more learned than their ears. 2. It-is often better to-have 
 a-great-deal of harm happen to-one than-a-little; a-great-deal 
 may arouse you to remove what-a-little will only accustom - 
 you to endure. 3. There-is-nothing that-makes-its-way 
 more-directly to-the soul than beauty. 4. We-make way 
 for-the-man who boldly pushes past us. 5. Your-little child 
 is-your only true democrat. 6. Childhood shows the-man 
 as-the morning shows the-day. 7. Defeat is-a school in- 
 which truth always grows strong. (101 1:10 :45.) 
 
 306. SPEED SENTENCE. Rich-men without wisdom and 
 learning are called sheep with golden fleeces. (9 1.) 
 
 307. i BUSINESS LETTERS. 
 
 (To be phrased by the student.) 
 
 CINCINNATI, March 18, 1886. 
 MESSRS. W. FROTHINGHAM & Co., Louisville, Ky. 
 Dear Sirs: We shall offer to-morrow, March 19, at 4i 
 net, by case only, our entire stock of Dunnell fancy prints, 
 embracing all the seersuckers, satines, and special styles. 
 We shall be pleased to have your house represented. 
 Very truly yours, 
 
 DONALDSON, BOGARDTJS & Co. 
 
 308. NEWARK, N. J., June 22, 1886. 
 
 E. D. GlLDERSLEEVE, ESQ. 
 
 Dear Sir: Orders received and shall have prompt atten- 
 tion. We did not expect to stop at all, but owing to removal 
 will have to suspend about one week after July 4th. Any 
 orders up to that time we can fill as usual. Owing to in- 
 creased trade, and not having room enough, we have built a 
 factory which we will occupy about July 10th. 
 Yours very truly, 
 
 MCNEIL, ANDERSON & Co.
 
 156 
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 \ 
 
 THE ' ' FIVE RULES " OF THE AMERICAN SPELLING REFORM 
 ASSOCIATION: 1. Use f for ph sounded as f, as in alfabet, 
 fantom, filosofy, telegrqf, etc. 2. Use t for d or ed final 
 sounded as t, as in stop, puft, lockt, crost, pusht, pilcht, fixt, 
 etc. 8. Drop a from digraf ea sounded as short e, as in 
 breth, hed, helth, sted, etc. 4. Drop silent e final in a short 
 syllabi, as in hav, giv, liv, forbad, hoslil, infinit, activ, etc. 
 5. When a word ends with a dubl letter, omit the last, as in 
 eb, ad, stqf, eg, shal, toil, tel, etc. 
 
 THE "TEN WORDS: 
 hav, giv, liv, gard, ar. 
 
 Tho, thru, wisht, catalog, definit,
 
 LESSON 
 
 PREFIXES. 
 
 310. The commonest prefixes and affixes are provided 
 with brief signs, the greater number of which are joined to 
 the main outline. 
 
 List of prefixes: Con com cog counter contra contri con- 
 tro circum self inter intro anti magna magni super mat 
 post. 
 
 Con, com and cog are indicated by a dot, as in compress, 
 conduce, cognition. LI. In most cases, however, this dot is 
 entirely omitted with no loss of legibility. In such cases the 
 safest practice is to refrain from ^hrasing with preceding 
 
 words. To illustrate, (^> they-complain should not be 
 
 phrased, whereas k they-plan should be. The fact that 
 
 complain is not joined to they is indicative of the prefix con, 
 and the dot sign need not be written. 
 
 Con, com, cog, when medial are expressed by separating 
 the preceding from the following portion of the word, as in 
 accommodation, accompany, etc., L 4. 
 
 Counter, contra-i-o, are indicated by a slant' ng tick, as in 
 countermarch, contradiction, contribution, L 1. 
 
 Circum, self, are denoted by the s-circle, as in self-con- 
 sciousness, circumvent, L 2. 
 
 Inter, intro, anti, ante, are denoted by the shortened n, 
 joined to the remaining part of the word, as in interview, in- 
 troduce, antiseptic, L 2. 
 
 Magni, magna, may be indicated by the disjoined m, as in 
 magnify, L 2. 
 
 Mai, post, super, are commonly expressed by the characters, 
 
 C^ nil, \3 ps, ^\ spr, as in malcontent, postman, supervene, 
 
 L2. 
 
 Prefix-signs should always be written previously to forming 
 the remaining portion of the word. Speed is interfered with 
 
 157
 
 1 58 R EPOR 77.VC STYLE OF SHOR T II A XD. 
 
 when the reporter must go back and place these marks after 
 the body of the word has been written. 
 
 311. KEY. 1. Compress conduce cognition accommo- 
 date recommend countermarch contradiction contribution. 
 
 2. Interview introduce antiseptic self-consciousness cir- 
 cumvent magnify mal-content postman supervene. 
 
 3. Commit commodity contemporary conquest communi- 
 ty commentary confess compensate. 4. Accommodation 
 accompany reconstruct recognition excommunicate in- 
 comprehensible conjunction inconsistent. 5. Counter- 
 balance counterpart interpose interrogation internal in- 
 terrupt antiquary discontent interest. 6. Commission 
 compensation contempt command confidence composition 
 constitute commencement conductor. 7 to 10 inclusive. 
 For key see list words, sec. 312. 
 
 WORD-SIGNS. 11. Circumstantial malpractice construc- 
 tion constructive incompetent consequence consequent 
 consequential. 12. Unconcern comprehend comprehensive 
 antiquity antiquarian consider consideration reconsider 
 confidential. 
 
 PHRASES. 13. For-a-consideration I-am-content in-his- 
 opinion in-his-own-interest it-is-interesting under-any-cir- 
 cumstances every-circumstance that-conclusion. 
 
 SENTENCES. 1. Active natures are rarely melancholy. 
 2. Our actions are our-own, their consequences belong to 
 Heaven. 3. Love is incompatible with fear. 
 
 312. In the following list, the prefixes, printed in italics, 
 are to be represented by the signs just explained. The sylla- 
 bles enclosed in brackets may also be written, but as these 
 are common words, the prefix signs are usually omitted 
 altogether. 
 
 1 Cow-pass cow-pose (con)vict (con)tinual (el) (con)- 
 
 2 temporary (emp) tnter-pose con-sole twter-fere* circum- 
 8 navigate con-ceit cora-ciliate cow-demn de-com-pose dis- 
 
 4 oom-pose dis(con)tinue inter-na\* re-cog-nize re-fiw-cile 
 
 5 self-nsh* un(con)scious anli'-thesis comm-ittee cow-pile
 
 Plate 31* 
 
 \> 
 
 J 
 
 6 \ ^ ~\ ' 
 
 6 ^~3 V U 
 
 WORD-FORJIS. 
 
 7 X 
 
 10 
 
 w 
 
 11 
 
 
 is 
 
 } 
 
 \ f 
 
 L/ 
 k 
 
 j 
 
 13 
 
 v-A-^oP 
 
 SENTENCES. 
 
 i
 
 160 REPORTING STYLE 0V SHORT-HAND. 
 
 6 con-cede mis-cow-ceive (eom)pare cownter-check post- 
 
 7 paid con-spire (con)veyance con-voke (com)panson 
 
 8 con-ceive (con) form (con)scientious* (con)scious (con)- 
 
 9 sist; 1 pos. con-sign con-ceal counter-sign; 3 pos. con- 
 
 10 duce (con)sume tracer-view; (1-hook) con-stable in-com- 
 
 11 parable in-con-ceivable (accom)plish* (com)pel (con)- 
 
 12 flict* tnter-val; (r-hook) con-cur con-fer etrcwrn-ference 
 
 13 in-cow-prehensible pre-con-ceive self-control (con) firm 
 
 14 (con)gress (con)trary (con)verse enter-prise*; 3 pos. 
 
 15 (con)strue mis con-strue; (f-hook) (con)servative (cun)- 
 
 16 trive (con)trivance; (n-hook) (con)tain (con)tains con- 
 
 17 fine cottnter-balance* conra-vene in(con)venience re- 
 
 18 eom-pense (com)panion . (com)plain (con)cern* (con)- 
 
 19 science (con)stancy (con)strain (con)venience* (con)vince 
 
 20 enter-tain inter- vene; 1 pos. counter-mine; (shun-hook) 
 
 21 (com)mission (com)petition (con)fession counter-action 
 
 22 re-comm-endation* anii-cipation (com)plexion (con)ces- 
 
 23 sion (con)clusion (con)demnation (con)solklation (con)- 
 
 24 viction (con)templation (emp) tnter-pretation (com)bina- 
 
 25 tion (con)dition (con)ception conirt-bution eon-version 
 
 26 inter-jection (con)gregation ; 1 pos. (com)pletion; 3 pos. 
 
 27 con-fusion (com)passion; (s-shun-hook) (com)position; 
 
 28 (st-loop) con-test con-trast corn-posed con-gestion* con- 
 
 29 text (con)stitution*; (halving) ctrc?/m-spect corn-bat 
 80 (con)template (emp) (com)ment (eon)duct (con)sent 
 
 31 con-cert (con)descend (con)sult tnter-dict dis(con)nect* 
 
 32 com-patible tncom-plete* tnter-sect mis(con)duct 
 
 33 recornni-end* self-esteem* anft-cipate a<t-dote (con)- 
 
 84 duct non-con-ductor* (com)parative* (coni)plioate (com)- 
 
 85 pliment (con)sonant* (con)struct* (con)tact (con)tribute 
 
 86 con<ra-dict; 1 pos. cownter-feit co?n-plete (con)venient 
 
 87 interr-ogation*; 3 pos. (con)clude (comm)unicate; 
 
 38 (r-hook) (com)fort con-vert (con)gratulate* (con)gratu- 
 
 39 lation t?iter-pret; (n-hook) corn-pound (con)tingent 
 
 40 (dis)con-tent (con)tent (con)straint (com)plained (con)- 
 
 41 fident (con)sistent* (con)stant (con)stantlj-* co-tend. 
 
 (16731:30.)
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 161 
 
 PHRASES. 
 
 813. Every-consideration great-interest ^-am-considered 
 in-circumstances in-his-interest into-consideration some- 
 consideration take-into-consideration that-circumstance 
 this-circumstance this-conclusion. 
 EXERCISE 31. 
 
 314. 1. No man should-be so taken-up in-the search of- 
 truth as thereby to neglect the-more necessary duties of 
 active-life ; for after-all is-done it-is action only which-gives 
 a-true value and-commendationto-virtue. 2. No-one knows 
 what he-is doing while he-is acting rightly, but of what-is 
 wrong we-are always conscious. 8. Prosperity is too apt 
 to-prevent us from examining our conduct, but-as adversity 
 leads us to-think properly of-our state, it-is-most beneficial 
 to us. 4. Our dependence upon God ought-to-be so entire 
 and-absolote that-we should-never think-it necessary in-any- 
 kind of distress to-have recourse to-human consolations. 
 5. He who-would pass the-declining years of-his-life with 
 peace and-comfort should when young consider that-he-may 
 one-day be old, and-remember when-he-is old that-he-has 
 once beeii young. 6. The integrity of-men is-to-be meas- 
 ured by- their conduct, not by-their profession. 7. He who- 
 has lost confidence can lose nothing more. 8. Confidence 
 in-conversation has-a greater share than wit. 9. The con- 
 science is more wise than science. 10. He-is richest who-is 
 content with-the least, for content is-the wealth of nature. 
 
 11. Reasonable men are-the-best dictionaries of-conversation. 
 
 12. Silence is one great art of-conversation. 13. Fear God 
 ami-keep his commandments, for-this-is the whole duty of 
 man. 14. Gain may-be temporary and-uncertain; but ever 
 while you-live expense is constant and-certain; and-it-is 
 easier to build two chimneys than to keep one in fuel. 15. If- 
 a-good face is-a letter of recommendation, a-good heart is-a 
 letter of-credit. 16. The-worth of-a state in-the-long run 
 is-the-worth of-the individuals composing it. 17. Liberality 
 consists less in giving much than-in giving with-discretion.
 
 162 
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAXD. 
 
 18. The-human-race is-in-the-best condition wben-it-has-the 
 greatest degree of-liberty. 19. While we-are reasoning con- 
 cerning life, life is gone. 20. Prudence and-love are incon- 
 sistent; in proportion as-the last increases the-other decreases. 
 21. The-mo0t manifest sign of wisdom is continued cheer- 
 fulness. (3644:308.) 
 
 815. SPEED SENTENCE. He-is happy whose circumstances 
 suit his temper; but he-is more-excellent who-can suit his 
 temper to any-circumstances. (5 1.) 
 
 TRANSLATE. 
 
 PHRASING. It sometimes transpires in reporting that a 
 phrase, which extends below the line, will be intersected by 
 another phrase in the line beneath. Of this, however, there 
 are no bad consequences.
 
 LESSON XXXII. 
 AFFIXES. 
 
 317. List of affixes: Ing ings ship ble bly ility ality 
 arity self selves ful hood soever ture ly. 
 
 The dot, circle and tick, are used to denote ing, ings and 
 ing-the respectively, in'cases where the letter >-^ ng cannot 
 conveniently be joined, as in preserving, castings, doing-the, 
 L 1. 
 
 The s and sez circles denote self and selves, as in himself, 
 ourselves. 
 
 Ship is expressed by sh, as in friendship. But in order to 
 avoid unsuitable outlines, sh is sometimes disjoined, as in 
 lordship, courtship. 
 
 The endings, ility, ality, arity, are signified by the detach- 
 ment of any letter from the preceding part of the word, as 
 in barbarity, fidelity, instrumentality, L 2. 
 
 The terminations, ble, bly, ful, are often indicated 
 by b and./" simply, as in admissible, disgraceful, Ls 3 and 4. 
 
 Mnt, when written separately from the preceding part of 
 the word, indicates mental, as well as mentality, as in instru- 
 mental, L 2. 
 
 Hood is denoted by d, usually joined, as in womanhood. 
 
 The ending, soever, is written sv, as in whensoever, L 4. 
 
 Ture is expressed by tr, as in structure, L 1. 
 
 When rendered desirable by convenience or angularity, 
 final I is disjoined to express ly, as in vastly, beastly, L 3. 
 
 The prefix and affix signs cannot of course be employed 
 when the syllables they represent are independent words, as 
 ship, con, self, counter, etc. 
 
 318. 1 Write: Debil-ity vit-ality stab-ility* instrument- 
 
 2 (ility legib-tVtty reliab-tVtYy famili-artYy c&st-ing observ- 
 
 3 in-j huxt-ings disgrace-/ui sensi-6e advisa-6/e your-se{/* 
 
 4 it-self priest-food who-soever* host-ility; 1 pos. my-self* 
 
 5 thy-self divisi-ble; 8 pos. our-selves* admissi-We town- 
 
 6 ship; (halving) hospit-ality individu-/tYy* hard-sAtp 
 
 7 lord-ship court-ship partner-sAtp accounta-ftfe admitt-tngr 
 
 163
 
 Ift4 RBPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 8 bleed-tngr trea.t-ing putt-ing plead-tnys debat-tngr dread- 
 
 9 ing fundamental* orn&-mental* supple-mental regi- 
 
 10 mental detri-mental ele-mental horseman-ship scholar- 
 
 11 ship workman-stop fellow-stop where-soeuer* which- 
 
 12 soever whom-soever. (49 1 :SO.) 
 
 319. KEY. 1. Preserving castings doing-the himself 
 ourselves accountable lordship friendship graceful struc- 
 ture. 2. Fidelity individuality barbarity credulity hos- 
 pitality formality instrumental legibility. 8. Vastly 
 beastly regularity illegibility intellectuality womanhood 
 disgraceful township courtship. 4. Whensoever ostensi- 
 ble citizenship engravings fixture manhood childhood 
 admissible yourselves. 
 
 PHRASES. 5. Political-principles short-space-of-time as- 
 little-as by-which-it-may-be by-which-it-would-be for-some- 
 time if -it-is it-is-absolutely-necessary. 6. Let-us-be most- 
 natural must-not-be present-question such-is-not-the-case 
 this-is-not-the-case thought-we-were to-state. 
 
 SENTENCES. 1. No sensible-person ever made-an apology. 
 
 2. To-love-one that-is great is almost to-be great one's-self . 
 
 3. No man was ever so-much deceived by another *s by 
 himself. 4. Self-trust is-the essence of heroism. 
 
 PHKASES. 
 
 320. Take-some-time that-does-not that-thought there- 
 certainly there-is-absolutely there-is-no-doubt there-might 
 they-are-certain-that they-are-sometimes they-thought this- 
 has-not this-is-intended this-is-no-doubt this-is-not this-no- 
 doubt thought-this to-certain to-prevent to-which-it-can 
 to-which-it-is to-which-it-may very-certain was-no-doubt 
 we-thought what-might which-is-no-doubt which-must-not 
 who-had-not without-doubt without-his-knowledge without- 
 it without-such without-thai without-their without-them 
 without-this. 
 
 EXERCISE 32. 
 821. 1. The- more a-man denies himself the-more he-shall
 
 Pau 32. 
 
 i V'-=. i -T, 72, ^ 
 . ^| ^\/\ "I 
 
 3 V V ^' ^ <H 7 
 
 Vr u 
 J 
 6 
 , 
 
 x b-^\ 
 
 <C 
 
 8KNTKNCE8. 
 
 L 
 
 V. 
 
 v 
 
 C_9 X 
 \ 
 
 TRAN8LATR. 
 
 /" C 
 
 C V 
 
 - 6 
 
 I r X 
 
 
 \ 
 
 X V^ 
 
 1 
 
 T!. /x^^rz: 
 i , ~* ' / ( 
 
 H 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ x 
 
 ON 
 
 J 
 
 / 
 
 6 , * 
 
 
 r
 
 166 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORTHAND. 
 
 obtain from-God. 2. He that-has-never known adversity is 
 but half acquainted with others or-with himself. 3. Beauty, 
 like truth and-justice, lives within us; like virtue and -like 
 moral law, it-is-a companion of-the soul. 4. Man believes 
 himself always greater-than he-is, and-is esteemed less-t ha n 
 he-is worth. 5. Without content we-shall find it almost as 
 difficult to-please others as ourselves. 6. Dignity consists 
 not in-possessing honors, but in-deserving them. 7. Econ- 
 omy is of-itself a-great revenue. 8. The-best and-highest 
 part of-a man's education is-that-which he-gives himself. 
 tt. The-more you speak of-yourself the-more you-are likely 
 to-lie. 10. All-men would-be master of-others, but no man 
 is lord of-himself. 11. No man is happy who does-not- 
 think himself so. 12. Think wrongly if-you please, but 
 in-all-cases think for-yourself. 13. Do-not speak of-your 
 happiness to-a-man less fortunate than yourself. 
 
 (17221:30.) 
 
 322. SPEED SENTENCE. Every-person has two educations, 
 one-of-which he-receives from-others, and-one more-impor- 
 tant whi^h he-gives himself. (5 1.) 
 
 QUESTIONS FOR REVIEW. 
 
 Name the initial hooks. Name the final hooks. Give a 
 word in which the f-hook should be used ; the shun-hook; 
 the w-hook ; the r-hook ; the n-hook ; the 1-hook. In what 
 cases is the s-circle written within the hook, and when is 
 the hook changed to a circle to indicate that s is to be added ? 
 What is a triple consonant? Give three words containing 
 one of these. Give three words in which the st-loop is used ; 
 the str-loop." Three words in which the lengthened curve is 
 used to express the added tr ; dr ; thr. What is the halving 
 principle? What does it express? In what manner is this 
 applied to /, r, m and nf Which is pronounced first, the 
 added t, or a hook which is attached to a shortened stein? 
 When intervocalizing a word, how is a dash-vowel written? 
 a dot-vowel* Give three words containing prefixes; 
 three containing affixes.
 
 LESSON 
 
 VARIABLE LETTERS. 
 
 324. L, R, and Sh are called variable letters, because they 
 are struck both upward and downward. The choice is in the 
 main governed by a few simple rules. The up-strokes are 
 known as lay, ray, and shay; the down-strokes, el, ar, and ish. 
 The first two of the upward (lay and ray), and the third of 
 the downward strokes (ish), are employed so much more 
 commonly than the others, that the learner's best plan is 
 simply to commit to mind the exceptional cases in which these 
 remaining three (el, ar, and shay) are used. Right at the 
 outset it should be observed that the selection of any one of 
 these letters, instead of its mate, is in order, first, to secure 
 angularity; second, to indicate the location of certain vowels, 
 thus increasing legibility; third, to give greater ease of exe- 
 cution. It is not deemed expedient to point out the various 
 rules, with the numerous exceptions thereto, by which each 
 individual outline is governed. By such the student would 
 be not so much aided as bewildered. 
 
 325. It is a principle of short-hand to write syllables, 
 rather than words or letters. This in a large measure deter- 
 mines the choice of r and I. When these occur in the middle 
 of a syllable, they are usually expressed by hooks, as in 
 
 com-pJi-cation, ^ L re-tri-bution; if, at the begin- 
 
 o 
 ning of a syllable, the up-strokes ray and lay are commonly 
 
 used, as in \/ pro-rogue, ^_J\f~ un-tove-ly; if, at the 
 end of a syllable, the down-strokes ar and el, as in 
 
 T 
 
 , ^y in-e/-igible. 
 
 dis-arr-ange 
 
 Note will be taken that in the names of these letters, lay, 
 ray, el, ar, the consonant begins or ends the word in con- 
 formity with this rule. 
 
 -167
 
 168 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 826. 1. KEY. Ledge Lehigh repeal rage Rome alkali 
 alike elect early ark. 2. Alight elbow arch arrive 
 cherry faro chair fair pompadour. 3. Curl scroll score 
 declare choir mire cohere roar. 4. Rowley scaly folly 
 Conley kingly wrongly bile assail. 5. Fill veal rill cool 
 scowl Ariosto Mozart closer miser. 6. Spinner joiner 
 Stanley blandly spindle meaner chaffer jovial. 7. Re- 
 cover, engraver gruffly scorn turn burn bereave observe. 
 
 8. National Congregational rational tush dish fish fishy. 
 
 9. Mulish shell-fish finish vanish shaker sugar babyish. 
 PHRASES. 10. You-are are-you are-they are-many are- 
 such as-many-as-are this-will this-will-not. 11. Will-there 
 as-many-as-will I-shall-have you-shall-have shall-there-be 
 there-shall-be shall-greatly it-shall-never. 
 
 12. Lucy Elsie lack alack long along ledgy elegy. 
 13. Lame alum logical illogical lament element artis- 
 tically artistical. 14. Race erase rest arrest auditory 
 auditor resolute irresolute. 15. Sorrows source rock 
 arc tarry tear chary chore. 
 
 RULES. 
 
 327. i. When I or r begins a word, strike it upward, as in 
 ledge, Lehigh, repeal, rage. 
 
 Exception. To secure angularity, use ar if it is followed 
 by^ > m, as in Rome. L 1. 
 
 2. When either of these letters is preceded by an initial 
 vowel, use the downward stroke, as in alkali, alike, elect, 
 early, ark. L 1. 
 
 Exception. When either is immediately followed by a 
 downward letter, use lay or ray, even though it is preceded 
 by an initial vowel, as in alight, elbow, arch, arrive. L 2 
 
 3. When r is the last consonant, but followed by a vowel, 
 use ray, as in cherry, faro. When r is the last consonant, 
 and not followed by a vowel, use ar, as in chair, fair. L 2. 
 
 Exceptions, (a) Final r, however, should be struck up- 
 ward, even though not followed by a vowel, in cases where
 
 Slate 33. 
 
 vr 
 
 6
 
 170 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 the use of ar would carry the word two spaces below the line, 
 as in pompadour. 
 
 (b) At the end of words always use lay after c kr and 
 a skr, as in curl, scroll. 
 
 (c) At the end of words use ar after Q sk, c kl, ski, 
 
 and c kw, as in score, declare, choir. 
 
 (d) Ray is always used after ^-^ m, S hay and / ray, 
 as in mire, cohere, roar, L 8. 
 
 4. When I is the last consonant and followed by a vowel, 
 lay should be used, as in Rowley, scaly, folly. 
 
 Exception. After ^_^ n and > - ng always use el, whether 
 followed by a vowel or not, as in Conley, kingly, wrongly, L 4. 
 
 5. Final I is, indeed, most commonly struck upward, even 
 though not followed by a vowel, as in bile, assail; but when not 
 followed by a final vowel, is always struck downward after 
 ^_ /, ^ v, / ray, k, and Q sk, as it. fill, veal, nil, 
 cool, scowl, L 5. 
 
 HOOK AND CIBCLB MODIFICATIONS. 
 
 828. These rules are affected to some extent by the inter- 
 vention of the s-circle and final hooks between / and r and 
 the stems which immediately precede them. 
 
 1. The occurrence of a circle between two letters does 
 away the need of an angle otherwise necessary. For exam- 
 ple, ars may safely be written before t, as in Ariosto, though 
 t cannot follow ar standing alone. In Mozart and miser, the 
 occurrence of the circle renders it practicable to use ar, 
 which is desirable in these cases. Instead of using ar after 
 c kl, the intervention of o'tss makes it desirable to write 
 ray, as in closer. Hence the occurrence of the s-circle in such 
 connection does away the necessity of keeping angularity in 
 view when choosing between upward and downward I and r. 
 L6. 
 
 2. The occurrence of a final hook (n,f, or shn) in connec- 
 tion with the stem which precedes I or r, has much to do
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 171 
 
 with determining the direction, upward or downward, of 
 these letters. In most such cases it is convenient to strike 
 them in one direction only, as will be apparent to the writer. 
 For example, the n-hook occurring after \ p, \ t, / ch 
 and their cognates, must necessarily be followed by ar or el, 
 as in spinner, joiner, Stanley, blandly, L 6. After ^~^> ran, 
 also, ar should be used, as in meaner. After </ chf, ^ jf, 
 ar or el, as in chaffer, jovial. After 3 kf, ^gf, /? hf, and 
 / rf, always use lay or ray, as in recover, engraver, gruffly, 
 L7. 
 
 3. When r is the last stem, *^d followed by an n-hook, 
 ray should have the preference, as in scorn, turn, burn, L 7. 
 
 4. When r is followed by final /or v, the upward stroke 
 should invariably be employed, in order that the hook may 
 be used, as in bereave, observe, L 7. 
 
 5. The shn, similarly to the n and f hooks, in some cases 
 determines the choice of I or r, as in national, Congregational, 
 rational, L 8. Here the final stems would be struck in a 
 direction just opposite were it not for the fact of the shn- 
 hook. L 8. 
 
 329. ISH AND SHAY. 
 
 (a) After | t and j d write shay, as in tush, dish. There 
 are but few exceptions to this rule which angularity renders 
 necessary. 
 
 (6) Write shay after V^_ f, as in fish, unless it is followed 
 by a vowel, when ish should be used, as in fishy, L 8. 
 
 (c) Use shay both before and after lay, as in mulish, shell- 
 fish, L 9. 
 
 (d) Use shay after V> fncT\ vn, as in finish, vanish. 
 
 (e) Use shay always before c kr or <r gr, as in shaker, 
 sugar, L 9. 
 
 (J) Also use shay when necessary to prevent word-forms 
 from extending too far below the line, as in babyish, L 9.
 
 178 EXPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 PHRASING. 
 
 330. The rules here given as to upward and downward 
 strokes govern also in phrasing. Angularity and ease of 
 execution are the two important points to be kept in view. 
 The phrases given in Ls 10 and 11 will illustrate sufficiently. 
 
 PHRASES. 
 
 331. By-which-it-can by-which-it-is present-interest very- 
 little there-are-certainly there-certainly too-little please- 
 acknowledge-receipt heavenly-Father I-am-in -favor in- 
 answer to-yours owners-risk there-sometimes that-is-thought 
 adjust-the-matter give-the-matter in-answer-to to-your- 
 credit fill-your-order we-have-placed we-shall-be-pleased 
 call-your attention you-will-please at-some-other-time by- 
 reason-of can-be-raised did-you-make does-not-take-place 
 do-you-remember for-that-reason for-their-services great- 
 number how-is-it I-am-inclined I-am-informed I-am-going. 
 
 332. EXERCISE 33. 
 
 NEW YORK, March 16, 1886. 
 MESSRS. ROUSSEL & HICKS, 71 Broadway, City. 
 Gentlemen: The S. S. "Enchantress" now in Baltimore, 
 reports ready for coal to-morrow, Saturday, 8 A. M. 
 
 My agent telegraphs me that Meredith cannot-give " En* 
 chantress " berth bef ore-Monday. Bad outlook for coal. 
 
 This-delay means demurrage for me to pay to-the steamer. 
 Please do-your utmost to-malce-the loss as light as possible. 
 Yours truly, etc. 
 
 (To be phrased by the student.) 
 
 PITTSBURGH, July 10, 1886. 
 
 MR. ROBERT SIMPSON, Box 2,725, New York City. 
 
 Dear Sir: In reply to your letter of the 17th inst. we have 
 wired you quoting angles at 3i ets. per lb.; bars, 2 cts., card 
 rates; all net, delivered at Columbus. If immediately re- 
 ceived, the order can be filled with promptness. The other 
 articles called for we do not make. The above price includes 
 cutting to length. 
 
 We have yours of the 17th inst., enclosing draft for $70,000. 
 This amount has bee a placed to your credit on account, with 
 thanks. Very truly yours, 
 
 (190-21:30.)
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHOPT-HAND. 173 | 
 
 J 
 
 333. TRANSLATE. 
 
 v i 
 
 -| t S ? l-i-Xl ' *~V"V 
 
 l_rr_^. p. / ^ SA- 
 
 LESSON XXXIV. 
 THEORY OF CONSONANT POSITION. 
 
 334. Much misapprehension in regard to the true use of 
 consonant position prevails amongst students, teachers and 
 reporters. The real importance of position is not over-esti- 
 mated, but the extent to which this contrivance should be 
 applied is misunderstood. The short-hand writer ought, of 
 course, to make use of position only so far as it is found 
 practical, necessary, and safe, and not, for the sake of a theory, 
 write a vast number of words in a difficult position when no 
 positive advantage is to be gained by it. Let it be distinctly 
 understood right at the outset that if the vowel in the ac- 
 cented syllable of a word happens to be a first or third place 
 vowel, the word is not simply on this account to be written in / 
 I
 
 174 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 the first or third position. Only a few words comparatively 
 are in fact written in the first and third positions, the very 
 great majority being placed in the second position, that is, on 
 the line. To illustrate the relative importance of the second 
 position, it may be compared to the main line of a railway, 
 the remaining positions being little more than mere side- 
 tracks. 
 
 335. The plan of placing words above, through or below 
 the line was devised as a means of indicating certain vowels, 
 in order to save the time otherwise necessary to write in the 
 dots and dashes. But it is only a small number of words, 
 however, that need vocalizing; and it is only a portion of this 
 small number that are capable of being vocalized in this way. 
 
 KEY. 
 
 336. SENTENCES. 1. Books, like our friends, should-be 
 few and well chosen. 2. Every great book is-aii action, 
 and-every great action is-a-book. 8. Judges and-senates 
 have-been bought for gold. 4. Genius finds its-own road 
 and-carries its-own lamp. 6. The-scenes of childhood are- 
 the memories of future years. Ls 5 to 9 inclusive to be 
 translated. 
 
 PHRASES. 10. Generation-after-generation in-the-nature- 
 of-things if-it-is-not for-it-is-not for-it-is-no in-fact east- 
 and-west east-to-west. 11. I-trust-not between-us ought- 
 not of-its of-itself at-the-same-time let-us let-us-try all- 
 states. 12. As-a-matter-of-fact ordinary-circumstances in- 
 his-circumstances it-is-certain-that in-comparison-\vith-that 
 let-us-consider I-am-convinced. 13. For-their-own-interest 
 in-conclusion I-am-concerned with-one-consent these-cir- 
 cumstances this-is-certain who-shall-not. 14. By-itself 
 advertisement Gulf-of-Mexico against-it registered-bonds 
 gold-bearing-bonds eye-sight. 15. Anywhere-else nowhere- 
 else in-the-country it-is-no-longer for-their-purpose abie- 
 to-make if-I-am-not. 
 
 837. In order to set forth in a concrete manner the appli- 
 cation of the principle of position, a list of characteristic
 
 Iplate 34. 
 
 BKNTKNCE8. 
 
 V 
 
 V 
 
 ' r -v 
 
 
 y >-S| 
 
 c -\ 
 
 TRANSLATE.
 
 J76 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORTHAND. 
 
 words will be taken up and the best means of expressing 
 them discussed. These words are: 
 
 Victim torch risk clash; big beg bag; dignity dig dog; 
 sell cell silly; sketch scotch leave love; cite set suit; do 
 day Dow; see saw say so sue us; fie boo gee thaw ice 
 shy soup sack coon; in any no know; men man human; 
 ever her home though thus much hope young; knock 
 mist mimic meek gnaw key; Michael Nichols Oilman; 
 presumably phraseology ingenuity lawlessness purification. 
 
 338. Beginning with the first four words, victim, torch, 
 risk, clash, it is plain that the unvocalized outlines are amply 
 legible. Nothing would be gained, and it is entirely unnec- 
 essary to write the first three words in the first position, or 
 the last one in the third position. These outlines cannot be 
 
 read any other way than - 1 victim, [/? torch, 
 
 >* risk, J clash. This is why vowels are unneces- 
 
 sary, and the very reason, too, why there is no need whatever 
 of placing them elsewhere than on the line. 
 
 839. Taking next the words, \ big, \ beg, 
 
 bag, it will be found that although all have the same 
 outline, there is no need of vowels, since no two are the same 
 part of speech, the first being an adjective, the second a 
 verb, and the third a noun. In such cases no ambiguity can 
 
 possibly arise; to illustrate, \__ = could not be read 
 
 beg gun, or bag gun,' ^-~~^^ \_ would not be read 
 money beg, etc. Hence, if vowels are unnecessary, observing 
 position, that is, writing big above, and bag through the line, 
 is equally useless. It takes time, and to that extent impedes 
 the writer; it is unnecessary, and hence bad practice. (The 
 words bug and buggy should be vocalized, to avoid a possible 
 
 conflict.) I Dignity, \ dig, \_ _ dog, have a uniform
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAXD. 177 
 
 outline, but these words differ so much in meaning that they 
 fall under the rule just stated. Under this rule also come 
 
 sell, 6 cell, C silly, /^ sketch, / scotch, etc. 
 340. The next three, touch, teach, attach, we find are all 
 
 verbs, and of the same kind (transitive). Hence, if I t-ch, 
 
 the outline common to all, were written in the second posi- 
 tion for each, and without vowels, serious conflict would 
 frequently arise. To avoid this teach (containing a. first-place 
 vowel) is written in the first position, and attach (containing 
 a third-place vowel) in the third position. The writer is de- 
 layed much less by the writing of a word in position, than 
 by putting in a vowel afterwards. Upon this fact depends 
 chiefly the value of the scheme of three positions. Under 
 
 . 
 this "tile come also the verbs, ....... leave (1 pos.) and 
 
 (\ love (2 pos.); .J*. cite (1 pos.), I set (2 pos.), fL***** 
 (3 pos). 
 
 341. In I do, I day, and l\ Dow, the last is vocalized for 
 the reason that the principle of position is not employed in 
 expressing proper names. The simple stem ) s is employed 
 in see, saw, say, so, use, us, the first two being written in 
 the first, and the last two in the third position. Say and so 
 are so frequent that it is found expedient to strike us through 
 the line, although the vowel is second place. 
 
 342. Position cannot safely be used to indicate vowels in 
 words that are short, or but little used; particularly those 
 
 IV 
 
 containing but a single consonant letter, such as V_ fie, 
 \x 600, /" gee, ( thaw, ) ice, J shy, \ soup, 
 
 o _ . sack, ^ coon. It is here necessary to express the vowels, 
 and to do so the dots and dashes must be written. 
 
 343. In the next group, ....in, ...... uny,v^/no, know,
 
 178 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 the second word, any, containing a second-place accented 
 vowel, is nevertheless written in the first position to avoid 
 conflict with no, a word of opposite meaning, but the same 
 part of speech. Here no, a more frequent word than any, is 
 given the easier position, namely, on Ihe line, where nearly 
 all words of frequent occurrence are written. 
 844. A further illustration of this principle may be found 
 ^~a 
 
 in men, ^ man, >-^' human, occupying respectively 
 
 the first, second, and third positions. In all such cases the 
 commonest word is placed on tlie line, the less frequent in the 
 first, and the least frequent in the third position. It is in ac- 
 cordance with this principle that ever and her (second-place 
 vowels), are assigned to the first position; and home, though, 
 thus, much, hope, young (also second-place vowels), are 
 assigned to the third position. 
 
 345. Outlines containing only horizontal or half-length 
 stems are almost invariably wi'itten above the line if the ac- 
 
 /""^^ 
 
 cented vowel is first-place, as in ^ knock, mist, 
 mimic. This rule applies although the vowels are 
 
 actually written, as in ." meek, '. gnaw, ."... key. 
 
 Proper names also come under this rule; for example, 
 
 Michael, Nichols, Oilman. This 
 
 practice is accounted for largely by the fact that it is a very 
 easy matter to write horizontal letters in the first position, 
 which requires the pen to be carried no higher than when 
 executing second-place upward or downward stems. Vocal- 
 ized words are then read much easier in cases where the 
 vowel signs are not written accurately in place, as, for ex- 
 ample, ..* would easily be read meek, for "make would 
 
 in no case be put above the line. 
 
 346. Lengthy word-forms, with scarcely any exceptions, 
 are written on the line, no matter what the accented vowel
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 179 
 
 be, as in * / phraseology, ~^ presumably, 
 
 *~^\ ingenuity. Legibility would not be increased in any 
 
 decree by writing such words in any other position. 
 
 347. Position is indicative of but one vowel only in any 
 particular word, and for this reason it need not be observed 
 except in writing monosyllables and dissyllables. A few long 
 derivatives are located off the line, in order to preserve the po- 
 
 sition of their primitive; illustration, lawlessness; 
 
 purification. 
 
 348. From these observations are deduced the following 
 rules: 
 
 1 . Words that are plainly legible in the second portion, without 
 vowels, are written uniformly on the line. Illustrative words: 
 Dislike dismiss picnic deceive legal Bible reveal blank 
 district design decide cloth batch clear vital desire deny 
 chatter deliver define distrust battle. 
 
 2. Several words, different parts of speech, but having the same 
 outline, are all written usually in the same position. Illustrative 
 words: Inch notch; several savior; deal daily; small 
 smell; field failed; bath both. 
 
 3. Words that are both short and of frequent occurrence may be 
 written out of the second position to indicate a first or third place 
 accented vowel. Illustrative words: These sight office offset 
 easily least abuse issue outside plan past. 
 
 4. Lengthy outlines and infrequent words are written in the 
 second posilion,and the vowels inserted when necessary. Illustra- 
 tive words: Vast star cast stitch plaster elegant slay 
 disband voice seige soil entice. 
 
 5. An exception is made in favor of horizontal word-forms, 
 which are placed in the first position whenever the accented vowel it 
 first-^' e, whether written or not. T 1u istrative words: Sick
 
 180 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAlfD. 
 
 nigh sneak seem honest mist cost midst mind syndicate 
 sink medium. 
 
 6. The principle of position is not applied in writing proper 
 names. Miles Clyde Hotter McCluru Root Hugel. 
 
 7. In a number of cases an outline, especially a word-sign, 
 whose principal vowel is second place, is written nevertheless in the 
 first or third position, to oroid conflict with a more frequent second- 
 position word having the same outline. E. g. Ago apply issue 
 own away awake July. 
 
 8. Position is used quite extensively jor the reason that the com- 
 paratively small number of words falling under the above rules are 
 all of very frequent occurrence, and it is essential always to give 
 them their proper place. E. g. The is I me of at about. 
 
 9. Half-length words, derived from full-length outlines, retain 
 the same consonant position as their primitives. E. g. * Com- 
 
 1 
 
 plained, ^ played, *\ remembered, numbei . ... tried. 
 
 10. Half-length outline* are written one full space above 
 the line if first-position, and entirely below the line ij third position. 
 
 E. g. Meet, "* did-not, doubt, found 
 
 PHRASES. 
 
 349. All-that-has-been-done does-not-come does-not-exist 
 has-not-yet-been have-been-taken has-not-only how-little 
 I-am-disposed in-the-course-of-my in-their-report in-this- 
 instance in-this-shape in-this-way into-the-country it-can- 
 not-be it-has-been-found it-has-not-only-been I-think-that- 
 it-is it-is-not-true it-may-be-true it-is-not-done it-may-be- 
 made it-may-be-maiutained shall-be-received it-should-be- 
 come-necesary. 
 
 EXERCISE 34. 
 
 850. NEW- YORK, June 26, 1886. 
 
 MESSRS. S. T. HORNE & Co., Pittsburgh, Pa. 
 
 Dear- Sirs: Your-favor of-the 24th inst. received and-con- 
 tents noted. The-box of residuum has come to hand. This- 
 is-certainly not-the-result of-the use of-our oil; but-is-no-
 
 REPORTIXQ STYL^ OF SHORT-HAXD. 
 
 181 
 
 doubt caused by-the impurities in-the-water you speak of, 
 which gradually collect in-the cylinder and-which-would-be- 
 present, no matter what grade of oil were used. We-shall- 
 turn it over at-once to-our chemist for close analysis, and- 
 will report to-you as-soon -as we ascertain the-result. Of- 
 one-thing you-may-be-sure, it-is-not-caused by-the oil. We 
 await reply to-our respects of-the 2*2nd inst. 
 
 (To be phrased by the student.) 
 
 Dear Sir: Inclosed please find invoice and B. L. of goods 
 shipped Mr. James 11. Canfield on the 8th inst. Also find 
 directions for applying, which please forward Mr. Canfield, 
 as we have not his P. O. address. Not being acquainted 
 with Mr. Canfield, or his commercial standing, we have 
 charged the shipment to you, in pursuance of instructions 
 given us by your representative. 
 
 (1962:301:30.) 
 
 351. 
 
 \ 
 
 TRANSLATE. 
 
 Y ^f 14/86. 
 
 .....I 
 
 \> 
 
 L 
 
 \
 
 LESSON XXXV. 
 VOCALIZATION. 
 
 852. KEY. 1. Being bayonet Daugherty poern dual 
 boa clayey laity stoic. 2. Powell Howell Rowell tower 
 bias Hyatt piety joyous. 3. Inaugural error glue-factory 
 fire-eater mill-owner > headache inane. 4. Cube tube 
 view mew dew Jew few lieu. 5. Idiot Sulliote carrion 
 sermon meteor tare chair ask task. 6. Goest fealty 
 , coagulate pean vowel towel dower variety. 7. Oyster 
 isle awning Ed., etc., (vowels to be written previously to 
 the stems). 
 
 SENTENCES. 1. Heaven lies about us in our infancy. 
 2. Conscience warns us as-a-friend before it punishes us :i-- 
 a-judge. 8. Hope is like a-bad clock, forever striking the- 
 hour of happiness whether it-has come or-not. 4. The-first- 
 and-last thing which is required oi genius is-the-love of-truth. 
 
 5. Christ saw-much in-the-world to weep over and-much to 
 pray over, but he-saw nothing in-it to-look on with contempt. 
 
 6. Advice is seldom welcome. 
 
 PHRASES. 14. In-their-own in-any-event in-such-a-vvay 
 a-just-answer as-a-matter-of-course capital-stock charge- 
 of-the-matter. 15. Charge-of-the-business condition-of- 
 affairs just-about-as-good-as first-class-rate just-taken 
 knowledge-of-the-matter second-hand. 
 
 353. Very few vowels are written. Whole pages of short- 
 hand notes are taken without one dot or dash appearing. 
 The vowels are there, nevertheless. The reader does not see 
 them, but observes the effect which these same vowels, acting 
 as invisible forces, have in giving shape to the consonant 
 outlines. These consonant outlines are so pliant, that within 
 certain limits they readily assume whatever form the vowel 
 element of the words would indicate-, just as a large piece of 
 bark would inform us of both the size and kind of the unseen 
 tree upon which it had grown. A knowledge of vowels is 
 important, because word-forms to a great extent depend 
 upon the number, order, and character of these elements. 
 
 354. The student's chief concern is to know when to write, 
 
 182-
 
 Slate 35.
 
 184 REPORTING STYLE OF 
 
 and when not to write, the vowel sounds. He can, however, 
 be supplied with no specific rule. He m>it exercise his own 
 judgment in applying this general rule, viz.: In reporting, 
 insert as many vowels as may be strictly necewary to render the 
 notes easily decipherable when the transcript it afterwards made. 
 More vowels than these are superfluous, and ought not to be 
 written. Just what, however, is meant by " easily decipher- 
 able?" Some persons require the notes to be pretty fully 
 vocalized, or they find themselves at sea when the report is 
 to be rewritten. There are some few writers who dispense 
 with vowels almost entirely. They form their characters 
 well, choose accurate outlines, and bring to bear au excep- 
 tional judgment and memory in writing out their reports 
 afterwards. Those who use vowels to quite an extent learn 
 to depend on them, and the practice becomes necessary 
 mainly through force of habit. 
 
 355. There are a few general principles, however, which 
 should govern all writers. To illustrate, we will, for con- 
 venience, divide all words into three classes: 
 
 1st class. This comprises those words whose consonant 
 outlines are fortunately so full and characteristic, as to ren- 
 der the word plainly legible without the aid of a vowel. 
 
 The following words will illustrate: \ Traffic, \^~s Driv- 
 en, 4 charter, V*^ sermon, J desk. Ordinarily, to write 
 
 a single vowel here would be bad practice. The consonants 
 tell plainly what the words are. When this is the case vowel 
 signs are only in the way. To be more specific, let us exam- 
 ine a few of the principal means by which vowels are indi- 
 cated, by the manner of combining consonants. First, itwould 
 be utterly needless to write a final vowel in ^- -- money, 
 
 /) racy, ) mazy, ^^ coffee, c\^ heavy, for the 
 long n, 3, z, f, and v, clearly signify a following vowel. 
 Otherwise hooks and circles would be used. Likewise in
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 185 
 
 escape and ^) espy, the initial vowel is plainly indi- 
 
 K 
 
 cated by the use of ) s instead of the circle. The employment 
 of stems for I and r, where the hooks could be written, indi- 
 
 \' sf \. V 
 
 cates that a vowel precedes, as in Vv porch, \f bulk. 
 
 This is also true of the loops, lengthening, shortening, and 
 other abbreviating principles. The writer's rule should be 
 to compel consonant signs, so far as possible, to express 
 vowel sounds also; vowels so expressed need not, of course, 
 be written. 
 
 856. 2nd class. This includes a much smaller number of 
 words, which are always to be vocalized. To this class be- 
 long such words as l~ dope, / coach, \^1 foul, ~T~ echo. 
 
 These words require vowel*., oecause their outlines are so 
 meagre. When standing alone they would be either ambig- 
 uous, or indefinite. This class is composed of words having 
 only one or two consonants, containing usually a long vowel. 
 They are not words that recur frequently. When one of 
 these, however, is repeated a number of times in a single 
 report, the vowels may be omitted after the second writing, 
 particularly if the writer is pressed for time. 
 
 857. 8rd class. This embraces quite a numerous list of 
 words which sometimes are, and sometimes are not to be 
 vocalized, depending upon the connection in which they 
 occur. Take the word box, for example, in the sentence, 
 ' ' He brought home a box of candy." Here no vowel is neces- 
 
 *\ A 
 
 sary. But in the sentence, "<r / ' .^^ c~\ x" 
 
 the character \ b-ks could also be read books. Hence, 
 
 in these circumstances, a vowel is necessary to render the out- 
 line unambiguous. Illustrative words: Tomb mope jog 
 croak outch moth moist quake coke cloy plow glue 
 moan soak rout sofa chyle chyme. In general it may be
 
 186 REPORTING STYLE OP SHORT-HAND. 
 
 observ ^J. that when the vowels in a word are nearly equal in 
 number to the consonants, a few of them should be expressed; 
 not so, however, if the consonants greatly predominate. 
 
 858. Perhaps there is no word whatever but that in rare 
 contingencies may need a vowel for some purpose or other. 
 
 The character V as here, standing entirely alone, could 
 be read either never, or envy. Both may and him require 
 vowels in the sentence, " I wish you to write may, not him." 
 So common a word as out demands a rowel in certain con- 
 nections, as in the sentence, " 4 ^, , ^v " 
 
 ^ A! *'* 
 
 Without a vowel it may be read at. 
 In a few rare cases a vowel is written within the large 
 
 circle, as, for example, I exhaust, XJ) precise. When 
 unruled paper is used, whiv,h is seldom necessary, however, a 
 number of first and third position words will require vocal- 
 ization. 
 
 Nothing short of experience and observation will teach the 
 young reporter just to what extent he ought to insert vowels 
 to render his reports intelligible to himself. The difficulty he 
 finds in reading certain outlines will cause him to vocalize 
 them when next they occur. Gradually also he learns to 
 drop vowels which he does not find helpful in transcribing. 
 Stenographers in time acquire an intuitive faculty telling 
 them as they write, no matter how swiftly, that this word or 
 that requires a vowel, or else, in the peculiar connection in 
 which it occurs, its meaning will be doubtful afterwards 
 when the tracks of his flying pencil are being translated 
 into "English." 
 
 859. Considering the form and function of the vowel 
 signs, it may be observed that the dots and dashes, like the 
 sounds they represent, are simple. Whereas, the more com- 
 plex sounds, known as compound vowels, are symbolized by 
 compound characters, namely, small angular marks and semi- 
 circles. There is an actual contact of the vocal organs when
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 117 
 
 the consonants are produced. For this reason they are more 
 definite in character than the vowel sounds, which are pro- 
 duced without such contact. It is possible, by means of the 
 vocal organs, to produce au almost infinite variety of shades 
 of vowel sound. It is probable that as language improves, 
 additional vowels will be brought into use. The tendency 
 toward an increase has already given rise to a number of 
 distinctions, out of which much unprofitable discussion has 
 grown, as to the precise number of vowel sounds comprised 
 iu the English language. 
 
 860. There are a few shades of vowel sound for which the 
 Pitman vowel scale does not provide symbols. Nor is this 
 necessary. E in certain is clearly enough indicated by the 
 light dot which represents e in wet; a in air, by the large dot 
 representing long a in mate; a in ask, by the sign for a in cap. 
 
 361. A few additional signs are here presented for the ex- 
 pression of concurrent vowels, as oo-i in gluey, written *%, 
 or a-e in gayety, written < | instead of * ] This sign, <, 
 when pointing to the left, expresses a long dot-vowel, followed 
 by any short vowel; when pointing to the right it indicates a 
 long dash-vowel, followed by any short vowel. L 1. 
 
 If both the concurrent vowels are long, which rarely occurs, 
 
 each must be written separately, as in "I inchoate, or 
 
 coeval. If one is a diphthong, a following short-vowel 
 may be indicated by a slight tick attached to the dighthongal 
 
 sign, as in ^/Y Rial, *~ ]' moiety. 
 
 362. A few exceptions are to be noted to the rule for plac- 
 I ing vowels between two consecutive consonants: 
 
 (a) When the rule would throw the vowel-sign into an 
 
 angle, rendering it ambiguous, as in " > . Maxley, not 
 
 written - > & 
 (6) If the word is compound, each part should be vocalized
 
 183 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-fJAXD. 
 
 separately, as ^ plough-share, \ cowboy. 
 
 (c) The separate parts, when they are quite distinct, or 
 the components of a derivative word, are vocalized separate- 
 
 ly, as in Q, uninstanced, f* Lulu-land, | excit- 
 
 able. The assignment is also governed to some e ctent by 
 syllabication; to illustrate, canonade is written ^""^ not 
 
 ^^] The advanced writer may safely use his wn best 
 judgment in this matter. 
 
 363. Means have been provided for expressing a vowel 
 which occurs between circle-s and the eshun-hook. as a in 
 compensation; but in no case whatever is this necessary. It 
 will aid the reader if he will remember that there is always 
 a vowel to be supplied between a circle and this hook, and 
 that without a single exception, this vowel is either long a, 
 as in compensation, short i, as in supposition, or short e, as in 
 possession. 
 
 364. A few remarks concerning diphthongs and coales- 
 cents are in place here. A diphthong, literally double-sound, 
 is supposed by most persons to be two sounds in one. whereas 
 it is in reality a glide, or sort of leap, from one sound to an- 
 other. In producing it the vocal organs undergo a constant 
 and rapid change of position. Hence a diphthong might 
 properly be called a curved sound. But the vocal organs re- 
 main in & fixed position while producing what may be termed 
 elementary vowels, and on this account the dots and dashes 
 might be considered as representing straight sounds. They 
 are capable of prolongation, while the diphthongs are not. 
 
 The aspirate dot may precede diphthongs and coales- 
 cents, also, as in <[ whet, v | height. Since no other char- 
 acter is similar to v I, it may be written in the 1st, 2nd
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 188 
 
 or 3rd place, according to convenience, as in N > ' nigh, 
 
 \j v belie. 
 
 865. The consonants, w and y, known as coalescents, are 
 not strictly independent sounds, but are rather a kind of 
 accent, or sharpening impulse, by which any vowel may be 
 modified. It may be said that w gives a stress, or accentua- 
 tion, to the vowel by means of the lips; whereas y sharpens 
 the vowel by means of the palate and tongue. The character 
 u is employed to express both the coalescent , as in youth, 
 and the diphthong ew, as in view. There is a real, though 
 but slight difference between these two sounds. To f ende>, 
 this distinction more apparent, add th to view, thus, viewth. 
 From this subtract v, and the remaining letters spell iewth, 
 which in pronunciation plainly differs from youth. 
 
 866. Observe the following rules as to the manner of 
 placing the vowels: 
 
 (a) First and second place initial vowels can best be 
 written previously to the remaining part of the word. 
 
 (6) The dash in such words as x_ foe, \ bow, should be 
 struck downwards. 
 
 367. UNACCENTED AND OBSCURE VOWELS. An instructor 
 of short-hand is not so much concerned in pointing out what 
 are the precise sounds in any word, as in teaching how best 
 to express them. Nevertheless, a few observations relative 
 to what are called obscure vowels are in place. Every writer 
 is occasionally required to represent words with exactness, 
 the vowel as well as the consonant elements. But vowel 
 sound is so intangible that the keenest ear is sometimes un- 
 able to determine the precise quantity and quality of the 
 minor shades. When written at all, these are usually ex- 
 pressed by proximate signs. For example, the following 
 words, fully vocalized, would ordinarily be . written, 
 
 Denied, X^\ polar, rf later, f refer, |/\ Urri-
 
 190 REPORTING STYLE OF 
 
 conforrr^ty, t conformation. Put good 
 
 speakers do not pronounce them so. Vented is pronounced 
 ventd; polar, polr; later, latr. Also, Bibl, collr, contenld, 
 stratm, deacn. In. conformation^ the second vowel is not 
 broad o, as in wrong, but short, as o in lot. Hereo receives 
 neither the primary nor secondary accent, and as a rule un- 
 accented vowels, like those italicised in the derivative words 
 given below, though marked long in dictionaries, are in real- 
 ity short. 
 
 In refer, e is short. In the following list the italicised 
 letters are, in correct speech, given the short sound: .Avail, 
 defend, reduction, await, conformation, progression, exposi- 
 tion. In terrible, does not represent either the long or 
 short sound of '. It is a slight, indefinable sound, classed by 
 lexicographers as obscure. Terrible would be pronounced 
 the same though spelt terrable, terreble, terroble, or terrwble. 
 Likewise stratum could be spelt strati'm, stratem, stratom, 
 stratam. The italicised letters in the following list are also 
 more or less obscure: Conformity, presentable, radical, 
 chaplain, intangible. 
 
 Notwithstanding these statements, the most convenient, 
 and perhaps the most sensible rule, in vocalizing, is to follow 
 the guidance of a standard dictionary. Exceptions need be 
 made only when exactness is required. 
 
 PHRASES. 
 
 368. I-have-also I-may-have-seen in-all-its-bearings in- 
 all-other-respects in-all-probability in-any-degree in-~.ny- 
 other-country in-any-other-manner in-any-other-way in- 
 every-case in-every-respect in-favor in-so-many-words in- 
 substance in-its-nature in-its-own-way in-that-matter in- 
 that-respect in-that-shape in-that-way about-as-much-as 
 better-kind better-way condition-of-our condition-of-their 
 just-about.
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 191 
 
 369. EXERCISE 85. 
 
 Dear-Sir: We-have-a car of hominy chop en route, which- 
 will-arrive in-two-or-three days and-will sell you several 
 tons of-same at $16.75, sight draft. Will send sample in day 
 or two; have-none on-hand at-present. We credit your acct. 
 with $1.00 on last 100 bu. of oats as requested, and-hope 
 same will-be-satisfactory. Yours-truly, etc. 
 
 Dear-Sir: Replying-to-your-favor of-the 6th, we beg to 
 say that if-the S. S. S. is-in-good condition we-have-no-ob- 
 jection to-receiving it back, provided, of-course, that-it-is 
 returned without expense to us. We regret to say that-we- 
 have-no demand for-the Hamilton troches. 
 
 Your account has-now been credited $15 on Winslow's 
 syrup, as-per your-card of-the 2d. 
 
 Yours-very-truly, etc. 
 
 (150 1:45 :45.) 
 
 370. TRANSLATE. 
 
 \
 
 LESSON XXXVI. 
 
 PRIMITIVE AND DERIVATIVE. 
 
 371. KEY. 1. Mean meaning meaningly meaningless 
 meaner meanest meanness meanly demean meant. 
 2. Care caring uncaring careless carelessly carelessness 
 careful carefulness. 8. Plain plains complain complainant 
 complaining plainer plainest plainness plainly. 4. Do 
 does doing done undo undoing undid undone doest doer 
 did didst. 5. Settle settles settled settling settler settle- 
 ment unsettle unsettled. 6. Sale sales salable unsalable 
 seller selling undersell sold. 7. Knife-grinder planing- 
 mill cutting-box street-car market-basket hen-roost coast- 
 survey. 8. Shooting-star short-winded dog-collar flower- 
 pot hail-storm sheep-pen. 9. Express-car button-hole 
 wild-cat chess-board cuff-holder mail-carrier. 10. Drug- 
 store hay-stack drum-stick live-stock rain-cloud chairman 
 easy-chair. 
 
 PHRASES. 11. It-will-be-maintained it-would-not-take I- 
 will-not-undertake if-it-be so-as-to-be-able-to under-circum- 
 stances we-are-satisfied we-do-not-undertake. 
 
 SENTENCES. 1. It-has-been well observed that few are 
 better qualified to give others advice than those-who-have 
 taken the-least of-it themselves. 2. Our happiness in-this- 
 world depends-upon the-affections we-are able-to inspire. 
 8. He who purposes to-be an-author should-first-be-a student. 
 4. No-man-can-be brave who-considers pain to-be the-great 
 evil of-life, nor temperate, who considers pleasure to-be-the 
 highest good. 
 
 872. It can be demonstrated that the outline '"~\_^ m-nst 
 (for meanest) can be written a trifle quicker than the outline 
 mn-st. A one-minute test of each will show that the 
 
 first can be written the greater number of times. The latter 
 form, ^~j> mnsi, however, is the accepted outline for mean- 
 
 esf. There are two reasons for this. First, it is easier read. 
 This is owing to the fact that the mind is already familiar 
 with ^^ inn as the outline for the primitive word mean, 
 
 192-
 
 36. 
 
 2c 
 
 x-T> 
 
 \ s 
 
 ! J ' 
 
 E r 
 
 V \ 
 
 C 
 
 \o< 
 
 10 
 
 L, 
 
 
 t 
 
 <r v s 
 
 SENTENCES. 
 
 \ 
 
 
 -s 
 
 D L C 
 
 V 
 
 o 
 
 X,
 
 194 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 from which is obtained the derivative word meanest. The 
 outline for any derivative /ord ma u be quickly deciphered, 
 as soon as that part of tlit outline .inch expresses the prim- 
 itive is recognized. 
 
 In the second place, it is more quickly written. This may 
 appear unreasonable, since it has been admitted that 
 ^~\^? m-nst is the more facile outline. But in -"""*> meanest, 
 
 the reporter's first and instantaneous thought is, how to 
 write "~^ mean, and next est; and he has the word entirely 
 written in the time it would take to determine, mentally, 
 that m-nst would be the easier to execute. For tho same 
 reason it is better to write meaner and meanly by the outlines, 
 mn-r and mn-l, rather than by m-nr and m-nl. In this list 
 (L 1) it will be observed that the forms are determined partly 
 by the sound, partly by the sense, or meaning; that is, when 
 there is nothing to prevent, words of similar meaning are 
 expressed by similar outlines. This is called writing by an- 
 alogy, which experience proves to have several advantages. 
 In general, derivative words are written in analogy with their 
 primitives, the derivative being expressed by simply prefixing 
 or affixing certain signs to the primitive word-form. See 
 Ls 2 6. It is important to preserve intact the primitive 
 word-forms; hence, the parts of derivative words are some- 
 times separated, as in ft unsettle, ** uncivil, in 
 
 I C N 
 
 preference to ^~-$/~ and P 
 
 373. Write: Great greatly greater gicatness; nice 
 nicer niceness nicely nicety; free freely freer frees free- 
 ing freed freedom; joy joys enjoy enjoyed enjoyer 
 enjoying joyous joyously joyousness joyful joyfully joy- 
 fulness; gain gains gainer gaining gainful ungainly 
 regain regaining gained \ingaining; grow grows grower 
 grown grew ungrown ungrowing; slave slaves slaved 
 slaving slaver enslaving enslaved enslavement enslaver; 
 make makes maker making makest remake unmake
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 196 
 
 m.ule u:ini;ule; keep keeps kept keeping keeper keepest 
 unkept; stone stoner stonest stones stoned unstoned 
 restone restoned stony stonier stoniest. 
 
 37 i. For precisely the same reason, compound words are 
 to he writ: I") by simply joining the two word-forms together, 
 neither outline being impaired. The characters thus pro- 
 duced are easily read, because each outline is as easily 
 recognized as when standing alone. This practice, also, is 
 favorable to speed, since not the least premeditation is re- 
 quired. The consonants in the word \ overdrawn, are 
 
 vrttrn, and these could be expressed by the character, 
 7 \^ > vrd-rn; but this would be a very improper outline for 
 
 overdrawn; it is neither analagous or suggestive. For the 
 same reason V^^ foretell should not be written <y"~ J'rt-l, 
 
 f 
 nor ^^ wash-tub, S wa-sht-b. 
 
 Write: Battle-flag wax-work eating-house saloon-keeper 
 house-dog house-top quick-sand pen- wiper sea-coast ship- 
 load mail-car band-wagon pencil-case drag-tooth horse- 
 racing horsemanship Sunday-school class-room church- 
 choir basket-picnic vinegar-barrel mouse-trap jug-handle 
 giant-powder spell-bound horror-stri ken curb-stone. 
 
 Compound words, however, should not be phrased when 
 unangular joinings result. See Ls 8 and 9. 
 
 Write House-fly hay-rac^ time-piece watch-chain 
 horse-fly. 
 
 375. In a few exceptional cases the form of one of the 
 component words is modified in order to render a suitable 
 joining possible. In L 10 the form of the outlines for store, 
 stack, stock, chair, etc., are changed for this reason. 
 
 There are two important exceptions to this rule governing 
 derivitive word-forms. The first is the requirement of an-
 
 198 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HASD. 
 
 gularity, which is the chief pre-requisite in all good short- 
 hand writing. To illustrate, in moderator, the <>\\ 
 
 \ md-rt-r must be discarded for the more angular form 
 ,-v^-^l md-r-tr. On the same principle we write | . edu- 
 cator, \- voter, /\ artist, etc. 
 
 The second exception is the reqoirementot facility. Many 
 times a derivitive may he as clearly and more quickly ex- 
 pressed by a simple modification of the primitive word-form. 
 
 For illustration, editor is written U d-tr, not d-t-r; teacher 
 is written L t-chr, instead of J t-ch-r; walker \ not 
 
 w-ic-r; sadder is written 1 not sd-r. 
 In the Solemn Style, the consonants are fully expressed; 
 
 ~^7 V '/-^ 
 
 e. g., k goeth, \i .^epest, ( lookest, ^ goest, 
 
 prayelh. 
 
 876. SIGN- WORD DERIVATIVES. A (?ood nuraoer of wordi 
 
 whose primitives are expressed by abbreviations, are funned 
 
 irregularly; for example, ... here, primitive, /\ hereto- 
 
 fore, derivative; ^ hand, ~^-^} handy; .... collect, 
 
 I collector. Also see Vocabulary for: Descriptive 
 emphatically fewest improved changed largest inajr-tir 
 dismember methodically ministered objective particulari/.e 
 particularity peculiarity performed regi iarity specially 
 specialty subjective wilt younges- i xpf<-;- 1.
 
 liEPORTINQ STYLt? OF SUQRT-HAXD. 197 j 
 
 The past tense is expressed by the loop, the disjoined ted, 
 
 ; and by tialving; e.g., \> express, \ expressed; \ oft/ecJ, 
 
 \| objected; ^^ enlarge, ...... enlarged; \ - member, 
 
 ^ remembered. 
 
 Write: Appeared applied belonged happened unheard 
 unnumbered owned unpeopled disqualified valued ac- 
 knowledged allowed (l-d) considered described developed 
 governed measured. 
 
 The words dated, gifted, delighted, are better written 
 
 PI **** r 
 
 , than by the characters |> j, although 
 
 in each ease an extra t is expressed. Not only are the out- 
 lines briefer, but the exact primitive word-forms are pre- 
 served. This rule may be applied in expressing the past 
 tense of verbs generally, whether they are sign-words or not; 
 
 e. g., \ appointed, \. subjected, ^ ] dis-spirited, ^~^ culti- 
 
 vated. By far the greater number of sign-word derivatives 
 are formed in the usual way, by simply attaching the proper 
 affix or prefix. 
 
 >-T\ v. <L 
 
 Example, ) endeavor, \J\ endeavored; ..... follow, _____ fol- 
 
 lowed; \ principle, - A unprincipled; y/ 7 angel, 
 
 archangel; ' appoint, appoints; comply, 
 ance. 
 
 '677. Write: Non-appearance brotherly characterize 
 ch:ira(.'tM'i/es christianize* collects collecting constitu- 
 tional dearest delighting deliverer denioi-alization* de- 
 scription* unesstMitial familiarity fewer ungentlemanly 
 gDviT'.ioi -^ Jiaiulsome hanlness highest* unimaginable 
 largeness ministerial* numberless impractical unpracticed*
 
 19* REPORTI.VG STYLE OF SHORTHAND. 
 
 improper profitable unquestionable* dissatisfy* shalt* 
 unspeakable speechless spiritual* unspoken insufficient 
 valuable virtuous whilst* hesitation*. 
 
 PHRASES. 
 
 878. It-shouut-not-exteml it-is-plain it-will-be-seen it- 
 will-^be-worth it-will-receive it-will-require it-would-be- 
 likely I-uuderstand-it I-will-ask I-will-make 1- will-therefore 
 I-wish-to-make I-shall-enter in-his-own- lame. 
 
 379. EXERCISE 3o. 
 
 NEW-YORK, December 22, 1882. 
 
 To OCEAN STEAMSHIP COMPANIES: 
 
 Refering to-the accompanying notice co-Emigrant Book 
 Agents (Miscellaneous Circular No. 269), aiid-in-order-that- 
 we-may-have similarly a-complete list of-the outstanding 
 orders issued by Steamship Lines, wo-have to-requot tliat-a 
 statement be-prepared by-your company ami-furnished to 
 us, early in-January, of outstanding orders, both prepaid 
 and-European, issued previous to January 1st, 1883. 
 
 The-following information should-be embraced in-your 
 statement: The-date an.'-number of-each order; in whose 
 lavor drawn; destination; number of passengers; rate and- 
 amount of fare. 
 
 In-this-connection will-you please advise us whether it- 
 will-be possible for-you to furnish similar statements month]}' 
 thereafter? Such-statements would greatly facilitate tlie- 
 transaction of business in-case-of change of fares or rate 
 of commission, and-enable us to deal with questions arising 
 from such changes more intelligently, and-it-is-believc-d, 
 more advantageously to all-parties. 
 
 Please-answer this-communication, and-send statements 
 to Mr. Al^rt Fink, Commissioner. 
 
 Respectfully-yours, 
 
 GENERAL PASSENGER AGENTS. 
 (1902:301:15.)
 
 TRANSLATE. 
 
 ...<\. 624 
 
 \\ 
 
 L 
 
 /-" 
 V C 
 
 $ r 
 
 L 
 
 XI -~ 
 
 / X. 
 
 r ^ V \ VLp . ^ 
 ^ *) t ' 
 
 > r / / 
 
 1 / ^t/ 
 
 .... -> 
 
 T 
 /
 
 LESSON XXXVU. 
 SYLLABICATION. 
 
 381. KEY. 1. Plen-ty chos-en re-frain pro-found can- 
 did ser-mon vix-en splen-did stru-ggle. 2. Ter-min-ute 
 will-ing-ly re-cov-er cann-on-ade re-du-pli-cate ca-li-bre 
 Bra-ttle-bo-ro. 8. Ex-ter-min-ate trou-ble-some ex-ca-vate 
 des-ig-nate ty-po-graph-er oc-ta-gon fan-tast-ic. 4. Freed-om 
 ret-urn det-ach dus-ty chea-pen ve-ri-fy dee-per bran-ches 
 man-if-old. 5. Ex-trav-a-gant occ-u-pant def-i-nite ex- 
 per-i-ment mon-stros-i-ty pLot-o-graph-er chro-nol-o-gy. 
 
 6. Bulk fork march forge milk forth birth roared. 
 
 7. Stu-dy stead stayed ous-ted bread bored bir-die 
 bo-rrow-ed. 8. Wor-ker pur-chas-er di-gest-ive dis-tur-lier 
 re-fus-al sol-dier la-bor-er. 
 
 PHRASES. 9. Somewhere-else which-would-be which- 
 would-make which-had-been which-has-just-been all-you- 
 wish no-more-than-you-can did-you-wish. 
 
 SENTENCES. 1. A-man's character is-the reality of him- 
 self; his reputation the-opinion others have-formed about- 
 him; character resides in him, reputation in other people; 
 that-is-the-substance, this-the shadow. 2. A-small leak will 
 sink a-great ship. 3. A-fool may-make money, but it needs 
 a wise-man to-spend it. 4. All is-not gained that-is put 
 into-the purse. 5. Tell-your secret to-your-servant and- 
 you make-him your-master. 6. If-you-would have a-thiug 
 well done, do-it yourself. 
 
 382. Referring to the words found in Ls 1 and 2, it will IH> 
 found that there are as many stems exactly as there are syl- 
 lables, that is to say, a consonant letter, or stroke, lor eurli 
 syllable of each word. This is not a mere coincidence, It 
 holds true with the greater number of words. What is the 
 explanation? In the first place, only one-third of all the 
 consonant sounds are indicated by stems; the remaining two- 
 thirds are expressed by adjunctive signs so called, that is, 
 hooks, circles, loops, etc. A certain number of stems must 
 
 be used, however, not simply as objects to which these :ul- 
 
 aoo
 
 208 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 junctive signs may be attached, but as affording a means 
 also of vowel representation. A vowel can be appended to 
 a consonant stem, but to nothing else. Hence, since tlie 
 number of vowels and the number of syllables are of necessity 
 always equal, the number of syllables and the number of 
 steins are, logically, equal also. 
 
 883. An additional feature of importance is to be ob- 
 served; all the elements of sound which are grouped into one 
 syllable, are usually expressed by a single stem with its ap- 
 pendages, that is, vowel signs, hooks and circles. To illustrate, 
 
 in L_^ striven the first syllable striv is expressed by | t and 
 its appendages, while the syllable en is represented by the 
 stem ^ 'n, which is entirely distinct from the first stem. 
 Also in plen-ty, and ter-min-ate, the different parts of the 
 consonant outlines are as distinct from one another as are 
 
 the syllables themselves. Thus, \ plen \ ty, p plenty, or 
 I ter -"~i min *| ate, \^~^ terminate. It would be im- 
 
 proper to write these words otherwise, as, for example, 
 stri-ven, or K~x^ ter-mi-nate. The point of practical 
 
 value to be observed by the writer is this: So far as possible 
 choose outlines which are adapted, in the manner just indicated, 
 to the syllabication of the words tftey represent; that is to s:iy, 
 make a single stem, and its appendages, express all the 
 sounds, and those only, which occur in the particular syllable 
 you are writing. For example, see ex-ca-vate, des-ig-nate, 
 ty-po-graph-er,ete.,L3. Illustrative words : Cir-cle pro-pose 
 sca-tter wor-thy te-rri-ble bliss-ful ser-vice cov-er ma-ker 
 brace-let .Broad-way re-cord. See also ~L 8. 
 
 884. To this rule there are two exceptions. The first is 
 occasioned by a requirement of brevity. Return, for in- 
 stance, is not written ''"I/* re-turn, but ~\/ } rct-urn,
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAtfD. 208 
 
 which is the more desirable outline. So freedom is written, 
 freed-om (frd-m, see L 4), instead of free-dom (i. e., fr-d-m). 
 The illustrative words in L 4 show the number of syllables 
 and stems to be equal, a result obtained by the manner of 
 syllabising each word; thus, chea-pen, ve-ri-fy, instead of 
 cheap-en, ver-i-fy f 
 
 885. The consonant stem and its appendages is sometimes, 
 for convenience, called a stenographic syllable. When prac- 
 ticable, the stenographic and orthographic syllables should 
 correspond with each other. Otherwise a re-syllabication of 
 the word miHt take place. A syllable is defined as a number 
 of sounds, all of which are uttered with one articulation. 
 An important fact in this connection must not, however, be 
 overlooked. When a word of several syllables is pronounced, 
 it is impossible to say to what particular syllable some of the 
 consonant sounds belong. For instance, in strip-ling, or 
 stri-pling, or stripl-ing. In pronouncing pendant, there is 
 nothing Avhatever in the spoken word to indicate that d be- 
 longs to the first syllable, or to the last. In dictionaries, 
 words are divided into syllables on a basis of sense, or mean- 
 ing; while short-hand syllabication is more a matter of sound; 
 or, it may be said, still more a matter of form in the construc- 
 tion of outlines. 
 
 386. It often happens that vowels must be placed on each 
 side of a stem, since many syllables contain a vowel only, 
 and no consonant, as in ex-trav-a-gnnt, occ-u-pant. (See L 5.) 
 Here there are fewer stems than syllables. On the other 
 hand, many word-forms cannot be abbreviated sufficiently to 
 reduce the separate strokes to the number of vowels, as in 
 bulk, fork, etc., L 6. In L 6 the words are all monosyllables, 
 each requiring, however, three stems for its expression. 
 Still again, there are a few words containing one consonant 
 only, but with three vowels, as I-o-wa, i-de-a, a-re-a, i-o-ta. 
 On the whole, a careful examination will show that there 
 are nearly as many stems, or stenographic syllables, as there 
 are vowels, or orthographic syllables. The result of a com-
 
 804 HEPORT7XO STYLE OP SHORT-HAXD. 
 
 parison would be affected materially by the various devices 
 for expressing two syllables with one stroke, as in mat-ter, 
 fash-ion, go-est, mas-ter. 
 
 387. Short-hand writing 5 1 * suggestive, and hence the more 
 legible in this regard, that us the sounds are grouped tn />.- <>- 
 nunciation, so the signs are grouped in writing. The con- 
 sonants may be said to cluster around the vowel, which is 
 the heart, or centre, of the syllable; and in a similar manner 
 the brief signs cluster about the stem to which they are ap- 
 pended. 
 
 PHRASES. 
 
 - . So-long-a-time such-as-are such-as-cau riuch-as-was- 
 
 u..: iy take-place takes-up take-possession there-is-no-siu-h 
 
 thcie-will-never there-would-not-now they-can-make they- 
 
 can-receive they-can-uow to-believe to-its to-niak-'-inen- 
 
 tioa to-that-extent that-is-all that-it-is-claimed that-Ls-the- 
 
 very-clear very-long-time we-have-reccived wc-shall- 
 
 l>.'-al)le-to-make liquor-dealers liq.ior-sellera long-before 
 
 -profession may-have-seen m;ly-not-have morning- 
 
 b:i>iness more-than-that national-bank national-defence 
 
 native-land not-very-long-ago nor-is-it-necessary purchase- 
 
 inoney relied-upon shall-be-liable should-have-had so-as- 
 
 t:>-make so-as-uot-to-make so-long-as-it-is. 
 
 389 EXERCISE 37. 
 
 (To be phruxcd by tlic student.) 
 
 INDIANAPOLIS, IND., April 4, 1886. 
 To WHOM IT MAY CONCERN: 
 
 The bearer hereof, Air. Henry Hopkins, has been in our 
 employ for five years past as confidential clerk and book- 
 keeper. We have always found him faithful in the discharge 
 of his duties, courteous and obliging, and alive to the inter- 
 est of his employers. Mr. Hopkins is a superior accountant, 
 and well qualified to discharge any of the duties he may 
 undertake. It gives us pleasure to recommend him to any 
 who may require such services, knowing that he will he- 
 found reliable in whatever capacity he may be engaged. 
 
 Your-, i-tr. 
 
 (100 1:10 :40.)
 
 TRANSLATE. 
 
 \ ( 
 
 /=> v -f 
 ~2- ' . ^~ / ' a"-- 
 
 /' I ' 
 
 V --J- 
 
 \ 
 
 v^ 
 
 r 
 
 A- 1' 
 
 Y 
 
 A 
 
 S\ 
 
 A 
 
 k 
 
 -3 X 
 
 /\ p i \ 
 
 > ....... 
 
 <0 
 
 \ c rv 
 
 \ o^
 
 LESSON XXXVIII. 
 GENERAL PRINCIPLES. 
 
 891. KEY. 1. Editor debtor auditory, spinney aspen 
 spin; stop estop steep. 2. State estate situate; pearly 
 peril poorly; Clara clear color. 8. Crown cranny corn; 
 Saturday sturdy stride; straight start strata. 4. Crowd 
 carried Corday; briar brewery barrier; prate pretty up- 
 right. 5. Great gritty garrote; manilla manual meanly; 
 meant minuet minute. 6. Cant county aconite; policy 
 place police; Stella settle still. 7. Easter story star; 
 wrecked Orcutt rocket; around round ruined. 8. Tent 
 tenet attenuate; sent senate ascent; Scott socket asked. 
 9-13. For key see list words, sec. 404. 
 
 PHRASES. 14. How-long during-the-winter-season satis- 
 factory-manner last-mail first-class first-class-goods joint- 
 committee Board-of-Trade. 15. On-the-west-side Articles- 
 of-Association bill-of-sale court-of -justice articles-of-agi < - 
 ment according-to-your we-may-be-able-to relating-to-the- 
 subject. 
 
 892. A SCIENTIFIC SYSTEM. To be broadly capable, read- 
 ily acquired, and easily remembered, a short-hand system 
 must be scientific, not merely expeditious. A collection of 
 arbitrary expedients, if sufficiently large, may serve for re- 
 producing ordinary discourse; but the inventiveness of the 
 reporter, or the old cumbersome long-hand, must be resorted 
 to when newly coined words, unusual proper names, tech- 
 nical terms or provincialisms are encountered. A system, to 
 be scientific, must have a basis of principle; be so related to 
 known sciences as to be quickly apprehended; so facile as to 
 be eq'ial to any emergency of speed, dialect, hoi rowed words, 
 or f >reign name or accent. The Pitman Phonography meets 
 the<e requirements. No matter what changes the language 
 may undergo, it will be impossible for it to extend heyoiul 
 the capabilities of this far-reaching system. It is adapted, 
 first of all, to the human voice in general, and, incidentally, 
 to the English language in particular. The scientific thur- 
 
 -i06-
 
 ) 
 
 8 J 
 
 9 *- 
 
 10 L 
 
 11 ^ 
 
 12 V 
 13 
 
 14 
 
 15 
 
 Plate 38, 
 
 V 
 
 C 
 
 V 
 
 VI 
 
 ) 
 
 V 
 
 
 * 
 
 h 
 
 2, 
 
 b X 5 / 
 
 h i 
 
 WORD- FORMS. 
 
 l/v 
 
 L^f-r 
 
 . v^ 
 
 I > 
 
 T
 
 W8 REPORTING STYLE OF 8BOBT-HAND, 
 
 acter of the system will appear more clearly from the fol- 
 lowing considerations: 
 
 393. CORRELATION. The twenty -iour consonants are di- 
 vided into several classes, according to their nature and 
 quality. The tirst eight are termed explodents, sometimes 
 called abrupts. The sounds which these letters express are 
 blunt, not capable of being prolonged. All remaining letters, 
 except w, y and h, are designated as continuants, by which 
 is meant that the sounds they express are capable of being 
 prolonged, or continued. They are properly represented by 
 curved, or yielding, stems. 
 
 The second classification, which affects most consonants, 
 is into subvocals, as 6, d, v; and surds, as p, J\ t. The first 
 class, or heavy sounds, are represented by shaded letters; 
 whereas the surds, or light, breath sounds, are appropriately 
 expressed by thin stems. Looking further, it will be observed 
 also that p and b, t and d, f and v, s and ?, etc., are similar 
 sounds, both letters of each pair being articulated with the 
 same vocal organs, the only difference being that in each 
 case the first is light, and the second, heavy. P and b are 
 similar sounds in these respects, that both are labials, or 
 lip-sounds, and both explodents; and the two characters by 
 which they are represented are alike in respect to slant and 
 straightness. They differ in this respect only, that the first 
 is light, and the second, heavy; whereas their stems differ in a 
 similar manner, the first being thin, and the second, thick. 
 The same observations apply to t and d, ch and j, f and v, 
 and the other pairs of consonants. 
 
 The long vowels, also, are properly expressed by shadf?, 
 and the short by light signs. Diphthongs are compound 
 sounds, and their symbols likewise are double, two in one. 
 
 394. ECONOMY. Certain sounds, it is well known, are 
 much more frequent than others. Tands occur the often* -( . 
 
 R and are far more common than /, ^or j. The si^us 
 which represent the frequent sounds are, as a rule, easier to 
 execute than those which express sounds lesr Common. For
 
 REPORTING STYLK OF SHOR7-HAND. 209 
 
 example, t is written more quickly than r or sh, anf 1 s than/, 
 etc. But in order to provide a still more expeditious way of 
 writing the most frequent sounds, a series of adjunctive 
 signs, sometimes called the short alphabet, has been devised. 
 <S consequently may be written in four different way; by the 
 t\vo circles, s and sez, and the two loops, st and str; t likewise 
 by four methods; viz., the two loops, the lengthening and 
 the halving principles; n by the n, shun, eshun and in hooks; 
 r by the r-hook, str-loop, and lengthening principle. Another 
 fact which still better illustrates the economy of the system 
 is the ingenious method of vowel indication, which consists 
 in skillfully combining, or mixing, the signs of the long and 
 short consonant alphabets, for the purpose of expressing, 
 without having to write, many of the vowel sounds. The 
 adaptability of the system as a means to an end, is evidenced 
 by the list of abbreviations which have been fitly chosen to 
 express those common words and phr? 01 " 1 of which the bulk 
 of colloquial speech is composed. 
 
 895. ADAPTABILITY. The fact that no two persons write 
 long-hand alike, that the different stvles of long-hand are as 
 .various as the writers are multitudinous, plainly points to 
 the truth that a short-hand system may be well adapted to 
 one, or a few, and still not suited to all, or many. For con- 
 venience, we will roughly divide short-hand writers into 
 three classes: The artistic, the swift, and the medium. The 
 writer belonging to the first of these classes has a good eye, 
 steady nerve, and if he possesses a retentive memory, can 
 attain a high speed. By writing a small hand, and making 
 use of many contractions and phrases, he makes good what 
 he lacks in natural quickness. 
 
 The second writes a large hand, but is so exceedingly 
 quick, mentally and manually, that he can report easily, 
 forming the characters quite large, phrasing but little, and 
 employing a limited number of word-signs. Abbreviating 
 devices do not interest him, because he does not need them. 
 
 The third combines in a certain measure the qualities of
 
 810 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORTHAND. 
 
 the other two. Til _xeat majority of writers are compri sed 
 in this class. Many of the best stenographers come uiuli-r 
 the first or second. The pliability, so to speak, of the Pitman 
 system is shown by the fact that persons thus variously en- 
 dowed may readily adapt it to their own peculiar faculty or 
 use. It is worthy of mention that the success of a writer 
 depends in a measure noon the particular author he chooses 
 to follow. Only persons who belong to the class first men- 
 tioned should attempt Graham. A person of the class next 
 described is able to report with a connective vowel system 
 even, such as Lindsley's or Pernin's. In a few cases such 
 persons have attained verbatim speed wi^h the tedious Cor- 
 responding Style. The first named usually prefers a pen, 
 while a pencil is often used by the class next mentioned. 
 
 396. MENTALITY. It is an instructive fact that the pen 
 produces, in the aggregate, a longer line each minute when 
 writing long-hand, than when writing short -luuul. A com- 
 parison of the two methods shows that writing long-hand 
 requires more labor and less thought, and short-hand more 
 thought and less labor. The first operation is the more phy- 
 sical, the latter is more -mental. Reporting in short-hand is 
 not so much a question of swift muscular action, as one of 
 how to keep the pMi moving. Short-hand differs radii-ally 
 from long-hand in this important regard, that in the former, 
 every tick, dot or stroke, means something; hence, thought 
 is required. To render the system more speedy, it is not 
 needful to curtail the length of line, but to remove whatever 
 impedes the facility with which it may be executed. It is a 
 serious mistake to adopt numerous small and delicate char- 
 acters for the sake of mere lineal brevity. That kind are 
 commonly more difficult to form, and hence occasion a loss, 
 instead of gain, in time and speed. They must be formed 
 slowly to be legible; hence, their employment either retards 
 speed, or endangers accuracy. No outline is good, if writing 
 it swiftly is pretty sure to mar its form. For .this reason a 
 long outline is often preferable to a short one.
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 211 
 
 3C^. CONTEXT^ Some persons not versed in short-hand 
 object to the method as unsafe, since context must be relied 
 upon as an aid to legibility. It is well known, however, that 
 law proceedings, public speeches, etc., are reported every 
 day, and reproduced with absolute precision. It is interest- 
 ing to note a fact not commonly observed, that context is 
 employed to fully as great an extent, also, in reading long- 
 hand. Take an ordinary hastily written manuscript, and 
 conceal all but a single letter. The reader cannot in half the 
 cases determine what it is. In very many instances an en- 
 tire word could not even be guessed at, if it were removed 
 from its place in the sentence. What is context? A word 
 mispronounced in conversation, or indistinctly heard, is 
 readily understood by the hearer. It may usually be supplied 
 even if entirely omitted. This is an hourly occurrence. The 
 connection is a reliable guida To illustrate the same princi- 
 ple, you would be safe in assuming that a man were an 
 Irishman, though you met him at night, providing the 
 occurrence was on a street in Dublin, and you heard his 
 voice. .Vhe nationality of a man, the family of an animal, 
 the species of a plant, the kind of a liquid, the distance of an 
 object, are, for all ordinary purposes, mentally determined 
 by this kind of indirect or circumstantial evidence. All 
 things within our knowledge are pervaded by the idea of 
 relation, consistency, sequence. This principle, when ap- 
 plied to language, is called context. When, in reading print, 
 the mind grasps completely the meaning of the words, a 
 conscious expectancy precedes the eye, and a new phrase or 
 sentence is half read before it is seen. In the affairs of life, 
 and in the work of a student in particular, this perception 
 gives an immense advantage. It is not a matter of accident, 
 but of culture, mental training. The short-hand writer who 
 attends strictly to the meaning of what he writes when his 
 notes are taken, and keeps his mind rigidly fixed on the im- 
 port of the language when he transcribes, will accomplish 
 infinitely more than the merely mechanical reporter. This
 
 812 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 qualification is, indeed, one of the rare secrets of success in 
 the stenographic profession. 
 
 398. RE A. DING BY CONSONANTS is only one of the many 
 applications of this principle. It is surprising the extent to 
 which the trained writer is able to indicate the vowel ele- 
 ments by means of a proper choice, and apt combination, of 
 the long and short signs. Let us take a more concise view of 
 
 this subject. Long - > n must be employed in V_,^ funny, 
 
 to give place for the final vowel; while in \> fun the hook 
 should be used, because no vowel follows n. The first word- 
 form V-,, may be said to be open, i. e., open to vocalization; 
 
 while xs fun, so far as a final vowel is concerned, is con- 
 sidered closed. Now, all consonant outlines are open more 
 or less, and the extent to which they should be left open de- 
 pends almost entirely upon the number and location of the 
 vowels which any given word contains. An outline is the 
 more open, when it contains a greater number of stems; and 
 the more closed, depending on the number of short or ad- 
 junctive signs used in it. The rule is to write the word-form 
 the more open, the greater the number of vowels to be ex- 
 pressed. This is, moreover, as much a matter of manner as 
 
 of extent. To illustrate, in j Austin (stn) we have the long 
 
 s and the short n; while in \^ stony (also stn) we have the 
 short s and the long n. Hence, the outline must be lelt open 
 at those particular points where the vowels occur. Where no 
 vowels occur, the outline should, if possible, be closed. 
 Then the reader, the moment his eye meets an outline, knows 
 precisely where vowels are, and where they are not to be, 
 supplied. A short-hand sentence may be compared to a 
 string of different colored beads, in reading which a vowel 
 is to be supplied for each white (or blank) bead. So far as
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 213 
 
 consonant outlining is concerned, the principle is the same 
 whether the vowels are actually written or not. Thus 
 /""^_^ many must be written with long n; otherwise it 
 would be mistaken for men. Ordinarily it is bad practice to 
 write a word-form too brief for vocalization, or more open 
 than is required. 
 
 The vowel element, although invisible, is in reality the 
 mould which gives shape to the characters, and at the same 
 time the key by which to unlock the translation. 
 
 Keeping in view this guiding principle, the student will 
 understand the application of the following 
 
 399. RULES 
 
 governing the choice between long and short consonant 
 signs. 
 1. CIRCLES. If s is the first consonant, but preceded by a 
 
 vowel, as in 2 escape, or the last consonant, followed by 
 
 a vowel, as in ' ) glossy; or if in any case it is preceded 
 
 -*?\ , 
 
 by two concurrent vowels, as in / chaos, the long J s is 
 
 always employed. In all other circumstances use the circle. 
 
 The large circle is nearly always used for ss, sz, etc., when 
 
 the intervening vowel is short; unless there are no other 
 
 consonants in the word, as J' says, or J sis. 
 
 2. It AND R HOOKS, (a) When I or r immediately follows 
 any consonant to which a hook may be attached, use the 
 hook, unless the r may be better expressed by the str-loop. 
 (6) When a long vowel intervenes, use the stem, (c) When 
 a short vowel intervenes, use the hook, except in words of 
 one syllable, when the stem is usually employed. 
 
 3. F AND N HOOKS, (a) The/ hook is attached to straight 
 letters only, (b) F and v when final, not followed by a vowel, 
 are expressed by hooks; if a vowel follows, use the stem.
 
 814 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HA.VD. 
 
 (c) When occurring in the middle of a word, use the hook, 
 unless angularity requires a stem. 
 
 4. LOOPS, (a) The consonants st or zd, when consecutive, 
 are usually expressed by the loop. (6) When occurring 
 medially, the loop is also used whenever angularity will ad- 
 mit; e. g., 'f~* suggestion; but V^> vested, not K> (c) If si 
 
 is preceded by an initial, or followed by a final vowel, the 
 
 1 1 
 
 loop cannot be used; e. g., u testy, not fi (d) The str 
 
 loop is almost invariably employed at the end of words, 
 rarely ever initially or medially. 
 
 5. LENGTHENED CURVES. Some restrictions are placed 
 upon the use of lengthened letters, (a) If a word-form con- 
 taining a lengthened curve will admit of two leadings, with 
 
 the liability of conflict, as V father, fetter, the less com- 
 
 mon word must be written otherwise, (b) It is customary 
 in cases of conflict to give the preference to words which 
 contain, 1st, tr, 2nd, dr, 3rd, thr. Examples, ^ --^ matter, 
 
 \ 
 () 
 
 madder, order, <J Arthur, Istter, 
 
 leather, etc. (c) The safest plan is to employ this prin- 
 ciple in connection with those words only which are quite 
 common, (d) This principle is used very sparingly in out- 
 lining proper names. 
 
 6. HALVING, (a) All letters are commonly halved except 
 "^ w, f y, xv mp and ^ ' ng. Of these the last two are 
 shortened in a number of words; the first in three or four 
 cases only, (b) f~ I, ~~*\ r, ^ m and ^ n, are shaded 
 when shortened to add d. (c) When a stem to which a cir- 
 cle is suffixed is halved, t is invariably read before s. (d) Any
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAXD 215 
 
 hooked stem may be halved, t being sounded after all the 
 hooks have been read, (e) Shortened / ray is never used 
 standing alone. (/) When t is followed by a final vowel, it 
 can not b expressed by the shortening principle, (g) When 
 a word of two syllables contains only one consonant besides 
 t, the halving principle is not employed, (h) The principle 
 is not applied in cases where the stem, by being shortened, 
 
 is thus rendered indefinite, as shortened k in > effect. 
 In this case the resulting word-form has the appearance of 
 lengthened/ 1 . .,) Ordinarily, a consonant in one syllable is 
 not halved to express a t which belongs to a folio wing syllable. 
 400. Fig. 1 Fig. 2. 
 
 Right curve. Left curve. 
 
 Referring to Fig. 1, it will be seen that in executing it the 
 first stroke is the downward ~^\ r; following this we have 
 _J sh; afterwards f~ I, ^-^ m, ) s, etc. These are right 
 curves, that is, arcs which are the components of a circle 
 written to the right. A full list of right curves is as follows: 
 s, ish, lay, ar, m, z, zh, w, and mp. List of left curves: /, ith, 
 n, el, shay, v, the, ng, and y. 
 
 401. Those words whose stems are all curves of one kind, 
 that is, either left or right, are more easily written than 
 mixed words, whose stems are partly right and partly left. 
 The only exception is what is called the compound curve; 
 
 e. g., ^^-~~- name, \^ far, J sh~ll, - v_^. many, etc. 
 
 Illustrative words having -left outlines: ^ faith, 
 enough, \^ ,. venison, \e> vessel. Right outlines:
 
 tlO REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 mail, f lame, J share, 4 s resume, f~ also. 
 
 The words given are more facile than the mixed outlines, 
 \^-^ famous, ^/\^s unloving, V^l facility, 
 
 \*>-^ thump. 
 
 It is according to a dynamical law that when the pen has 
 struck a curve in a certain direction, either right or left, the 
 impetus given it will carry it forward more easily in the 
 same direction, while a change of direction incurs a slight 
 loss of energy, and hence of time and speed. This principle 
 is general in its application, and is employed quite exten- 
 sively in the construction of word-forms. The choice be- 
 tween el and lay, tsfi and shay, and the location of the shun- 
 hooh, are usually decided by it. 
 
 402. The principle of right and left applies, in fact, to all 
 short-hand characters which are not simple, unmodified 
 straight stems, as^xjo, \ I, / j. To illustrate, the stem 
 I si may be classed as left, because the circle is struck in 
 that way; whereas ] str is right, the circle being written in 
 the reverse direction. Figs. 3, 4, 5 and 6 show movements 
 of which the right and left circles are parts. 
 
 Fig. 3. Fig. 4. Fig. 5. Fig. 
 
 Right. Lefl. Eight. Left. 
 
 Hence, naturally, in swift writing there is a tendency to 
 
 bend the t in str slightly to the right, making it appear like 
 
 ) 8. This effect is quite unavoidable in very rapid execution. 
 
 But an opposite circle added to either curve counteracts 
 
 JQ 
 stns, or |j sirs, t maintains its 
 
 straightness, no matter how quickly the characters are 
 written. 
 The stems | tr and | tl are also right and left, for the
 
 REPORTING STYLF OF SHORT-HAND. 217 
 
 reason that the r and I hooks are parts of right and left cir- 
 cles. All r-hook stems are right, and all 1-hook stems left. 
 Also, all n-honk straight stems are right, and f-hook stems 
 left. The principle applies to all hooks, loops and cii-cles. 
 Examples of right stems: 
 
 Examples of left stems: 
 
 / ^ _-> 
 
 Examples of compound stems: 
 
 V -, r N> 
 
 Difficult to execute: 
 
 o n 
 
 ^- \i J c-^ 
 
 Easy to execute: 
 
 Difficult to execute: 
 
 L o_T 7 U V. 
 
 Easy to execute: 
 
 V L "X \ *7 
 
 40o. APPLICATIONS. 
 
 (a) El, a, left curve, should be used after the left curves 
 / and n; while lay, a right curve, should be used after the 
 right curves r t m, and s. (b) Ar, a right curve, should be 
 used after the right curves lay, w, and ish. (c) Shay, a left 
 curve, is more easily written after/ than the right curve ish. 
 
 404. Write: Fadge dovetail in loco homologous paucity 
 quid pro quo mediocre nullification confoundedly pro 
 tanlo ne plus ultra subaltern dequantitate supernumerary 
 residual subtrahend rive craunch amalgamate in toto 
 cap-a-pie discumbency flagelliform hatchet faced baluster 
 terra firma epigastric hypochondriac cornea oesophagus 
 pylorus pulmonary venture tricuspid larynx clavicle
 
 218 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORTHAND. 
 
 phalanges subclavian molar cerebellum intercostal Li 
 cuspid philoprogenitiveness bronchial pericordium thorax 
 vertebrw spinal-column pettifogger eureka cyclopedia 
 ignoramus antiquarian ex-officio clodhopper screwdriver 
 pliarmacopoliat helter-skelter pilaster cuspidate navicular 
 pentapetalous sycamore. 
 
 ' 405. EXERCISE 38. 
 
 (To be phrased by the student., 
 
 THE "IMMORTAL NINE." 
 
 Owing to serious illness, resulting from the excitement and 
 overwork of the canvass, 1 did not reach Washington till the 
 19th of December just in time to cast my vote lor speaker 
 on the fifty-sixth ballot in this first important " dead-lock " 
 in the organization of the House. With the exception of t\s o 
 Indiana members, 1 had no personal acquaintance in either 
 branch of Congress, and, on entering the old Hall of Repre- 
 sentatives, my first thought was to find the Free Soil Mem- 
 bers, whose political fortunes and experience had been so 
 similar to my own. The seat of Mr. Giddings was pointed 
 out to me in the north-west corner of the Hall, where 1 found 
 the stalwart champion of free speech busy with his pen. He 
 received me with evident cordiality, and at once sent a pa^e 
 for the other free soil members. Soon the "Immortal Nine," 
 as we were often sportively styled, were all together: David 
 Wilmot, of Pennsylvania, then famous as the author of the 
 "proviso," short and corpulent in person, and emphatic in 
 speech; Preston Kin^, of New York, with his still more re- 
 markable rotundity of belt, and a face beaming with pood 
 humor; the eccentric and witty "Jo Root," of Ohio, always 
 ready to break a lance with the slave-holders; Charles Allen, 
 of Massachusetts, the quiet, dignified, clear-headed and 
 genial gentleman, but a good fighter and the unflinching 
 enemy of slavery ; Charles Durkee, of Wisconsin, the tine- 
 looking and large-hearted philanthropist, whose enthusiasm 
 never cooled; Amos Tuck, of New Hampshire, amiable and 
 somewhat feminine in appearance, but firm in purpose; John 
 W. Howe, of Pennsylvania, with a face radiant with smiles 
 and good will, and full of anti-slavery fervor; and Joshua R. 
 Giddings, of Ohio, with his broad shoulders, giant frame, 
 unquenchable love of freedom, and almost as familiar with 
 the slavery question in all its aspects as he was with the 
 alphabet. These, all gone now to their reckoning, were the
 
 REPORTISQ STYLE Of SHORT -HA^D. 219 i 
 
 elect of freeuom in the lower branch of this memoraole Con- 
 gress. They all greeted me warmly, and the more so, per- 
 haps, because my reported illness and doubtful recovery bad 
 awakened a peculiar interest in my fortune at that time, on 
 account of the political situation, and the possible signifi- 
 cance of a singL vote. John P. Hale happened to enter the 
 hall during these congratulations, and still further lighted 
 up the scene by his jolly presence; while Dr. Bailey, of the 
 "National Era," also joined in the general welcome, and at 
 once confirmed all the good opinions I had formed of this 
 courageous and single-minded friend of the slave. I was 
 delighted with all my brethren, and at o-u-e entered fully 
 into their plans and counsels. Selected from the " Political 
 Recollections" of George W. Julian. 
 
 (4665:303:30.) 
 
 406. TRANSLATE. 
 
 18/86. 
 
 V 
 
 "= <\ n </ I > ^\ 
 
 Vr- k 1
 
 LESSON 
 
 NAMES AND NEGATIVES. 
 
 407. KEY. 1. ABCDEFGHIJKLM. 
 2. NOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 3. Burns Barnes 
 Morse Morris Paul Peel Boyle Bailey Greely Gurley. 
 4. Beecher Holmes Carlyle Cicero Gough Hughes Kaincs 
 Moore. 5. Steele Smiles Clay Jones Mirabeau Guizot 
 Byron Hume. 6. Benjamin Brewster Alexander Arnold 
 Bancroft Chesterfield Mitchell Sherman. 7. Shakespeare 
 Webster Emerson Jefferson Hawthorne Napoleon Demos- 
 thenes. 8. Oakland Omaha Boulder Cedar-Rapids Des- 
 Moines Wheeling Topeka. 9. Kansas-City Chambersburg 
 Boston Clinton Waterburg San-Francisco Cleveland. 
 Translate Ls 10-13. 14. Mortal immortal moral immoral 
 legal illegal regular irregular. 15. Immovable illiberal 
 irredeemable immutable unnecessary else-than less-than. 
 
 PBOPEB NAMES. 
 
 408. The following sentence will be found slightly ambig- 
 uous: " J J 
 
 f~) ^ _ \_ -3 x t may be translated, 
 
 "The Monthly's Table of Contents contains another of the 
 dozen poems, also an article on bacon." For " dozen " the 
 reader may insert "Addison," and write "Bacon" with a 
 capital. The correct meaning will then appear. Here the 
 writer should have vocalized Bacon, and underscored Addi- 
 son, as well as Monthly's. Also, if time permitted, Addison 
 should have been interlined in long-hand. Proper names 
 are arbitrary, as to the manner both of spelling and pronun- 
 ciation. The reporter hears new ones every day, and they 
 are likely to give him some trouble. This is partly on ac- 
 count of the fact that names, considered merely as words, 
 have a meaning, as Brown, Bacon, Rice, etc. This meaning 
 has no connection, however, with the subject matter; but the 
 reader is apt at times to confound common and proper 
 
 220
 
 39. 
 
 .\ ) I - v. _ 
 
 /_ r 
 
 r 
 
 15
 
 282 REPORTING STYLE OF SfTORT-HAXD. 
 
 nouns, if the outlines for the latter are not characterized in 
 some way. The underscore, which signifies primarily that a 
 capital is to be used, serves this purpose. There are many 
 proper names, however, which, on account of their meagre 
 outlines, require vocalization; for example, Steele, Clay, 
 Hume, etc. (L 5.) The underscore, however, is not neces- 
 sary when the name is vocalized. (Ls 4 and 5.) Vowels are 
 always to be used if the outline is in the least ambiguous; as, 
 for example, k-pr, which would signify either Cowper, or 
 Cooper. L 3. 
 
 409. If a proper name occurs a number of times in a single 
 report, the writer, particularly if pressed for time, may omit 
 these features, writing the consonant outline merely. Every 
 name that is in any way peculiar should, when practicable, 
 be written in both long-hand and short-hand the first time it 
 occurs in any report. The long-hand gives the spelling, 
 which the short-hand does not do. The short-hand, however, 
 gives the pronunciation, to which it is well known the long- 
 hand often gives hardly a clue. If in Court, for instance, 
 
 Miss K (~ / should be caJ'ed as a witness, and her 
 
 name written in short-hand only, the proper spelling, Coralie 
 Roth, would not be known when the notes came to be tran- 
 scribed. In proper names both the spelling and pronunciation 
 are important, and the name is not expressed entirely unless 
 it is written by both methods. When the spelling cannot be 
 had, the vowels should be written very carefully. 
 
 410. Initial letters are written in the manner indicated 
 in Ls 1 and 2. It is entirely unnecessary, and hence im- 
 proper, in writing names, to place a period, that is, the small 
 cross, after each initial letter. Names that are so common 
 as to be familiar to every one, as New York City, Smith, 
 Chicago, London, etc., need not be either vocalized or under- 
 scored. 
 
 411. Names are so numerous that a vocabulary of them 
 could not well be memorized; and this would be unnecessary,
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 223 
 
 since the practical writer may readily invent sufficiently in- 
 telligible outlines for the most difficult of them. The halving 
 principle, circles, loops, and other adjunctive signs, should 
 be employed more sparingly than when writing common 
 words. 
 
 POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE. 
 
 412. The positive words, sane, temperate, piety, useful, 
 
 vV 
 
 proper, are expressed by the characters q^_/ [~^ 
 
 Mt\ 
 
 The negatives are written v *ix insane, [*~^ intemperate, 
 ~~Y impiety, \^o useless, '~ N \ improper. In most 
 
 eases, as here, the negative is expressed by a prefix or affix 
 attached to the positive word -form. To this rule some ex- 
 ceptions are made in favor of positives which begin with 
 /, r, m or n, negatives of which are formed by prefixing il t 
 ir, im and un, as in legal, illegal, regular, irregular, moral, 
 immoral, necessary, unnecessary. See Ls 14 and 15. It will 
 be observed that while a distinct syllable is prefixed in each 
 case, the consonant elements are not increased; for example, 
 immoral is simply moral with the short t sounded before it. 
 There are three different methods of distinguishing between 
 positives and negatives of this class of words: 
 
 413. 1. By writing the negative in the first position, and 
 the positive in the second, as in mortal, immortal, L 14. 
 Illustrative words: Material immaterial morality immor- 
 ality materialism immaterialism moderate immoderate. 
 
 414. 2. By using up-strokes for the positive, and down- 
 strokes for the negative, as in legal, illegal. Write: Legiti- 
 mate illegitimate logical illogical repressible irrepressible 
 resistible irresistible retrievable irretrievable. 
 
 415. 3. By reduplicating the initial consonant, as in im- 
 movable, illiberal. L 16.
 
 824 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 416. 4. Vowels also are sometimes employed for this 
 purpose in phrases, as in else-than, less-lhan. L J5. 
 
 417. Write: Measurable immeasurable memorial im- 
 memorial nerve unnerve natural unnatural refutable 
 irrefutable reverent irreverent revocable ir-evocable 
 ne'ghborly unneighborly. 
 
 PHRASES. 
 
 418. What-do-you-mean \ve-shall-do whai-extent wh^t- 
 I-ara what-I-desire what-I-find what-I-meant what-I-said 
 what-shall-be what- was-necessary what- would-be-said what- 
 would-be-the which-h as-been who-would-know why-is-it 
 will-be-satistied will-not-be-taken will-not-get-it would- 
 accept would-not-be-respectable would-not-be-responsible 
 a-great-many-of-his ahead-of-you ahead-of-your all-we-wish 
 another-advantage another-day any-more-than-I-can any- 
 way-you-can any-way-at-all because-you-have because-we- 
 have because-we-do because-it-can-be consider-their con- 
 sider-your consider-the-matter consider-that-matter entire- 
 business entire-control entire-season entire-year entirely- 
 different entirely-in-their-hands entirely- (a)-matter entire- 
 ly-in-their-possession for-a-long-time long-while look-into- 
 the-matter satisfactory-way several-months-ago see-what- 
 can-be-done shall-be-pleased several-years-ago short-period 
 take-advantage take-this-occasion take-this-matter when- 
 ever-it-is-convenlent. 
 
 419. EXERCISE 39. 
 
 Vocalize: Beaumont Blair Colton Congreve Dryden 
 Erasmus Hale Hazlitt Knox Martineau Pope Rousseau 
 Seneca Shelley Taylor; (without vowels) Andrews Aris- 
 totle Bentham Bentley Berkeley Blackstone Bolingbroke 
 Burgess Burton Carleton Cervantes Chalmers Channing 
 Clarendon Cobden Coleridge Cromwell Descartes Diogenes 
 Douglas Drummond Erskine Evans Fenelon Francis 
 Fuller Gibbon Goldsmith Harrington Herbert Hogarth 
 Hopkins Hudson Huxley Irving Johnson Juvenal Kings-
 
 REPORTING STYLF OF SHORT-HAND. 28 
 
 ley Lambert Lessing Longfellow Macaulay Mackenzie 
 Mason Meredith Miller Morgan Nelson Parker Pascal 
 Petrarch Plutai'ch Porter Robertson Robinson Rogers 
 Ruskin Russell Sheridan Spurgeon Sterling Strickland 
 Tennyson Turner Voltaire Warburton Warren Wesley 
 W h i p pie Words worth . 
 
 VOCALIZE: Albany Ann Arbor Augusta Austin Beloit 
 Dayton Detroit Dover Elmira Hobokeu Houston Kala- 
 inaxoo La Crosse Mobile Peoria Racine Salem Savannah 
 Syracuse Toledo Troy; (without vowels) Ashland Atchison 
 Athens Atlanta Baltimore Battle Creek Belfast Belleville 
 Bethlehem Bowling Green Bridgeport Brooklyn Buffalo 
 Cambridge Camden Canton Carbondale Central City 
 Chattanooga Chillicothe Columbia Columbus Concord 
 Council Bluffs Crawfordsville Dallas Danville Davenport 
 Dubuque Easton East Saginaw Elgin Evanston Fall-River 
 Fitchburg Foiul-du-Lac Fort Wayne Galesburgh Galveston 
 Georgetown Grand Rapids Hannibal Hartford Haverhill 
 Holyoke Hyde Park Indianapolis Jackson Jersey City 
 Keokuk Lafayette Lancaster Lawrence Leavenworth 
 Leuiston Lexington Little Rock Lockport Memphis Mer- 
 iden Milwaukee Minneapolis Montgomery Muskegon 
 Muscatine Nashville Newark New Bedford New Haven 
 New Orleans Norwich Patterson Pawtucket Petersburgh 
 Philadelphia Pittsburg Portsmouth Poughkeepsie Provi- 
 dence Quincy Richmond Rochester Rock Island Sacra- 
 mento Salt Lake City San Antonio Scranton Shenandoah 
 Springfield St. Joseph St. Louis St. Paul Terre Haute 
 Trenton Utica Vicksburg Waltham Washington Wil- 
 mington Worcester. (2113:302:30.) 
 
 4-20. NEW- YORK, Dec. 5th, 1886. 
 
 Mu. CHAS. C. FRENCH, 
 
 Dear-Sir: With cordial acknowledgments for-past favors, 
 the-undersigned respectfully solicits contributions of-private- 
 ly received marine and-commercial news. 
 
 Our members, representing as they-do most of-the ocean 
 commerce of-the country, are daily receiving from-their cor-
 
 826 REPORTING STYLE OF SnORT-HAXD. 
 
 respondents a-large mass of advanced marine information 
 arrivals, sailings, charters, clearances, disasters, vessels in 
 port, etc. 
 
 The Maritime Exchange, as the-chief bureau of-marine 
 news in-the United-States, is naturally the-central point 
 where-such early intelligence should-be collected and-clu^-i- 
 fied. Its daily accumulation there will-not only benefit the- 
 members at large, but strengthen the-resources of-the a--<>- 
 ciation, in- which each member is interested. Its subsequent 
 publication will, moreover, prove a-boon to-the families of- 
 the crews. 
 
 Blanks to facilitate reports will-be gladly sent on applica- 
 tion. 
 
 By-order of-the board-(of)-directors. 
 
 F. W. HOTJGHTON, 
 Superintendent. 
 (1501:451.) 
 
 421. TRANSLAifc. 
 
 y "T 
 
 \_ ^ V- ' 
 
 ,C<r 
 
 NOTE. As a matter of convenience, and for the purpose 
 of equalizing the speed in dictating, the remaining Exercises 
 are marked in the following manner: Full-faced figures, 
 (1), (2), (3), etc., are used to set off portions of the Exercise 
 which are to be read in the same number of minutes. The 
 work of a minute, also, is subdivided into quarters by accent- 
 thus, first quarter 7 ; second quarter"; third quarter" 7 . 
 
 _ - -_ _ _ . - ~~~*
 
 LESSON XL. 
 
 EXPEDIENTS AND PUNCTUATION. 
 
 422. What is termed an expedient belongs properly to 
 phraseography. It is a very special, and somewhat arbitrary, 
 mode of phrasing. The utility of the expedients here pre- 
 sented is confined mainly to a few particular branches of 
 reporting, but may occasionally be employed by every writer. 
 
 423. 1. OF-THE. These words may be expressed by placing 
 two word-forms in close proximity to each other. This ex- 
 pedient, however, should be used only for the expression of 
 very common phrases, or groups of words, such as, wealth- 
 of-the-nalion,importance-of-the-subject, etc. SeeLl. Write: 
 Season-of-the-year day-of-the-week speech-of-the-president 
 day-of-the-month question-of-the-day subject-of-the-debate. 
 
 424. 2. FROM-TO. The prepositions from and to, when 
 they occur in the class of phrases exemplified in L 2, are ex- 
 pressed by the fact of proximity, similar to L 1. The essen- 
 tial difference between these two expedients is that in L 1 the 
 two words are different from each other, while in L 2 it is al- 
 ways the same word repeated. Write: From-street-to-street 
 from-State-to-State from-sea-to-sea from-door-to-door. 
 
 425. 3. AFTER. Writing one character near and some- 
 what below the preceding signifies that after is to be supplied, 
 as in day-after-day, L 3. 
 
 426. 4. BY. Writing a word somewhat above, but near 
 the preceding, indicates that by is to be supplied, as in L 4. 
 In Ls 3 and 4 it will be observed that the second word of each 
 phrase is always a repetition of the first. 
 
 427. 5. SCRIPTURAL AND OTHER REFERENCES. The^oojfc 
 or Volume is indicated by a figure in the first position, the 
 Chapter by a figure in the second position, and the Verse or 
 Section by a figure in the third position. See L 5. This ex- 
 pedient is quite essential in some branches of reporting. 
 Write: Exodus, 13 chap., 8 verse; 2 Kings, 3 chap., 16 verse; 
 Matthew, 6 chap., 6 verse; Carlyle's French Revolution, vol. 
 3, chap. 9, sec. 12; (referring to law report^ 60 New York, 
 page 160, paragraph 3. 
 
 227-
 
 228 REPORTING STYLE Of SHORT HAXD. 
 
 428. 6. SOCIETY. The letter ) s, struck through the pre- 
 ceding stem, signifies Society. SeeLG. Write: Geo)ogic;il- 
 Society Philological-Society Sewing-Society Literary-*" 
 ciety American-Bible-Society American-Tract-Society As- 
 tronomical-Society Geographical-Society Foreign-Mission- 
 ary-Society. 
 
 429. 7. COMPANY. In a similar manner an intersecting 
 k indicates Company. L 7. Write: American-Oil-Com- 
 pany Rolling-Mill-Company Manufacturing-Company Amer- 
 ican-Express-Company British- American-Fur-Compan.y 
 Mexican-Central-Railroad-Company. 
 
 430. 8. ASSOCIATION. An intersecting ^J sh is employed 
 to express Association. See L 8. Write: Ticket-Brokers'- 
 Association State-Editorial-Association Bankers'-Association 
 Firemen's Association County-Fair-Association. 
 
 431. KEY. 1. Hour-of-the-day wealth-of-the-riation im- 
 portance-of-the-subject solemnity-of-the-occasion death-of- 
 the-king merits-of-the-case. 2. From-house-to-house from- 
 town-to-town from-place-to-place from-day-to-day from- 
 time-to-time from-hand-to-hand from-year-to-year. 3. Day- 
 after-day week-after-week month-after-month State-after- 
 State year-after-year volume-after-volume hour-after-hour. 
 4. Day-by-day page-by-page word-by-word sentence-by- 
 sentence step-by-step inch-by-inch. 5. 1 Corinthians, 3 
 chap., 16 v.; 2 Peter, 1 chap., 7 v. ; Gibbon's History, vol. 3, 
 chap. 40, sec. 4. 6. Phonetic-Society Historical-Society 
 Medical-Society Stenographic-Society Philosophical-Society 
 Short-Hand-Society. 7. Railroad-Company Lumber-Com- 
 pany Coal-Company Mining-Company Publishing-Company 
 Canal-Company. 8. Iron-Dealer's-Association Liquor- 
 Dealer's- Association Young-Men's-Christian-Association 
 American-Ball-Club-Association Teachers'-Association. 
 Translate Ls 9-18. 
 
 PHRASES. 14. First-instant for-some-time-past official- 
 correspondence sent-by-last-mail telegraphic-communica- 
 tions. 15. Your-last-letter because-you-can-be monthly-
 
 Plate 40*
 
 via 
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAXD. 
 
 statement much-as-we-can much-larger much-worse-than 
 real-estate. 
 
 MARKS OF PUNCTUATION. 
 
 Periods. 
 
 i Semi-colon. 
 
 7 
 
 ! 
 
 Interrogation. 
 Exclamation. 
 
 Parenthesis. 
 
 X Underscore. 
 ~ Hyphen. 
 i Quotation. 
 
 I Accent. 
 
 Asterisk. Q__^ Parenthetical Ellipse. 
 
 433. The dot, or long-hand period, cannot be employed in 
 short-hand on account of contiict with the dot-sign for a and 
 and. Partly to avoid such conflict, and partly to secure 
 more facile signs, punctuation marks differing somewhat 
 from those in common use are employed in short-hand. As 
 to the period, the reporter may choose for himself. The first 
 is the most artistic, but the second and third are quicker 
 written. The sign for laughter is made use of in reporting 
 speeches and conventions. To avoid conflict with the hori- 
 zontal marks used in long-hand, two and tliree lines (instead 
 of one and two), are employed in reporting to signify italics 
 and capitals. The accent mark, written just below any part 
 of an outline, signifies that the syllable so marked is to be 
 accented, or italicised, as in the sentences: 
 
 "r 
 
 " I said wn-necessary, not necessary.'
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 231 
 
 "She softly exclaimed, Good-ness!" The parenthetical ellipse 
 is employed when a few words only are to be enclosed. 
 
 434. These marks are used mostly in correspondence and 
 composition; only to a limited extent in actual reporting. 
 In rapidly taken notes tie semi-colon is indicated by a space 
 of an inch or more. When notes are taken at verbatim 
 speed, little opportunity is allowed for punctuating, the only 
 practical method being to leave spaces to correspond with 
 the speaker's pauses, and insert the proper marks afterwai'ds 
 when transcribing. 
 
 PHRASES. 
 
 435. After-train-time be-good-enough by-wire cannot- 
 account cannot-answer cannot-do-so first-intimation fur- 
 ther-particulars further- reply great-delay I-am-in-corre- 
 pondence I-have-sent-it I-have-telegraphed in-certain -cases 
 in-my-letter little-danger many-circumstances money- 
 market my-letter send-a-telegram no-account no-intention 
 official-statement other-circumstances referring-to-my-letter 
 sample-cases short-notice since-received state-reasons to- 
 have-that-sent uuder-the-circumstances under-the-circum- 
 stances-(of-the)-case under-peculiar-circumstances very- 
 correct very-good-character very-important-letter we-are- 
 in-correspondence we-are-in-communication we-have-sent 
 your-letter your-reply your-telegram. 
 
 436. EXERCISE 40. 
 
 NEW-YORK, August 1, 1888. 
 
 W. H. POWERS, ESQ., Prsgr. Agt. W., St. L. & P. R. R., 
 Toledo, O. 
 
 Dear- Sir/ The-efforts of -this committee looking to -reform 
 in-the-methods of conducting passenger business have-been 
 to-a-certain-extent unfavorably affected," and in-some-cases 
 neutralized by-the action of-roads beyond-the territory 
 traversed by-their-lines, who continue to pay large sums' 77 
 in commissions to-agents and-ticket brokers in-the-east, 
 whereby the-proper distribution of-the business between our- 
 own companies is threatened (1).
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-IJAXD. 
 
 The-time has arrived when, on-account of-the peculiar 
 geographical aspects of-the territory traversed by-these 
 lines, it-is-impossible' for- them to carry out the-reform they- 
 have attempted, with-justice to-each-other, so-long as-tlic 
 lines in-the-west and-south" beyond-the territory referred 
 to continue to-pursue their-present methods. 
 
 The-committee believe that connecting lines are anxious 
 to-be relieved 7 " of-the-expense attaching to-a condition of 
 war, whether carried on under-the forms of war or peace. 
 They have-made-a strong (2) effort to stop the-payment of 
 commissions at differential fare points in-the-t-a-t : they ob- 
 ject decidedly to-other lines continuing a-practice' which 
 tends to-render their efforts abortive, and-they urgently re- 
 quest that-you refrain from-the payment of commissions at 
 those points/' They-will highly appreciate your support 
 and-co-operation. 
 
 Enclosed herewith please-find copy of resolutions and rules 
 of-the committee. Will-you kindly" 7 acknowledge receipt, 
 ami-advise the-committee whether your company will coin- 
 ply with their wishes in-this-regard? 
 Yours-truly, 
 
 S. F. PIERSON, Vice-Chairman. (3) 
 (27732.) 
 
 LESSON XLI. 
 
 NUMBERS, SPECIAL RULES, AND SUGGESTIONS. 
 EXPRESSION OF NUMBERS. 
 
 437. Numbers are expressed in the usual manner mainly, 
 that is, by the Arabic numerals, 1, 2, 3, 4, etc. In the num- 
 ber 671, the figure 6, by virtue of its position .(in the hun- 
 dred's place), expresses six-hundred. This arrangement 
 gives figures an immense advantage, in the way of brevity, 
 over written numbers; thus, 671 six-hundred and seventy-- 
 one There is no pressing need for any different method of 
 expressing numbers, since the present method is already as
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 short as short -hand itself. This is shown by the fact that a 
 column of figures can be written as fast as the numbers are 
 distinctly called off. The form of some of the figures could 
 be simplified; but it is hardly necessary. A few of them 
 when standing alone should be expressed in short-hand 
 characters, as 1, 2, 3, 10, etc. L 1. Round numbers also can 
 be expressed more briefly by short-hand symbols, as 2,000, 
 12,000. See Ls 1-6. 
 
 SI ^CIAL RULES. 
 
 438. Signs of unimportant or obscure consonant sounds 
 are often omitted, as g from longest, k from distinction. L 7. 
 Such omissions are only the more safe when several conso- 
 nants still remain in the word-form. 
 
 The exigency of joining stems together not infrequently 
 renders it impossible to form -the hooks in a perfect manner, 
 as, for example, shn in sectional, n in panic, I in cable. (See 
 L 8.) Sometimes the hook is not written at all, only indi- 
 cated (by an offset or otherwise), as r in destroy, I in explain, 
 etc. L 9. At certain junctures the circle necessarily be- 
 comes a loop, as in counsel. In jail, j is written more up- 
 rigid, and I with less curvature; otherwise j-l, if written 
 
 strictly according to rule, would appear thus, ff The same 
 observation applies also to assail, and many similar com- 
 binations. Angularity and facility require that certain 
 stems, when joined, must undergo some slight change in 
 their formation in oi-der to be adjusted to each other. To 
 illustrate, n and m are curved less when combined with t or 
 d, either preceding or following; and more, when attached 
 to k or g. See knotty, tiny, nick, etc. L 11. 
 
 439. In a few instances ) cst is struck upwards, as in 
 gravest. L 12. Iss-hay, though rarely occurring, may be 
 expressed by changing the hook to a circle, as in soho. L 12. 
 The st-loop is rarely written with half-length letters. When 
 so applied it should be written fully two-thirds the length 
 oi the stem. The large loop is never so applied. rhr-hook
 
 834 REPORTING STYLE OF" SriOItT-HAXD. 
 
 is sometimes expressed in phrases by a back-stroke, as in 
 triple consonants. For example, Ihis-property, tliis-courtf, 
 L 12. 
 
 440. KEY. 1. One two thru six ten twelve hundred 
 thousand million billion. 2. First second third fourth 
 sixth tenth twelfth hundredth thousandth millionth. 
 3. 100,000 2,000 G.JJO 1/200 ten-hundred one-million three- 
 billion. 4. Tnree-tenth.s one-hundredth two-thoussndthfl 
 a-thousand-millions one-tenth the-second-hundred tlie- 
 millionth-part. 5. Ton -or- twelve three-or-four twenty 
 sixtieth thirty forty fifty sixty-five hundredths. 6. 210, UK) 
 75,030,000 3,000,000,000 500 13,187,000. 7. Longest dis- 
 tinction sanction function suggestion Northampton trans- 
 pose. 8. Sectional panic ungainly defer cable manager 
 engraving. 9. Destroy pistol explain explicit density 
 counsel rapaciously jail assail. 10. Set sick safe t;i<k 
 excessive settle suffer mechanism chronicle. 11. Knotty 
 tiny nick canny Mattie Tommy mock calm. 12. Gra\ < <t 
 nicest insurrectionist best-table best-time nice-scene soho 
 tins-property this-course. 13. Strive strife prize price 
 lays hu-e prizes prices fashion fusion raised. 
 
 PIIKASES. 14. Nevertheless-you-can great-majority-of- 
 cascs nuaierous-letters number-of-claims what-have-you- 
 to-say fellow-citizens. 15. Just-taken attorney-general 
 examination-in-chief honorable-court law-office Circuit- 
 Court under-all-the-circumstances-of-the-case. 
 
 441. A fact in pronunciation, which is buj, rarely observed, 
 is this: An initial consonant ordinarily is not sounded, 
 when the preceding word ends with the same element; a- /, 
 for example, in best-lime, best-table, or & in book-keeper, pro- 
 nounced bestime, bestable, bookeeper. The chief difference 
 between fine-night, -And finite, is that the first syllable infinite 
 is accented, while in fine-night, each word has its separate 
 accent. To some extent this fact may safely be taken advan- 
 tage of in phrasing, as in best-time, L 12. 
 
 442. The sub-vocals v, z and d, in rare cases, and when 
 really necessary, may be distinguished from their cognates
 
 9 t 
 
 / c^^ xl 
 
 c ( 
 
 Jj 
 
 10 f 
 
 J C ^ 
 
 ( 
 
 13 
 
 I y^ X\ 
 
 T )- 
 
 6-\ 
 
 V 
 
 12 
 
 14 
 
 \ 
 
 Y
 
 236 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 f, s, and t, by the shading of a hook, loop, or circle, as in 
 strive, prize, lays, prizes, L 13. 
 
 443. The so called circles iss and sez are, in fact, never 
 entirely round, for the reason that the stems to which they 
 are joined form a part of them. See set, sick, etc. L 10. 
 The circle always becomes a small loop when written wilhin 
 a hook, as in settle, suffer, etc. In rare cases two hooks may 
 be written together, as in chronicle, L 10. 
 
 4*44. The professional reporter is allowed certain licence* 
 which should not, however, be taken by the student. In 
 rapid writing he may give the letters a less degree of slant 
 or curvature, omit shading to a greater or less extent, and 
 occasionally write words out of position. Every writer in 
 time becomes familiar with those inaccuracies which are 
 peculiar to himself; but it should be his constant aim to keep 
 as near the standard as possible, in order that the legibility of 
 difficult passages may not be endangered, and that others 
 also may be able to read his notes. 
 
 LIMIT OP INACCURACY. Even in fast reporting the sten- 
 ographer should avoid writing any word so far wrong as 
 that it may appear to be an entirely different word. 
 
 445. LARGE OR SMALL "HAND." The reporter, when 
 pressed, writes larger than at other times. Some persons 
 take this to be an evidence that a large hand is the most 
 rapid. It proves just the contrary. The really skilful sten- 
 ographer, when writing at high speed, is not flurried, and 
 writes about as small a hand as usual. There can be no 
 question but that the greatest speed will be attained ultimate!;/ 
 only by writing the characters near each other, cultivating a 
 neat style, and writing as small a hand as practicable. 
 
 446. Professional reporters commonly use note-books 
 manufactured expressly for the purpose. Not only are these 
 better suited to this work, but greater ease in writing is at- 
 tained by using books which are uniform as to size of page, 
 width of ruling, and quality of paper. 
 
 .47. All stenographic notes, no matter for what purpose 
 taken, should be tiled, indexed, and carefully preserved for
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 237 
 
 several years. The contingencies are many which may ren- 
 der a transcript of a portion of these very valuable. 
 
 448. No stenographer can afford to disregard certain gen- 
 eral directions which relate to the mechanical part of his 
 profession. He should use paper distinctly ruled, and the 
 best quality only. A good fine pointed, short-nibbed gold 
 pen, of medium size, is the best for reporting purposes-. 
 This should be more or less elastic, dependent on the writer's 
 lightness of touch. Good writing fluid is preferable to ink. 
 
 449. When the reporter writes with a pencil, he shou.d 
 obtain one of medium hardness only, keep it sharpened, 
 and use it with soft or uncalendered paper. For general 
 purposes it is better to use a pen; the pencil in exceptional 
 cases only. In every respect it will be observed that the 
 pen and pencil differ from each other. The question as to 
 the relative merits of each for reporting purposes has been 
 discussed to a considerable extent by members of the pro- 
 fession. Those reporters who employed a pencil while 
 learning, never afterwards giving the pen a fair trial, of 
 course regard the pencil with the greater favor. Of those 
 who have fairly tested both, the majority prefer the pen. 
 The advantages of each may be seen from the following 
 comparison of 
 
 450. PEN AND PENCIL. 
 
 1. The pen must be dipped, the pencil sharpened. 
 
 2. For the pen an inkstand must be provided, or the 
 "fountain" tilled; a number ot pencils must be sharpened 
 beforehand. 
 
 3. The pen is elastic, and is used on a hard surface; the 
 pencil is inelastic, and should be used on a soft surface, or 
 springy tablet. 
 
 4. A pen-drawn line is uniform; the pencil's point is con- 
 tinually grinding off, and hence does not serve so well to 
 indicate light and shade. 
 
 5 More skill or training is required to handle the pen; 
 most people already know the use of a pencil, which is simple.
 
 238 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAXD. 
 
 6. Pen-work is permanent; pencil-writing fades out in a 
 few years. 
 
 7. Notes ' ^ken with a pen are black and easy to read; 
 pencil-writing is hard on the eyes, and for this one important 
 reason a pencil should be used as little as possible. 
 
 8. Writing with a gold pen, which is a yielding, sensitive 
 instrument, is much less fatiguing than manipulating a pen- 
 cil, which is stiff and inflexible. 
 
 451. BOOKS AND MATERIAL RECOMMENDED. 
 
 Our Short-Hand Pocket Dictionary contains over six 
 thousand words beautifully engraved, and every writer of 
 this system ought to possess a copy. Pitman's Phrase Book 
 is also very useful, and ought to be copied through by the 
 learner several times. Humphrey's Manual of Type-writing, 
 from which a number of the business letters used as exen 
 in this present book were taken, with the kind consent of 
 the author, is the foremost work on the subject, and it ought 
 to be used by every operator of a writing machine. " One 
 Hundred Valuable Suggestions to Short-hand Students" con- 
 tains many practical hints, and is adapted, also, to dictation 
 purposes. The "Reporting Style" Practice Books, designed 
 to accompany this work, are manufactured from a good 
 quality of paper, properly ruled, and of a suitable size. 
 An inferior quality of writing material should not be 
 made use of in any case. The best quality of fools-cap is 
 recommended to those who do not use specially prepared 
 paper. Fountain pens are coming into use. These have 
 been much improved of late, and several brands will be 
 found sufficiently reliable for short-hand purposes. While a 
 good fountain pen may be a convenience, it will not, consid- 
 ered as an aid to speed, be found of any special value, since 
 an ordinary dip of ink will easily write three hundred words. 
 These pens were originally made for the convenience of per- 
 sons who wished to carry ink in their pocket. For easy and 
 rapid work, the pen should be of gold, short nibbed and 
 shai > pointed. For reporting purposes, and advanced prac-
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 230 
 
 tice also, a writing fluid, as Arnold's or Carter's, is better 
 than ink, which is apt to be too thick or heavy. 
 
 Professor Morris' books on phrasing well merit the atten- 
 tion of students of all systems. Stenographers who wish to 
 know their business well, and keep abreast the times, will 
 subscribe for two or three of the best periodicals devoted to 
 their profession. It is suggested that students in want of 
 material apply to the dealer, from whon this book was 
 obtained for information and prices. 
 
 PHRASES. 
 
 452. After-many-inquiries after-you-have-been after-the- 
 matter after-the-question bad-account can-you-make dif- 
 ferent-varieties during-the-year ever-since-you-have-been 
 express-purpose for-another-purpose for-my-part may-their 
 much-as-I-desire much-as-we-desire much-pleased no-hurry- 
 about promissory-note quite -probable quite-sure quite- 
 sure-there-are real-estate-broker remember-that-we took- 
 possession very-certain very-certain-about-it very-good- 
 man very-good-quality very-necessary we-have-no-objec- 
 tions we-hope-that-you-can -we-will-name-you. 
 
 453. EXERCISE 41. 
 
 DO SOME PRACTICAL WORK FOR SOME BUSINESS MAN. 
 From "One Hundred Valuable Suggestions to Short-Hand 
 
 Students." To be phrased. ~" 
 
 The best kind of practice the student can have, after he 
 has learned the principles, is that which approaches most 
 nearly' to the kind of work he will be obliged to do in actual 
 reporting. Business men, in fact, prefer those who" have 
 had some practical experience, and in order to be able to 
 satisfy them that you are not a mere beginner/" you should 
 secure some actual practice just for the experience it will 
 give. Go to some business man who has more (1) or less 
 correspondence, and offer to take all his letters for awhile 
 without wages. You can well afford to do this.' In the first 
 place, you would be fitting yourself for the actual work in
 
 240 REPORTING STYLE OF SlfORT-HAXD. 
 
 the most thorough and practical manner possible/' If your 
 work is satisfactory, and you ought not to expect a paying 
 position until it is, it would be much'" easier to secure a 
 situation, and to fill it acceptably, than you might otherwise 
 hope to do. Another advantage that often arises (2) from 
 such a course is in causing the man for whom you work to 
 learn to appreciate the advantages of short-hand/ and in 
 this way, cause a demand for your own employment, or for 
 that of some other short-hand writer/' (215^-'>-30 1:30.) 
 
 LESSON XLII. 
 RULES FOR PHRASING. 
 
 454. KEY. 1. (Simple phrases.) Shall-have have-been 
 saves-time good-men many-good-men men-of-action some- 
 men-of-nerve begin-immediately. 2. (Simple sentence.) 
 The-old-gentleman, who-was-president (of-the) First-Nation- 
 al-Bank, immediately gave-the-money to-the manager (of -the) 
 Pennsylvania-Railroad-Company, who-was-standing in-tlie 
 bank-parlor at-the-time. 8. (Omitted consonants.) Most- 
 likv'ly fishing-tackle general-breakdown Trans-continental* 
 Railway-Co. 4. (Omitted words.) Promise-to-pay by-the- 
 law-ol-the-survival-of-the-fittest day-of-the-month change- 
 of-the-weather what-is-your-business where-do-you-reside. 
 5. (Lengthened outlines.) They-still men's-strength short- 
 stop served-his-time per-minute serve-their-purpose jury- 
 man gentlemen-of-the-jury per-annum. 6. (Lengthened 
 phrases.) Shall-not-have some-one-that was-not-keeping 
 for-there-came may-there-be their-own-safety may-it-be. 
 7 (Variable letters; Coin and Con.) This-will-make shall- 
 merely store-door do-you-wish such-as-will-not you-should- 
 not-condemn you-will-contrive they-may-well-complain. 
 8. (Position words.) For-no-time in-every-part the-samc- 
 raan I-shall-sue-him many-things love-him. 9. (Position 
 j words vocalized.) In-any-even t in-no-event it-is-for-me
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. S41 
 
 it-is-my-own-copy rather-than-hope for-some-men. 10. (Con- 
 tracted phrases.) In-reply-to takes-us will-there-be at-first 
 it-\\ ill-not at-all which-are in-regard-to. 
 
 PHRASES. 11. Trust-that-you-will venture-to-say we-may- 
 have we-tbink-there-is we-will-order day-of- the- week rnust- 
 at-knowledge. 12. Must-also must-always obliged-to-give 
 subject-to-my-order two-or-three-times we-have-no-knowl- 
 edge-of-the-matter. 13. Able-to-collect able-to-realize ac- 
 cording-to-the-letter according-to-the-instruction any-kind- 
 of-business at-the-same-rate. 14. We-want-to-know cer- 
 tain-class-of -goods I-am-a\vare-of-the-fact just-received- 
 your-letter-of-recommendation as-per-my-order. 15. Ac- 
 cording-to-agreerueut according-to-his-agreement accord- 
 ing-to-contract receive-their-letter by-some-other-nrm 
 within-a-day-or-so. 
 
 455. The student has already, by the faculty of imitation, 
 learned in a general way how to connect words together into 
 phrases. Specific rules are needed, however, as a safe guide 
 to good practice. The learner, who is now advanced, will 
 apprehend the meaning, and understand the application of 
 such rules. But it cannot be said that the student has mas- 
 tered this or any other subject until the underlying principle 
 has been grasped. This, in an incidental way, we shall aim 
 to state. An elaborate treatise will not, of course, be looked 
 for within the limits of a single lesson. Phrasing is a science 
 of itself. It has been characterized as an "Art within an 
 art." It bears a similar relation to the broad subject of 
 Short-hand, that Algebra does to the general subject of 
 Mathematics, for instance, or that State government in our 
 country sustains to the National. .To short-hand it is the 
 linishing touch, a kind of internal perfection. By it speed is 
 increased, and legibility added to. 
 
 That there is a gain in joining words to some extent is ad- 
 mitted on all sides. It is true, however, that there exists a 
 diversity of opinion amongst the best writers and teachers 
 touching the extent to which phrase-writing can profitably 
 be carried. The objectors point to the example of many old
 
 243 REPORT 7.\O STYLE OF SHORT-HAXD. 
 
 stenographers, experience-i and successful in their profes- 
 sion, who phrase but little. These facts carry a certain 
 force; they are valuable evidence of at least one of the possi- 
 bilities of the art, showing what can be done with simple 
 short-hand, unstrenglhcned by the phrase. When short-hand 
 was learned by our earlier reporters, phrasing was a new 
 thing, and its correct use unknown. Most of the successful 
 stenographers of to-day employ phrasing habl.^ally, and 
 connect words according to certain well settled rutes. 
 
 The statement needs no proof that words can be phrased 
 in less time than they can be written separately. Every 
 pen-lifting costs nearly half a second, or the loss of a word. 
 The obvious advantage of joining is proved by the universal 
 custom of connecting together all letters of each word when 
 writing long-hand. Copy this sentence, writing each letter 
 separately: " T-h-i-s i-s a s-l-o-w w-a-y o-f w-r-i-t-i-n-g " 
 
 Why, then, ought not an entire discourse to be reported 
 without a single break, or lifting of the pen? As a means of 
 getting hold of our subject, we will assume that all words are 
 to bz joined together when short-hand notes are taken. The 
 exceptions to this broad rule we sum up as follows: 
 
 436. 1. SENTENCES. Phrasing is designed partly as an 
 aid to legibility, which is a matter of no less importance than 
 speed itself. But joining words together would be a draw- 
 back to legibility, unless some kind of correspondence be- 
 tween the manner of phrasing and the structure of language 
 were expressed by the short-hand notes themselves. To 
 illustrate, at the close of a sentence the speaker comes to a 
 full stop. He has expressed a complete thought. There is 
 here, as there should be, a corresponding break in the phrase. 
 In short-hand the words of two separate sentences should 
 never be written connectedly. Hence it would be improper to 
 express the two sentences, "They-make-money.-They-love-it," 
 
 by the connected phrase, (s-^^-\_* .* Likewise the 
 
 expression, Jl "He-is-done.-He-may-go," is wrong.
 
 944 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 457. SUBJECT AND PRFDICATE. It is well established 
 that the subject of a sentence and its verb should not be 
 joined. The subject and its modifiers form a complete part, 
 or member of the sentence, as do also the verb and its modi- 
 fiers. For this reason they should be kept separate. The 
 two words, for example, composing the sentence, "Dogs 
 bark," should under no circumstances be connected. A pro- 
 noun, on the contrary, is always joined to its verb, as I-do, 
 they-make, we-have. Ambiguity would result not infrequent- 
 ly from the practice of joining nouns and their verbs, as, for 
 
 example, the character, I clocks-tick, could also be 
 
 read, clock-stick. 
 
 458. COMPOUND SUBJECT. In the sentence "Corn, beans 
 and potatoes are raised in abundance," the three words corn, 
 beans and potatoes, of which the subject is composed, should 
 not be connected. The same rule applies to the compound pre- 
 dicate, as in the sentence," The patriot soldier fought, bled, 
 and died for his country," the verbs fought, bled, and died, 
 are written separately. 
 
 459. RELATED WORDS. Take the sentence "Having raised 
 another army, the general hastened to relieve. the city"; here the 
 words "army the general", should not be connected, for the 
 important reason that there is no gramatical relation be- 
 tween army and t he. For the same reason, chairs, baskets, and 
 knives, should not be phrased in the sentence, "He keeps 
 chairs, baskets, and knives for sale." The rule is that two or 
 more words, not sustaining some relation of government 
 or modification, should not be connected together. 
 
 460. LENGTH.' Experience shows that writing long phrases 
 occasions loss instead of gain in time. The reason is that 
 when the pen is applied to the paper the hand, wrist and 
 forearm are so fixed, or stationed, that it is very inconven- 
 ient to move the pen along more than one or two inches of 
 space without re-stationing the hand and arm. Indeed, for 
 most persons it is inconvenient to write a character much 
 more than half an inch in length. An attempt to copy the
 
 BEPORTiyG STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 245 
 
 following joined letters without pausing, will serve more J 
 forcibly to impress this truth: 
 
 veuience would suggest that this combination be broken in- 
 to three equal parts, of which one would be ^_^ tf^^ \__p 
 Most persons have experienced this inconvience when writ- 
 ing lengthy words in long-hand. Long phrases are a pos- 
 itive drawback. 
 The difficulty in executing them may be illustrated by the 
 
 phrase ~" v ~' ^ ^ ^ ^_^^_^ v^x^ He-kept- 
 
 coming-and-going-and-going-and-coming-many -many-years. 
 
 Young reporters sometimes go to the absurd extreme of 
 writing as many words in a single phrase as can be made 
 hang together. An illustration is found in the following scn- 
 tance of thirty-nine words, which it is possible to write 
 connectedly: I-think-it-is-quite-likely-that-we-will-leave-for- 
 America - before - very - many - more-months-and-you-will-then- 
 havc-no-difficulty-whatever-in-getting-all - the - knowledge you - 
 may-want-in-regard-to-that-wonderful-land. 
 
 461. ANGULARITY. Inconvenient joinings, also those pro- 
 ducing obtuse or insufficient angles, are not permissible. On 
 this account the following expressions cannot be phrased: 
 Do-not tell, pay up, than they, one people, construction train, 
 great expense, do-not go, capital gossip, upon-his honor, find 
 it, have-not found. 
 
 462. CONSONANT POSITION. To some extent phrasing is 
 limited by the requirements of consonant position. Illustra- 
 
 tior : ^ __ Have-no-ttme should be phrased always 
 
 while ^_ l^-x Have any-time sometimes cannot be; 
 in-every-part, } in-every particular; lrv^~^ the-same- 
 
 ** 
 
 man, 5~N 
 
 the-same men; ^ I-shall-sue-him,
 
 246 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 s P 
 
 I-shall see-him; ^-\_^ many things, ^~^_xs^p many- 
 languages. The point here is that the phrase must some- 
 times be broken in order that first and third position worus 
 may be in their place, thus relieving the notes from ambi- 
 guity. Whether a given word may, for the sake of a phi 
 be written out of position, is a question purely of context and 
 circumstances. The reporter who pays attention to what he 
 is writing, can tell in a moment whether legibility demands 
 the phrase to be broken on account of a position word. He 
 must exercise common sense and judgment. Since phra.ses 
 are broken on account of first and third position words, it is 
 for that very reason never necessary to do so on account of 
 any second position word. All connected words are pre- 
 sumed to belong on the line, unless the requirements of sense 
 plainly indicate otherwise. In L 8 it would, under some 
 circumstances, become necessary to break the connection, if 
 in the first phrase any occurred in the place of no, or partic- 
 ular in the place of part; man in place of men; see in place 
 of sue; language in place of things; or me in place of him. 
 
 463. UNUSUAL WORDS. Words not frequently used 
 are written disconnectedly. For example, the expressions, 
 mucilage bottle, cylindrical column, habitual drunkard, mtrry 
 girls, should not be phrased. A very few common short 
 words, such as pronouns, prepositions, and conjunctions, may 
 be attached to unusual words, as in the-middling, the-indubit- 
 able, or-California, was-revised. 
 
 ADVANTAGES. 
 
 464. SPEED. The gain in speed, Resulting from the dimin- 
 ished number of pen-liftings, is obvious. Write the phnt>; 
 "save-time" rapidly for thirty seconds; then write the two 
 words separately as often as you can in the same length of 
 time. The experiment will show the phrase written six or 
 eight more times in the first trial, which is equivalent to a 
 gain of twenty-five or thirty words in one minute. 
 
 465. LEGIBILITY. Since the grammatical structure of the
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAXD. 247 
 
 sentence is shown in large part by the phraseological group- 
 ing of the words, ease in reading the notes is thereby in- 
 creased to no small extent. Referring to L 2, the first three 
 words, the-old-gentleman, are phrased, because the and old 
 are both modifiers of gentleman. All the words of the clause, 
 who-was-president of-the First- National-Bank, would natur- 
 ally be connected together, but it is broken into two on ac- 
 count of length, and broken in such a manner that of-lhe 
 is expressed by the juxtaposition of the two phrases. On 
 account of angle immediately cannot be joined to gave. 
 Gave-the-money is a good phrase, and it is customary, where 
 convenient, to connect a transitive verb and its object. The 
 propriety of joining words and their modifiers is illustrated 
 by the phrases good-men, men-of-aclion, etc., L 1. Phrasing 
 enables the reader to see at a glance which words are 
 mutually dependent, and which are not. 
 
 466. ACCURACY. Phrasing makes time by saving time. 
 By means of it the writer gains more leisure in which to form 
 the characters with greater precision and skill, thus adding 
 both to the beauty and legibility of his notes. 
 
 167. ABBREVIATION. In phrasing, many single letters 
 and even words are omitted. See most-likely, promise-to-pay, 
 etc., Ls 3 and 4. These phrases are perfectly legible; but it 
 is evident that this legibility would be impaired by such 
 abbreviation, if the words composing such phrases were writ- 
 ten disconnectedly. A phrase may be abbreviated safely, 
 for the same reason that a long word, containing a good 
 number of consonants, may be abbreviated; in each case an 
 abundance of material remains to enable the reader to get 
 at the meaning easily. This is an important point; it is 
 giving to short-hand, by means of phrasing, the advantage 
 of the universal habit, in coloqual discourse, of clipping 
 some words and merging others, when they occur in ex- 
 pressions that are worn and familiar. Ls 11-15. 
 
 468. COMPACTNESS. The fact that in the phrase the 
 words are drawn into the briefest compass, renders it possible 
 for the eye to take them all in at a glance; notes can then be
 
 I 
 
 C4S R EPOR TING STYLE OF SHOE T-ffA .V7). 
 
 read more quickly than when strung out over two or three 
 times the space. Illustrations: We-have-long-been: 
 
 V*_ (^*~ / ^ better, \J \ ; that-it-m:iy-not-U>- 
 as- well-as: | X _ N \ f~ or, 
 
 469. EXPEDIENTS. Many v-ord-fcrms are lengthened, in 
 order that they may be joined m cert^n phrases, as t/iey-xtill, 
 men's-strength. L 5. Certain phrase-signs, also, are written 
 by longer forms, in order to render it practicable for more 
 words to be joined, as in shall-not-have, some-one-that, etc. 
 L 6. In these phrases the n-hook cannot be used for not, 
 one, or own; nor, on account of angularity, can the lengthen- 
 ing or halving principles be used \nfor-there-came, may-it-be, 
 etc. The variable letters, I, r, sh, are struck in either direc- 
 tion in phrases, as angularity may require, as in this-will- 
 make, do-you-wish. L 7. Words beginning with com and 
 con, except a few very frequent ones, are disjoined from the 
 one just preceding, as in you-should-not condemn. L 7. 
 
 Position words are sometimes vocalized when occurring in 
 phrases. This requires less time than breaking the phi UM\ 
 (See L 9.) The principle of contracting outlines by menus 
 of hooks, circles, loops, lengthening, halving, etc., is also 
 employed to some extent in writing such phrases as in-rcply- 
 
 to, will-there-be, it-will-not. L 10. 
 
 
 
 470. RULES. 
 
 1. Do not construct phrases inconveniently long, or that 
 extend more than two spaces below the line. 
 
 2. Avoid joinings that are unangular; also difficult ones, 
 
 * r 
 
 as be-not-elected, correctly written (. . A difficult join- 
 ing requires more time than breaking the phrase. Adverbs 
 ending in ly are rarely joined to following words. 
 
 3. Words beginning with com and con are rarely attached
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 to preceding words. The fact of separation indicates the 
 prefix, which for this reason need not be written. 
 
 4. A word may occasionally be written by a longer out- 
 line, if this is necessary to render it phraseable* See L 5. 
 
 5. Words only that are comparatively common should be 
 joined together. Unusual words are written disconnectedly. 
 
 6. Never join two words that are separated by a mark of 
 punctuation, nor any set of words not mutually inter-de- 
 pendent, or grammatically related. 
 
 7. As far as practicable connect together a pronoun and 
 its verb; a modifying word or phrase, and the word modified; 
 prepositions and the words they govern; verbs and their 
 objects; conjunctions and the clauses they introduce. 
 
 8. The artistic writer, whose characters are small and 
 well formed, may adopt more lengthy phrases than writers 
 lacking these qualifications. 
 
 9. An assemblage of words making a suitable phrase 
 should invariably be written together; not phrased at one time, 
 and separated at another. 
 
 10. The first word of a phrase, called the leader, is usually 
 given its proper position; but exceptions are sometimes 
 made when it is important that the second word hold its own 
 place, as in -~ his-own, .!!!!1._ give-out. 
 
 11. One, then and own, may be expressed by the n-hook 
 whenever preceded by a word of common occurrence to which 
 such hook may be joined conveniently, as will-have-one, bet- 
 ter-then, my-own. 
 
 12. Of may be expressed by the f-hook in phrases where 
 
 the tick of does not join conveniently, as in T city -of -Bos- 
 ton. 
 
 in P cil 
 
 J 
 
 13. As a rule or and but are not phrased, but may be 
 joined when there is no possibility of conflict with a or and. 
 His is not commonly joined at the beginning of a phrase, as 
 his business, written disconnectedly. 
 
 14. It is indispensable tnat tne student form the habit of
 
 250 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND 
 
 writing the words connectedly, always within the limits 
 above specified. This habit can never come from mere r< '</ 
 ing, or even study. Much actual writing is ncaxsdry. IV r- 
 haps the best plan would be to copy all the phrases in this 
 book; afterwards taking up a standard phrase-book, and 
 systematically writing it through several times. 
 
 15. The advanced writer may with propriety adopt an 
 abridged outline for a difficult or unusual set of words, 
 which happens to be of frequent occurrence in the particular 
 report he is making. 
 
 PHRASES. 
 
 471. A-good-many-of-our as-quick-as-possible as-many- 
 as-possible cash-business cash-trade certain-of-their cer- 
 tain-of-your certain-questions dear-brother dear-friend 
 did-not-understand-the-matter did-not-understand-it-so did- 
 not - undertake extra -long during-the-existence extra- 
 pains necessary-delay on-account-of-having sometime-ago 
 some-reason-for-this special-order spring-trade sum-and- 
 substance understand-that -you understund-that-we we-are- 
 anxious we-are-anxiotis-to-have-you we-are-always we-are- 
 aware we-are-in-need we-do-not-think-you-can. 
 
 472. EXERCISE 42. 
 KEEP YOUR OWT* COUNSEL. 
 
 From "One Hundred Valuable Suggestions." To be phrased. 
 The Stenographer, like everybody else, must, in a certain 
 sense, be a machine. This arises from the fact that in many 
 cases' confidential matter of. the greatest importance is often 
 dictated to him, and unless he exerts the utmost care, he will 
 be apt, inadvertently" it may be, to betrays knowledge of 
 his employer's affairs to those who would take advantage of 
 H Again, it frequently'" occurs in some kinds of business 
 thit the Stenographer is approached for the special purpose 
 of persuading him to make known his (1) employer's inten- 
 tions or plans. Attempts may even be made to bribe him in 
 order to secure the desired information. Aside from the
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 251 
 
 moral phase of the question, the Stenographer can, by no 
 means, afford to betray his employer's secrets to others. 
 Once let it be" proven that he has done such a thin and his 
 prospects as a reporter will be ruined. 
 
 Morally it is wrong, and financially'" it is a losing invest- 
 ment. If you find that you have a tendency to speak oi 
 things pertaining to your work to (2) those not connected 
 with the business, it would be well to form the habit of 
 rigidly refusing to speak of your employer's' affairs at all. 
 By so doing there is no risk of being surprised into state- 
 ments which may afterwards be regretted/' 
 
 (2262:301:30.) 
 
 LESSON 
 
 AMANUENSIS REPORTING. 
 
 473. As a prerequisite to success in this field, a thorough 
 education is demanded in the common English branches, as 
 arithmetic, orthography, grammar, and business forms. 
 Good penmanship, and a knowledge of type-writing, book- 
 keeping, and in rare cases telegraphy, Volapuk, and some of 
 the modern languages, are also valuable. 
 
 Various degrees of speed, ranging from 90 to 150 words 
 per minute, are required. As such secretary, it becomes 
 one's duty to write letters, telegrams, contracts, agreements, 
 newspaper articles, briefs, editorials, etc., at the dictation of 
 his employer,' or whoever has the business management, and 
 afterwards transcribe and deliver the same. A better under- 
 standing of the secretary's duties may be gained from a con- 
 sideration of the relations existing between him and his 
 employer. It is much more severe mental work to rapidly 
 indite important business lettei-s, than to slowly write them 
 out. Dictating is iii fact as much an accomplishment as re- 
 porting. Perfect quiet, and security from all disturbance, 
 are essential in the work of dictating letters and papers of 
 I
 
 8 52 BEPOB TINO STYLE OF 8HOR T-HAND. 
 
 this kind. Hence the stenographer, to the fullest extent 
 possible, should refrain from everything that may perplex or 
 disconcert the reflections of his superior. He should not 
 only maintain quiet, but be prepared the moment called upon 
 to read what he has written, and remain in constant readi- 
 ness to record every word spoken. He should also abstain 
 from all show of nervousness during the occasional intervals 
 in the dictation. 
 
 When the matter in hand is entirely finished, he may ask 
 for the spelling of proper names, insert words which he failed 
 to hear or record, and make the necessary corrections. Ap- 
 parent grammatical and verbal errors need not be called up, 
 but should be corrected by himself when the transcript is 
 made. 
 
 KEY. 
 
 474. PHKASES. 1. Additional-expenses bona-fide in- 
 witness-whereof picase-exchange habeas-corpus on-the- 
 part-of-plaintiff to-wit to-such-an-extent. 2. Abstract-of- 
 title affidavit-of-plaintiff may-it-please-the-court may-it- 
 please-your-honor are-you-able-to-state-whether-or-not was- 
 there-anything-said by-the-court called-and-sworn docu- 
 mentary-evidence. 8. Bank-bill bank-note bank-account 
 much-quicker-than as-per-your-letter acknowledge-receipt- 
 of-your-letter. 4. Balance-sheet on-the-north-side that-is- 
 to-say just-as-certain let-us-be-satisfied take-notes burden- 
 of -proof . Translate Ls 6 to 15 inclusive. 
 
 PHRASES. 
 
 475. About-as-many-as above-cost accept-out ecppt- 
 them accept-my-thanks answering-your-letter a-short-tinit'- 
 ago a-short-time-since by-returh-mail contents-of-my-letter 
 express-order extra-order J-presume-matters-will I-received- 
 your-letter I-regret- very-much my-last-order pay -master 
 please-be-kind-enough please-let-us-know-whether receivfd- 
 his-letter received-my-letter received-our-letter with-this- 
 order you-are-hereby.
 
 Messrs. Stone & Ordean, Duluth, Minn. 
 
 V <- v < 
 
 \ 
 
 [9 1/7" Glidden, Grigga & Co. 
 
 Mr. T. J. Dowd, Hastings, Neb. 
 
 ' L 
 
 \_. . 1 x" 
 
 \ V 
 
 6 
 
 1 
 
 C 
 
 ^
 
 254 KEPOKTIXG STYLE OF SHORT-HAKD. 
 
 476. EXERCISE 43. 
 
 GEO. W. CRANE & Co., 
 
 Blank Book Manufacturers, Printers and-Binders, 
 
 TOPEKA, KAN., March 20, 1884/ 
 MR. A. B., Los Angeles, Cal. 
 Dear-Sir: The-Dockets sent you are-the kind which-are 
 in-general use in-this-city. The-full printed form made it 
 necessary in-a-great-many-cases to transfer the-record" to- 
 the back of-the book. This-is obviated in-the form which 
 we send you, and-also in-the"' Justice's Guide which we en- 
 close, and-which will give the Justice the-forra of entry of 
 any case that-may-come (1) before-him. We- will exchange 
 the-Docket if-you-wish, but think your Justice will-find the- 
 form sent' the more convenient. Yours-very-truly, 
 
 CRANE & Co. 
 
 477. ST.-PAUL, MINN., Nov. 8, 1883. 
 MESSRS. A. Ruiz & SONS/' Malaga, Spain. 
 
 Gentlemen: Referring to-your esteemed favor of-the 21st 
 ult., we wish to say, that-when'" you-are ready to quote 
 prices on-your brands of layer raisins, we would-be pleased 
 to-receive quotations, (2) with-the view of-placing our fall 
 arid-winter order with-you. We would also kindly request 
 you to' inform us whether you have any arrangements with 
 any line of steamers running from -your port to New- York" 
 or Baltimore, and- what rates of freights you-can quote us; 
 also, what-the insurance and-other expenses connected'" 
 with-a shipment of say 5,000 or 10,000 boxes would-be. Any- 
 other (3) information that-you-can give us, that-you-think 
 would-be valuable for-us, will-be appreciated/ Awaiting 
 your reply, we-are Very-truly-yours, 
 
 GLIDDEN, GBIGGS & Co. 
 
 (To be phrased.) 
 
 478. AUGUSTA, GEORGIA, July 15, 1886." 
 MESSRS. DEVINNT & Co., Baltimore, Md. 
 
 Dear Sirs: Messrs. J. Sumraerville & Co., of your city, 
 have made certain'" offers to me which promise great pecun-
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 255 
 
 iary profit provided they are stable; but which, on the con- 
 trary, would involve (4) me in. heavy responsibilities if iry 
 correspondents failed to meet their engagements. 
 
 As I have not the pleasure of' knowing the gentlemen 
 named, it is essential that I should be on my guard. To you, 
 therefore, I apply in" this difficulty; and should esteem it a 
 great favor if you would acquaint me, so far as lies in your 
 power/' 7 with information respecting the character and 
 means of this firm. 
 
 The readiness with which you have complied with my (5) 
 requests leads me to hope that you will still further oblige 
 me on this particular occasion; I need scarcely to say that 
 you' may count on my discretion in keeping profoundly 
 secret such information as you may kindly offer. I am, 
 gentlemen/' Yours respectfully, 
 
 A. L. FARMER. 
 (4545:303.) 
 
 LESSON XLIV. 
 
 AMANUENSIS REPORTING, (CONTINUED). 
 
 479. The thoughtful student need not be told that, since 
 all the plans ^nd secrets of his employer's business must be 
 made known to the correspondence clerk, the most implicit 
 confidence is reposed in him, and loyalty, integrity, and de- 
 votion to business are presumed by the relationship estab- 
 lished. He should not only be so discreet as not to divulge 
 office secrets, or betray implied confidence, but he should 
 show plainly by his conduct that he is faithful to his employ- 
 ers, and interested in their behalf. 
 
 No matter how accomplished a private secretary may be, 
 
 ' his services will not be sought, if he has not cultivated habits 
 
 of prudence, and shown himself to be safe and trustworthy. 
 
 In talcing difficult matter at dictation, in which corrections 
 
 and interlineations are afterwards to be made, it is well to 
 
 leave the alternate lines blank for this purpose. Letter 
 
 j books should be paged, and evei-y letter indexed in a separate
 
 856 REPORTING STYLE OFzSHORT-HAND. 
 
 book in such a manner that it can be quickly referred to 
 afterwards. 
 
 In amanuensis work the name and address of correspond- 
 ents should, as a rule, be written in long-hand. 
 
 KEY. 
 
 480. PHRASES. 1. As-a-matter-of -necessity as-a-matter- 
 of-course in-order-to-have it-is-no-doubt postal-service 
 enclosed-letter. 2. I-am-in-receipt-of-your-favor in-my-last- 
 letter your-obedient-servant your-statement we-will-not 
 my-instructions wholesale-store. 8. Aceording-to-his-con- 
 tract as-per-his-order confidential-communication esti- 
 mated-cost estimated- weight I-may-be-there monthly-re- 
 port. 4. Postal-card postage-stamp we-al \vays-like-to-ha\r 
 within -a-week-or-two your-most-obedient-servant just-say- 
 so our-instructions. Translate Ls 6 tc 15 inclusive. 
 
 PHRASES- 
 
 481. According-(to)-my-agreement ^ording-(to)-your- 
 contract account-book another-class-(oij-goods at-any-cost 
 east-bound-shipments I-shall-be-pleased just-received-your- 
 communication letter-press please-order please-write we- 
 answer we-will-forward-you what-have-you-to-offer wht>n- 
 ever-you-are-ready will-be-charged will-be-collected will- 
 be-marked will-be-expressed will-you-please-acknowledge- 
 receipt your-loss your-risk your-order your-humble-servant. 
 
 482. EXERCISE 44. 
 
 OUR HOME ON-THE HILLSIDE, 
 
 DANSVILLE, LIVINGSTON Co., NEW- YORK, March 1, 1884. 
 ISAAC BENNETT, ESQ./ Carrollton, 111. 
 My -Dear- Sir: Our mutual-friend, Mr. -Peters, who-is at- 
 present in-the employ of Our" Home on-the Hillside, as one 
 of-its reporting secretaries, has handed me your-letter of 
 Feb. 20/ // wherein you express a-desire to-have my testimony 
 in-respect-to stenographic writing. It gives me great pleas- 
 ure (1) to say to-you, that for twenty-six years I-have-had 
 young-men-and-women in-my-employment' as stenograph-
 
 Plate 44- 
 
 L, 
 
 
 
 . C ' V 
 
 I <5-N 
 
 r 
 
 .4 too DeBemales, New York City. 
 ' 19 C "^ 
 
 <L 
 
 s^ 
 
 \ 
 
 r 
 
 <r
 
 258 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAXD. 
 
 ers. Such-is my estimate of-the value of-the-art of-short- 
 hand, that 1 would-have-it // taught in-all our graded- schools 
 and-academies throughout the-land to young-men-and- 
 women. Taking 7 '' 7 all our institutions into account, and-the 
 wide range of occupations in-which our young-men have to(2) 
 engage, and-which-are opening to-our young-women, I 
 would-rather have given proficiency in stenography' a<-a- 
 part of-a young-man's or-a young-woman's education, than 
 the-best average Collegiate 77 accomplishment which any-of- 
 our Colleges or Universities furnish in-the Latin and-Greek 
 languages. It-is-not simply' 7 ' as scrit~s for-others that-this 
 art is-of value; for-it-is of quite as-much service (3) to-those- 
 who attain it in-their-own private affairs. Wh; in excellent 
 opportunity it furnishes to-one 7 who-has-it at-hand to-make 
 memoranda of things seen and heard, and-thus furnishing 
 him 77 with-the-means of fastening in-his mind, and-Uaving 
 at-liis service, most useful information! I-have-had 77 ' on-an 
 average for twenty-five yars, not-less-than three shori -hand 
 writers in constant use; (4) and I-do-not-know of an? who, 
 after my training, have-not secured good positions, and-kt-pt 7 
 them, and-obtained entirely satisfactory compensation. 
 Assuring you that-I-am in-the fullest sense a believer 77 in- 
 the-worth of-the-art as-a means of added usefulness in-what- 
 ever profession or calling any-person may-be 777 engaged, 
 and wishing you all-success in-your pursuit of-it, I-remain, 
 Yours faithfully, 
 
 JAMES C. JACKSO*. (5) 
 (365 &:>.) 
 (To be phrased.) 
 
 488. NEW YORK, July llth, 1886. 
 
 W. W. GRIFFITH, ESQ., Memphis, Tenn. 
 Dear Sir: We regret 7 exceedingly the non-delivery of 
 your esteemed order, and the inconvenience and disappoint- 
 ment occasioned you thereby. We can assure you, 77 how- 
 ever, that we are in no way responsible for the delay; but 
 that, on the contrary, we have used 777 eve v y effort to secure 
 the prompt execution and despatch of the .rder.
 
 ''SPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 259 
 
 It happens, unfortunately for us, that just at (1) tL. ; pi'esent 
 moment the manufacturers are overwhelmed with business; 
 and, in a juncture such as this, there is no help' for it but to 
 wait patiently the execution in due course of the orders sent. 
 
 With the hope, however/' of prevailing on the manufac- 
 turer in this particular instance to make a little extra exer- 
 tion, we have written him, by this'" evening's mail, a most 
 urgent letter; and we feel almost certain that if our request 
 can be complied with (2) it most certainly will be. As soon 
 as we receive an answer we will write or telegraph to you 
 such' positive information as may prevent further disap- 
 pointment. We must apologize for not having written to 
 you previously; but, the" truth is, we ourselves were ex- 
 pecting every day to hear some tidings of the order which 
 we might send"' you. Regretting the trouble and annoyance 
 to which you have been put, we are, 
 
 Yours faithfully, 
 
 J. L. KING & Co. (3) 
 (23431:30.) 
 
 LESSON XLV. 
 
 SPEECH REPORTING. 
 
 484. A verbatim report of a rapid public speaker is the 
 greatest achievement of the stenographic art. There are, 
 however, but comparatively few speeches of which reports 
 are wanted; and it is a fortunate fact that the best orators, 
 whose speeches are the most frequently published, are the 
 easiest, also, to report. But it is very rare that a speech 
 appears well in print, in the precise language in which it 
 was delivered. A certain amount of tautology and repetition 
 add to the force of a spoken address, which in a printed re- 
 port must be discarded. Many phrases, and even whole 
 sentences, may oftentimes be profitably omitted; and the 
 rhetoric of an extemporaneous speech can generally be im- 
 proved. These matters lie clearly within the scope of the 
 stenographer's duty; but the best plan is always, when pos-
 
 260 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAXD 
 
 sible, to submit to the speaker himself an exact copy, written 
 on paper with a broad margin, in order that he may amend 
 and remodel as he sees fit. 
 
 485. KEY. 1. As-it-is-the-characteristic of great wits to say- 
 much in few words, so-it-is of-small wits to talk much and 
 say nothing. 2. It-is-when you-come close to-a-man in 
 conversation that-you discover what-his real abilities, are 
 8. Speech-making is-a knack. 4. Men are born with two 
 eyes, but-with-one tongue, in-order-that-they should see 
 twice as-much-as they-say. 
 
 Matt. 5: 3-13. Translate without referring to key. 
 
 486. The student will find the following suggestions of 
 value, whether he intends making a business of this branch 
 of reporting or not: 
 
 Fully prepare yourself before the speech begins. Obtain 
 a seat, one at a desk if possible, within easy hearing of the 
 speaker. Have yourself amply provided with suitable writ- 
 ing material. Use a pen, if you are accustomed to one; 
 otherwise, have a number of sharpened pencils at hand. 
 
 No matter what the purpose of your report may be, make 
 it a point, as far as you are able, to take every word that is 
 uttered. If the entire speech is not wanted, you can prepare 
 an intelligent synopsis from your full short-hand notes; but 
 an abridgement made in short-hand while the speech is being 
 delivered, is by no means so satisfactory. 
 
 Beginners are sometimes obliged, however, before they 
 can follow a rapid speaker, to make as full a synopsis as they 
 are able, recording the substance only of what is said. And 
 it is commonly the case, indeed, that only partial reports of 
 very rapid speakers are wanted. 
 
 A complete report of a speech requires that many things 
 be inserted, which, verbally, are not a part of the address 
 itself, things acted rather than said. The manner and ap- 
 pearance of the speaker should be described; also, the char- 
 acter of the audience, and the demonstrations of approval, 
 or otherwise, with which the speaker's utterances are re- 
 ceived.
 
 $late 43* 
 
 SENTENCES. 
 
 m/ 
 
 -V> 
 K-^-\ - 
 
 c ^ "), L 
 
 W X ^-v ? ----- 1. 
 
 / b 
 
 JL -v- ^^> ^ > "" *\ _^L 
 
 TRANSLATE. 
 
 Matt. chap. 5. 
 
 us) x 
 
 r 
 
 ) p. 
 
 \ 
 
 ) v,
 
 862 SfPOSTTJfO STYLE OF SHORT-HAXD. 
 
 PHRASES. 
 
 487. FUi Jier-consideration good-as-ever great-many- 
 times I-suppose-you-can I-suppose-there-will-be 1-takc- 
 great-pleasure knowledge-of-the-subject little-as-possible 
 little-less local-affairs local-interest paper-money per-day 
 per-dozen pcr-week personal-affairs personal-expenses per- 
 sonal-knowledge personal-property relating-to-the-subject 
 we- want-to-find. 
 
 EXERCISE 45. 
 
 488. THE-PRESEXT AGE. CHANNING. 
 
 1. The remarks now-made on literature might be extended 
 to-the tine arts. 2. In-these we see, too, the-tendency to 
 universality/ It-is-said, that-the-spirit of-the great artists 
 has died out; but-the taste for-their works is spreading. 
 8. By-the" improvements of engraving, and-the invention 
 of casts, the-genius of-the great masters is going abroad. 
 4. Their conceptions are no longer pent"' up in galleries 
 open to but few, but meet us in-our homes, and are-the 
 household pleasures of millions. 5. Works designed for- 
 the (1) halls and eyes of emperors, popes, and-nobles, find 
 their-way, in no poor representations, in humble dwellings, 
 and sometimes give-a consciousness' of kindred powers to- 
 the child of poverty. . The-art of drawing, which lies at- 
 the foundation of-most of-the tine arts/' and-is the-best 
 education of-the eye for nature, is becoming a-branch of 
 common education, and in-some countries is taught"' in 
 schools to-which all classes are admitted. 7. I-am reminded 
 by-this remark of-the-most striking feature of-our times, 
 as (2) showing its tendency to-universality, and-that-is-thr 
 unparalleled and-constantly accelerated diffusion of educa- 
 tion. This greatest of arts, as yet little' understood, is 
 making sure progress, because its principles are more-and- 
 more sought in-the-common nature of man; and-the great 
 truth" is spreading, that-every-man has-a right to-its aid. 
 
 8. Accordingly education is becoming the-work of nations. 
 
 9. Even in-the despotic"' governments of Europe schools
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORTHAND. 263 
 
 are open for-every child without distinction ;and-noo only the 
 elements of reading and writing, but music and-dra\ving (3) 
 are taught, and-a foundation is laid for future progress in 
 history, geography, and-physical science. 10. The-greatest 
 minds are at work on popular' education. 11. The-revenues 
 of states are applied most liberally, not to-the universities 
 for-the few, but to-the common-schools. 12. Undoubtedly 
 mue'ii" remains to-be-done; especially a-new rank in society 
 is-to-be given to-the teacher; but even in-this-respect'" a- 
 revolution has commenced, and-we-are beginning to-look 
 on-the guides of-the young as-the chief benefactors of-man- 
 kind. (4) (36943.) 
 
 LESSON XL VI. 
 
 CONVENTION REPORTING. 
 
 489. Stenographers are employed to report the proceed- 
 ings of various deliberative assemblies, as legislatures, con- 
 stitutional, and the more important political conventions, 
 and professional and trades-men's associations. These re- 
 ports are commonly furnished to newspapers, and also 
 frequently published in book form. The purposes for which 
 they are made, and the degrees of fullness required are so 
 various, that no comprehensive rules can be laid down suffi- 
 cient to govern the reporter in every case. The following 
 suggestions, however, will be found of value: 
 
 490. The stenographer should, if possible, be seated near, 
 or at the same tab.e with the official secretary, in order that, 
 as the business progresses, he may learn the names of speak- 
 ers, and those taking part in the discussions. 
 
 It is the best plan always to take as full notes as possible 
 although an abridged report only may be wanted, since the 
 work of condensing can better be performed when the tran- 
 scribing is being done, than when the proceedings are in 
 course.
 
 864 REPORTING 8TYLF OF SHORT-HAXD. 
 
 It is commonly the reporter's duty to take down all mo- 
 tions and resolutions, except those in writing; also, amend- 
 ments thereto, and remarks and decisions thereupon. 
 
 Essays, and other papers which are read to the association, 
 are filed with the secretary, and need not be taken down in 
 short-hand; but the discussion of any question to which these 
 may give rise, should be noted by the reporter. 
 
 The speaker's name, when announced by the chairman, 
 should be written in long-hand at the left margin of the 
 paper, and his remarks recorded just below. 
 
 The official stenographer of the convention should make a 
 record of everything that transpires. Much revision, and 
 the judgment of an editor, are needed in preparing such 
 verbatim reports for publication. This is usually done by 
 the secretary, or a special committee. Short-hand writers 
 experienced in this branch of the profession, are often em- 
 ployed both to make and revise, or edit, such reports. 
 
 The successful reporter of public meetings is wide-awake 
 and observing; on the alert constantly not only to hear what 
 is said, but to know what is meant by the speaker. The 
 stenographer who does not know the meaning of what he 
 writes cannot be relied upon to make a correct transcript. 
 
 EXERCISE 46. 
 491. PROCEEDINGS 
 
 THIRD ANNUAL MEETING OF THE IOWA STATE 
 PHARMACEUTICAL ASSOCIATION, 
 
 HELD IN DES MOINES, FEBRUARY 14-15, 1882/ 
 FIRST DAT. WEDNESDAY AFTERNOON SESSION. 
 
 The-meeting was called to order at 10 o'clock. President 
 Hogin in-the chair. 
 
 The-minutes of-the last session were read/' corrected, 
 and-approved.
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 265 
 
 The-President: I-will-now call for- the report of-the Com- 
 mittee on Legislation. 
 
 The-report was read by-the Chairman, '" Mr. Bush, and- 
 the paper passed to-the Secretary. 
 
 On motion of Mr. Wallace, the-Feport of-the Committee on 
 Legislation was adopted. (1) 
 
 The-President: Dr. Treat, have-you anything further to- 
 report on Pharmacy and Queries? 
 
 Dr. Treat: Yes-sir; a-paper by' Mr. W. H. Hardy, of- 
 Clinton. 
 
 The-Secretary: Mr. -Chairman, I-would-like to say first, 
 that our Treasurer has-a-letter from Mr. Hardy/' expressing 
 regrets for-his inability to-be at-the meeting. 
 
 The-President: We-will-now listen to-the reading of-the 
 paper'" by Mr. W. H. Hardy, of-Clinton. 
 
 The-paper is read to-the Association by Dr. Treat. 
 
 The-President: Now you have heard-the (2) reading of- 
 the paper by Mr. -Hardy, of-Clinton. What-is-the pleasure 
 of-the house as-to-the disposal of -it?' 
 
 Dr. Treat: I-move-you, Mr. -Chairman, that-the communi- 
 cation be-received. 
 
 The-President: You-mean by-that, that- it shall-be printed" 
 in-the proceedings? 
 
 Dr. Treat: Yes-sir. 
 
 The-motion was-carried and-the thanks of-the Association 
 tendered the-writer. 
 
 Mr. Schafer:"' I-will-now present the-report of-the com- 
 mittee appointed to consider the-President's address. 
 
 Vice-President Townsend assumes the-chair. 
 
 The committee (3) referred to report as follows: " To-the 
 President and-members of-the Iowa State Pharmaceutical 
 Association: Your committee appointed to consider the- 
 address of-our 7 retiring President, ask to-present the-follow- 
 ing report: 
 
 We-do most heartily concur in-the leading suggestions. 
 We would, however, call your special" attention to-the fol- 
 lowing recommendations:
 
 6fl REPORTING STYLE OF SITORT-ffAXD. 
 
 1. That every registered Pharmacist look well to all im- 
 I positions from unprincipled persons, in-obtaining liquors for 
 I improper use'" under all manner of representations. 
 
 2. That- we heartily endorse the aiding and sustaining the- 
 Commissioners of Pharmacy in-their duties to-the full (4) 
 extent of-the law. 
 
 8. The-subject of revising the-By-Laws had our attention, 
 but owing to-the necessities of-the-case, amendments have 7 
 already been adopted, which fully cover this point. 
 
 4. We-most heartily and-cheerfully endoi'se the sugges- 
 tion, that-the Association become incorporated under-the" 
 laws of-the State. A-motion to adopt the-report of-the com- 
 mittee prevailed. 
 
 Mr. -Crawford: Mr. -Chairman; I-move-you that-the"' 
 Committee on Legislation, as expressing the-sense of-this 
 Association, be instructed to procure an-amendment to-the- 
 present law, making it a (5) penalty not-exceeding $200 for- 
 a-person conducting a-pharmacy without registration, by 
 having that-matter so that-it-will properly' come before-the 
 Grand-Jury, and-that-the Court may act at discretion, and- 
 uiake-a fine not-exceeding this amount. There-are" c-oin- 
 | inanities where-the prohibitory liquor law of Iowa is prac- 
 j tically a-dead-letter. No Grand-Jury can-be impaneled to- 
 take proper cognizance 7 " of-the law. 
 
 The law maker makes the law, not-only to rule subjects, 
 but also to rule the law makers. Now I-think-that, (6) in- 
 this-matter, we stand between-the law maker and-the law 
 breaker. In-this-respect we-are handling, unfortunately, 
 patent medicines/ one of-the giant evils of-the day. That- 
 there is-a-demand for-them, no-one questions. This-demand 
 comes as well" f rom-the law maker as-it does f rom-the law 
 breaker. While one man claims to call for-it within-the 
 limits of-the'" law, there-is-a question at-last about what 
 there-is-a,call for. Now-then, we-are-not only standing be- 
 tween law makers (7) and law breakers, but-we stand be- 
 tween-the patent medicine man and-the consumer, between- 
 the physician and-the patient. It-seems-to-me' our position
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 267 
 
 is-a very peculiar one. For-instance, some nostrum is placed 
 upon-the market and-it-is-so advertised" that-there-is-a de- 
 mand for-it, aud-we, as retail dealers, purchase some and-sell 
 it to-our customers who demand it. It-is-a"' spurious article. 
 Who gets the blame? I-think those-who-are doing business 
 on-honest principles and-living up to-the law, will (8) go 
 forward and raise the standard so high that-every-one will- 
 be ashamed to engage in-that business. 
 
 The-President: The-motion' now is-that-the Committee on 
 Legislation procure a-pharmacy law making-the violator 
 liable to-a penalty not-exceeding $200." 
 
 Mr. Parish: Did-you say that-it-should-be indictable? 
 
 Mr. -Crawford: Yes-sir. I said that-it-should-be a misde- 
 meanor/'''' and-that-the penalty should-be-that amount. 
 
 A-Member: I-think-there ought-to-be a-way of getting 
 out-of-it without-making (9) it a-Grand-Jury affair. I-think- 
 Jt-is-an offense that-ought-to-be punishable before-a justice- 
 of-the-peace/ 
 
 Mr. Parish: I-don't-think, Mr. -Chairman, that-you-can 
 find-a town in Iowa, where there-is-a druggist, but who-has- 
 a delicacy" about filing a complaint against-a competitor. 
 But if-you-make it a-Grand-Jury offense, they-will be obliged 
 to-take action 7 " in-these-matters. You-may take-it in-any 
 town. There-is one in-our town who-is-not-a pharmacist, 
 not eligible by-reason-of (10) age, and-he-is violating the- 
 law, and-there ought-to-be somebody whose duty it-was to- 
 take action in-these-matters/ 
 
 Mr. Ellis: Let-us-take-a view of-our position as druggists, 
 the-position in-which we-are held up before-the public," so 
 fur-as we-are individually concerned. It-ought-to-be our 
 object personally to abide by-the laws, whatever these laws 
 may-be."' (101010:458.) 
 
 492. TRANSLATE. 
 
 ~7 > ^ xi 
 
 b ( 5_^ L/ c / | -<%
 
 968 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 13 
 
 ** \ 
 
 , c ^ 
 
 u 
 
 -7 
 
 493. 
 
 PHRASES. 
 
 v^ v -^ *i.<
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 269 
 
 LESSON XL VII. 
 LAW REPORTING. 
 
 494. Law Reporting, or the business of recording the 
 proceedings had on the trial of causes, is one of the most im- 
 portant branches of the stenographic profession. In this day, 
 all important cases are reported in short-hand/ and, in- 
 deed, of so great advantage is this art found to be in the ad- 
 ministration of justice, that in many states the appointment 
 of skilled stenographers is authorized by law. In the most 
 perfect methods of administering justice that have been 
 devised, it has been required that some kind of record of the 
 evidence be preserved, and the fuller this is the better. 
 
 Stenography has revolutionized the methods of proceeding 
 in the courts ; for by its speed much time is saved, and de- 
 lays, which, during a trial, are prejudicial to justice, are 
 more easily prevented, and the occasion lor expensive re- 
 trials oftentimes precluded. In no business or profession is 
 stenography more welcome than in law, where so much 
 depends on a record being kept of the precise words made 
 use of. 
 
 The Law Reporter must possess various qualifications in- 
 order to a competent discharge of the duties of his calling. 
 He should be able to write at least one hundred and seventy- 
 five words a minute, and read his notes fluently. In addi- 
 tion, also, to a thorough English education, good memory, 
 and quickness of perception, he should have a familiar ac- 
 quaintance with the various forms and methods of proceed- 
 ing in Courts. The greater his knowledge of law, especially 
 that of evidence, the better. No student should neglect the 
 main features of this branch of the profession. Especially 
 the forms of such reports should be learned, since amanuen- 
 ses, and all short-hand writers in fact, are frequently desired 
 to make reports of depositions, referred cases, and the testi- 
 mony received at preliminary hearings. 
 
 1J>5. The Caption of a law-stenographer's report should 
 show the title, number, and nature of the cause, the Court
 
 Z7P ^EPORTINQ STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 where pending, the name of the judge, referee, commission- 
 er, or other tribunal by whom the same is heard ; the term 
 of court, building, town, county, and state where the trial is 
 had ; the name of counsel appearing on either side ; the 
 name and address of the stenographer employed. This 
 should occupy the first page and be drawn up in the follow- 
 ing manner : 
 
 CAPTION. 
 
 JAMES MORGAN, et al. \ APPEARANCES: 
 
 NINDE & ELLISON, 
 
 I No 781) Attorneys for Plaintiffs. 
 
 OSCAR A. SIMONS " R. S. TAYLOR and 
 
 a'jd COOMBS. MOKRIS & BELL, 
 
 JOHN H. BASS. j Attorneys for Defendants. 
 
 EJECTMENT. 
 
 Pending in the U. S. Circuit Court for the Northern District 
 of Indiana, June Term, A. D. 1881. At the Federal Court 
 room, Fort Wayne, before His Honor, Judge Walter Q. 
 Gresham, and a jury. 
 
 ELDON MORAN, Official Stenographer. 
 
 496. The report proper begins on the second page, the 
 heading of which should show for what party litigant the 
 testimony is taken, the hour, the day of the week and month, 
 and the year, when the trial was begun. Names of witnesses 
 should be written in long-hand. The record should also 
 show what attorney conducted the examination. 
 
 The main body of a law-report consists in the record of 
 question and answer, or what is said by the lawyer in elicit- 
 ing testimony, and by the witness in reply thereto. That 
 which is spoken by the lawyer is for convenience denomi- 
 nated question, and the reply of the witness, answer, al- 
 though the reverse is sometimes in fact true, as may be illus- 
 trated by the following colloquy between lawyer and wit- 
 ness : 
 
 Ques. (lawyer) Where were you living at the time? 
 
 Ans. (witness) When do you mean?
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 871 
 
 Ques. (lawyer) I mean at the time the accident happened. 
 
 497. Paper about five inches broad is the most convenient 
 for law-reports. The question begins at the left margin and 
 extends across the page. The answer should begin, and be 
 entirely written, in such a manner as that no part of it shall 
 be nearer than one and one-half inches of the left margin. 
 Answers, when brief, may be written on the same line with 
 the question, provided a space of at least one inch is allowed 
 to intervene. 
 
 The proper heading, and disposition of question and an- 
 swer, is illustrated by the exercise for translation. 
 
 PHRASES. 
 
 498. About-how-many about-what-time all-contracts an- 
 nual-report enter-into-an-agreement enter-into-a-contract 
 enter-into-possession further-consideration give-evidence 
 g'ive-possession Grand-Jury into-court law-reports about- 
 how-long-was-it by-the-evidence court-of-claims not-to-my- 
 recollection offers-in-evidence state-when-it-was state-how- 
 many take-into-consideration I-do-not-know I-know-noth- 
 ing-about it-is-only in-its-exercise in-all-such-cases. 
 
 4C9. EXERCISE 47. 
 
 WILSON H. SWALES, Guardian, ^ APPEARANCES: 
 
 p g I HOLMAN & McMULLEN, 
 
 THE WHITE-WATER RAILROAD f N " 146 ' BELL & BA^lSoaT 
 COMPANY. J Atty'sfor Deft.' 
 
 DAMAGES. 
 
 Tried at Lawrenceburg, Indiana, at the May Term, A. D. 
 1881, of the Dearborn County Circuit Court, before" his 
 Honor, Judge Hayes, and a jury. 
 
 Charles Ash by, sworn on the part of Plaintiff. 
 
 Examined by Mr. McMullen. 
 
 Q. Where-do-you-residc *'.'" 
 
 A. In Harrison Township, Dearborn Co., Ind. 
 
 Q. Do-you know where Longnecker station is? 
 
 A. Yes-sir.
 
 272 REPORTING STYLE OF SffORT-HAXD. 
 
 Q. Tell-the-Jury where you-live in-reference-to the-sta- 
 tion. (1) 
 
 A. I-live on-the pike about one-quarter of-a mile from- 
 the-station. Right about here, (referring to-the map, ex- 
 hibit "B")/ 
 
 Q. How far is-it from where you-live straight across to- 
 the railroad? 
 
 A. About forty rods. 
 
 Q. Do-you-remember when-this accident happened ?" 
 
 A x I-believe it-was-the 9th of December, 1879, between 
 five and six o'clock, to-the-best of-rny-knowledgf/" 
 
 Q. You-may-state-whether it-was light or dark. 
 
 A. It-was on-the darkish order. It-was-a sort of cloudj 
 evening. (2) 
 
 Q. How far is-that from whe r e-the railroad crosses into 
 Franklin County? 
 
 A. About two-miles. 
 
 Q. Where were-you on-the evening that-this-accident 
 happened? 7 
 
 A. At my house, standing out on-the porch. 
 
 Q. What-did-you first hear, not what-was-said to-you ; 
 first state-whether-or-not" you heard any collision or noise? 
 
 A. I heard the collision, that-is what drew my-attention. 
 
 Q. State to-the Jury whether-or-not at-this-time'" you 
 saw-the passenger-train. 
 
 A. I-did. 
 
 Q. Where-was-the passenger-train when you saw it? 
 
 A. It-was coming along-down here by-the dam'. (3) 
 
 Q. Where-did the-work or wild train whistle if-at-all? 
 
 A. Right here at-the graveyard just gave one bla.-t . 
 
 Q. You-rnay-state-whether / that work-train gav- another 
 signal from-that-time till-you heard the-collision down ly- 
 the crossing. 
 
 A. Yes-sir, that-is-all I heard" till the-collision. 
 
 Q. Now how near was this train to-the passenger-train 
 when-the passenger moved away from-the-station?
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 273 
 
 A. Well, I-cannot answe' '" that because I-cannot see-the 
 station from my house. 
 
 Q. Was-there any-time when you-could see both trains 
 at-once? (4) 
 
 A. Yes-sir, when-the passenger-train was here in front 
 of-the graveyard, (referring to-the map), the wild-train was 
 coming around the-dam/ 
 
 Q. Tell-the-Jury about-how far apart these trains were 
 at-that-time. 
 
 A. Considerably over a-mile. 
 
 Q. That-is, when-the passenger-train" was at-the grave- 
 yard? 
 
 A. Yes-sir. 
 
 Q. How far down toward-the-station could -you see-the 
 passenger-train from-your-house ?"' 
 
 A. To-right above the target at-the upper end of-the 
 switch. 
 
 Q. How far above the-railroad is-this ground where-your- 
 house is located? (5) 
 
 A. Forty-five feet I should judge. 
 
 Q. How-long was-it f rom-the-time you heard the whistle 
 till-you heard-the collision ?' 
 
 A. I-didn't pay any-attention, but it-was a-very short- 
 time. 
 
 Q. Have-you anything by-which-you-can measure the 
 time?" 
 
 A. No-sir, I-didn't pay much attention at-that-time. It- 
 was so short a-time that I-made remarks to my wife "' 
 
 Q. If-you have anything by-which-you-can fix it in-your 
 mind without telling what-was-said and-done, (6) you-may 
 give us your best knowledge of-it. 
 
 A. It- was a-minute or somewheres about there ; perhaps 
 it-raight-have-been that-long / or longer to-the best of-my 
 knowledge. 
 
 Q. Did-you go down to-the station after-that? 
 
 A. Yes-sir, they came after me" just a-few minutes after 
 it happened, a-very short-time.
 
 874 SSPOETINQ STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 Q. You went down then ? 
 
 A. Yes-sir. 
 
 Q. Who- went with-you, if-anybody?"' 
 
 A. Nobody went with-me, only the-gentleman who-came 
 for me. 
 
 Q. Were-you there when-the-train backed up again? 
 
 A. No-sir. (7) 
 
 Q. Had-it gone on when you arrived? 
 
 A. It-was just going when I-got there. 
 
 Q. Where-was Miss Hurley? 
 
 A. Right at-the end of-the crib/ 
 
 Q. What- was done with her? 
 
 A. She-was picked up and carried to-my-house. 
 
 Q. How-long did she remain at-your-house?" 
 
 A. I-think two-or-three days. 
 
 Q. Did-you ever measure the-distance between that crib 
 and-the railroad? 
 
 A. I-measured between-the"' end of-the shingle pile and- 
 the rails ; I-t-hink the-distance was about one-hundred feet. 
 
 Q. You did-not measure the-crib by-itself ? (8) 
 
 A. No-sir, but I should judge the-crib to-be about sixtjf 
 feet long. 
 
 Q. It-is simply a-pile of shingles with-a shed over it?' 
 
 A. Yes-sir, that-is-it. 
 
 Q. Can-you see the-crossing f rom-your-house ? 
 
 A. No-sir, I-cannot. 
 
 Q. Now suppose a-party is" seated in-a two horse spring 
 wagon, the hind wheels being past this end of-the shingle- 
 shed, how far above the crossing /// can-the railroad target 
 be-seen? 
 
 Mr. Bell objects to-the-question, as calling for-a conclusion 
 of-the witness rather-than for-the facts. (9) Question with- 
 drawn. 
 
 Q. I-wish you-would state just the-condition of-the lady, 
 when-you saw her there at-the-time when' she-was taken-up 
 to-your-house.
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 275 
 
 A. She-was perfectly unconscious, did-not-know-anything 
 for-a couple of days/' 
 
 Q. What bruises, if-any, die ^a see upon her? 
 
 A. She had-a wound on her arm, but I-do-not remem- 
 ber"' now which-one ; she had also been struck on-the head. 
 
 Q. Where-was-the wound dressed? A. At my house. 
 
 Q. Who-was-the physician? (10) A. Dr. West, of Har- 
 rison. 
 
 Q. Was she-taken away from-your-house before she 
 again became conscious? 
 
 Mr. Bell, on-part of defendant' objects to-the-question on- 
 the ground that-it-is leading. Objection sustained. Plain- 
 tiff-excepts." '97810:307.) 
 
 500 BUSINESS LETTEK. TRANSLATE. 
 
 Y 
 
 ; x 
 
 V
 
 278 
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 501. 
 J 
 
 TRANSLATE. Charles Ashby Continued.
 
 LESSON XLVHI. 
 
 OBJECTIONS, RULINGS, EXCEPTIONS, EXHIBITS AND INDICES. 
 
 502. The main purpose in reporting a law-suit is that the 
 party aggrieved may be secured in his right of appeal to a 
 higher Court. There are many other uses, however, which 
 these records are made to serve. A verbatim report is use- 
 ful in various ways on re-trials, as, for instance, when im- 
 peachments are sought ; also, to refresh the memory of 
 counsel and witnesses, and settle disputes in regard to the 
 testimony formerly elicited. 
 
 For the same reasons they are often serviceable in collate- 
 ral proceedings ; also, to perpetuate the testimony of wit- 
 nesses who subsequently decease or become insane. Even 
 during the trial, the presence of "Mr. Reporter" has grown 
 indispensable, as shown by the fact that his notes are hourly 
 referred to. 
 
 The stenographer's notes are presumed to be correct, and 
 cannot be changed or modified except with the consent of 
 the judge, and agreement of interested parties. The record 
 should contain, not only everything that is said pertain- 
 ing to the trial, but by whom it is spoken. When questions 
 are asked, or remarks made, by the Court, jurors, or attor- 
 neys not conducting the examination, or by the parties them 
 selves, the name of the speaker should appear parentheti- 
 cally in the margin. 
 
 Next in importance to the evidence itself is the ^recording 
 of objections, which are made from time to time to the intro- 
 duction of the same, or to any proceeding which either party 
 may regard as illegal. The grounds 'upon which such ob- 
 jections are based should be noted by the reporter ; and 
 should they not be stated specifically, the counsel's argu- 
 ment in presenting the matter to the Court should be taken 
 down. When an objection is decided, the exception, if any, 
 taken by the party over-ruled, should also be recorded. Ex- 
 ceptions are also taken to the decisions of the Court in sus- 
 taining or over-ruling various motions submitted in the 
 course of the trial. 
 
 277
 
 7S REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 In reporting depositions, objections are recorded, and 
 testimony taken subject thereto, no rulings being made, or 
 exceptions taken, at the time. A law-report should be as 
 nearly as possible a photograph of all the proceedings had. 
 Hence, it becomes the reporter's duty to make a minute of 
 every transaction which has a bearing on the case. Exam- 
 ples of such notes which are inserted parenthetically are : 
 "Witness refuses to answer the question ;" " 12 o'clock M. 
 Court adjourns ;" "The railing referred to by the witness is 
 about twenty feet distant ;" "Gentleman referred to by wit- 
 ness is Mr. Jones, attorney." 
 
 In some civil and most criminal cases, a report is made of 
 the impaneling of the jury. This should embrace the exami- 
 nation of each juror as to his qualification to act, challenges 
 peremptoi-y and for cause, by both prosecution and defense, 
 rulings of the Court, and exceptions of counsel. 
 
 The reporter is at liberty at all times to check witnesses 
 who speak too rapidly or indistinctly, or while the question 
 is being put, or objection made. 
 
 503. Written documents, as deeds, notes, contracts, 
 mortgages, letters, depositions, etc., are frequently produced 
 in Court, and made a part of the evidence ; and for the pur- 
 poses of identification, and convenience in making referen- 
 ces, the same are at the time marked by the reporter as 
 exhibit "A", "B", etc., according to the order in which they 
 are introduced. After the alphabet has been exhausted, the 
 double letters "AA", "BB", etc., may be employed. The 
 paper, besides the letter "A", should be marked with the 
 initials of the parties to the suit ; thus, for example, in the 
 case of Frederick vs. Wilson, the certificate of a County 
 Auditor is offered in evidence, and marked by the reporter, 
 "Exhibit 'A', F. vs. W." This prevents ambiguity in cases 
 where the same document has already been marked with a 
 different latter, as an exhibit in another case. 
 
 As part of the evidence, also, knives, rings, keys, photo- 
 graphs, or any article whatever which may be important for 
 the Court and Jury to examine, are from time to time intro-
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 879 
 
 duced. These may be marked by attaching a written card 
 firmly to them, The reporter should be careful to identify 
 as an exhibit, every article or document offered by either 
 party, whether or not the same is actually admitted in evi- 
 dence by the Court, since rejected exhibits are necessary to 
 complete the appellant's bill of exceptions. 
 
 504. Half the value of a law-report is lost by not having it 
 properly indexed. In the first place, the paper used should 
 be accuratelv paged, and each separate book or manuscript 
 numbered in the order used. Trials vary in length from an 
 hour to several months. Reference is frequently made, and 
 the reporter ordered to read sections of testimony taken 
 days and even weeks previously. This can be done only by 
 means of a running index, which is kept making from hour 
 to hour, just as the proceedings take place. This should give 
 the day and date of each session of Court, the name of each 
 witness, and the page where his testimony and cross-exami- 
 nation begins. 
 
 Agreements, admissions, stipulations, and the introduction 
 of exhibits, should also be indexed. Long-hand transcripts 
 are paged and indexed iu a similar manner. 
 
 505. INDEX. 
 
 ) EVIDENCE 
 
 , f 
 
 THE WHITE-WATER RAILROAD. ) 
 
 FIRST DAY, MAY 19, 1881. 
 
 THURSDAY FORENOON SESSION. 
 
 Impaneling of the Jury, Vol. 1, Page 1. 
 M. B. Fox, .... Vol. 1, Page 5. 
 
 AFTERNOON SESSION. 
 
 Fox, continued, . . . 1-11 Chas. Ashby, . . . 1-37 
 Cross-examination, . . 1-13 Cross-ex., 1-42
 
 280 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 Re-direct examination, 1-20 C. Ashby, recalled, . 1-48 
 Frank Jackman, . . . 1-22 Benj. Holden, . . . 1-48 
 Cross-ex., 1-28 
 
 SECOND DAY, May 20. 
 
 FKIDAY FORENOON SESSION. 
 
 B. F. Hurley 1-59 Guardianship.admitted, 2-3 
 
 Cross-ex., 1-63 Exhibit "B", Map of 
 
 W. H. Swales, . . Vol. 2-3 Longnecker, admitted, 2-4 
 Exhibit "A", Letters of 
 
 FRIDAY AFTERNOON SESSION. 
 
 Cross-ex., 2-4 Dr. L. J. Collins, . . 2-28 
 
 Carrie Hurley, .... 2-15 Dr. J. P. Green, . . . 2-44 
 Cross-ex., . . . . 2-21 Dr. J. D. Gatch, . . 2-47 
 
 PHRASES. 
 
 506. Accept-service in-chancery it-is-also-agreed judge's- 
 order Law-courts Law-journal legal-proceedure legal-pro- 
 ceedings legal-representative new-trial personal-estate 
 plaintiff-and-defendant police-court supreme-court with- 
 out-prejudice your-honor according-(to)-your-recollection 
 along-about-that-time according-(to)-my-recollection did- 
 you-recognize do-you-recollect-anything-about-this if-the- 
 court-please if-your-honor-please this-is-an-action where- 
 did-you-go will-you-examine what-has-been. 
 
 507. EXERCISE 48. 
 
 FREDERICK ) 
 
 vs. [ EVIDENCE ON PART OF CONTESTEE. 
 WILSON. ) 
 
 Session at Marshalltown, Iowa, April 12, 1883. 
 
 James K. Johnson, sworn/ Examined by Judge Bradley. 
 
 Q. What official position if-any do-you hold? 
 
 A I-am deputy clerk.
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 281 
 
 Q. Have-you examined the naturalization records of-this- 
 county?" 
 
 A. Yes-sir, also all-the records of naturalization that- 
 have-been kept by-the Circuit and-District-Courts. 
 
 Q. Have-you-made-a memorandum of what"' these re- 
 cords show concerning-the naturalization of certain persons? 
 
 A. I-have. . 
 
 Mr. -Brown on-part of Contestant objects to-the testimony 
 of-this witness (1) on-the ground that-it-is incompetent and- 
 immaterial, the-original record books only being admissible 
 as evidence. 
 
 Q. I-will ask your attention to-the 7 declaratory statement 
 made by James Dunn. State-whether you ever examined 
 the-record of-the naturalization of-such-a-person, and-if so, 
 when-did-you" find that-it-was made? 
 
 Mr. -Brown ou-part of Contestant objects to-the-question 
 on-the ground that-it-is incompetent and-immaterial/" The- 
 original books themselves are-the-best evidence, and-the 
 witness should-not-be allowed to testify from any document 
 other-than these books themselves. (2) 
 
 A. I-have examined the-records carefully, and-find that- 
 there-are two James Dunns. One made his declaratory 
 statement on-the 28th of July, 1856 ;' the-other made his de- 
 claratory statement on-the 12th of December, 1866. I also 
 found from-a careful examination of-the naturalization" 
 records of-the District and Circuit-Court Journals from-the 
 beginning, that-is from Journal A down to-the time when- 
 the naturalization records were begun, '" that-there-is-no 
 record of James Dunn's having-been naturalized. 
 
 Mr. -Brown on-part of Contestant objects to answer of 
 witness on-the ground (3) that-it-is incompetent and-imma- 
 terial, since-it purports to-be-a statement of-the official 
 records, the-same not-being produced. 
 
 Q. Then we understand' you as testifying that-there-is-no 
 record of any second papers ever having-been issued to any- 
 tiuch-person? 
 
 A No-sir/'
 
 REPORTING STYLE OP SHORT-HANI). 
 
 Q. To any James Dunn, or James Dunn, Jr.? 
 
 A. No-sir. 
 
 Q. What-do-the records show with-reference-to Patrick 
 Dunn? 
 
 A. On-the 27th of August/" 1866, Patrick Dunn made his 
 declaratory statement, but there-is-no record of-his ever 
 having-been naturalized. 
 
 Mr. -Brown on-part (4) of Contestant moves that-the answer 
 be stricken out as incompetent and-immaterial, being the 
 statement of what the-records contain, without-the same' 
 being produced. 
 
 Q. No evidence at-all? 
 
 A. No-sir, none. 
 
 Q. Now I-will ask your attention to William Broadhead. 
 
 A. He filed his declaratory statement on-the // 3rdof Nov.. 
 1868. There-are no records of-his subsequent naturaliza- 
 tion. 
 
 Contestant moves to strike same as above/" 
 
 Q. Is-this-the gentleman known as Uncle Billy Broad- 
 head, who lives in-the poor house? 
 
 A. The-name is-the-sanie, aud-I suppose it-is-the same- 
 man. (5) 
 
 Q. Did-you find that any papers had-been issued to Frank 
 Delaware? 
 
 A. No-sir, I-did-not. 
 
 Contestant moves to strike same as above/ 
 
 Q. I-will ask-you if-yxm have gone through these natural- 
 ization and -Court records by-the index, or if -not, how did- 
 you examine, them?" 
 
 A. I examined them both ways ; first by index, and-then 
 by looking carefully over each page. 
 
 Q. State-whether-or-not you found any record'" of-the 
 naturalization of Edward Willigrod ; if so, what-is-the date 
 of-it? 
 
 A. I can state the-book and-the page from-memory. (6) 
 It-is in Minute Book Number One, page fourteen, of-the 
 records of-the County-Court. The-date is somewhere be- 
 tween 1856 and 1858/
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 283 
 
 Contestant moves to strike same as above. 
 
 Q. Does-the record show that two papers were issued? 
 
 A. No-sir, but-the record" I-raention is of-the issue of-the 
 second, or official naturalization papers. 
 
 C. What Court were-they issued from? 
 
 A. From-the County-Court, when //r/ Wm. C. Smith was 
 judge. 
 
 Contestant moves to strike same as above. 
 
 Q. Mr. Johnson, you say you have examined these re- 
 cords from-the beginning, page by page, (7) will-you please 
 state more specifically as-to what-records you-refer? 
 
 A. I-have examined Journals 1, 2 and 3, of-the Circuit- 
 Court of Marshall-County, arid-Journals A, B and C, of-the 
 District-Court. The-remaining records form a-book called 
 First Paper or Declaratory book/ 7 I examined them all 
 page by page. 
 
 Q. Are there more Journals than this in-the Circuit- 
 Court? 
 
 A. Yes-sir. 
 
 Q. How far does-the third Circuit-Court Journal ex- 
 tend?" 7 
 
 A. Down to 1873, when-the first naturalization record 
 was begun. 
 
 Q. And-the District-Court Journal you have referred to 
 covered the-same period? (8) 
 
 A. Yes-sir. 
 
 Q. Mr. Johnson, will-you please bring over the-book con- 
 taining the-record of-the papers issued to Mr. Willigrod? 
 
 Witness produces Naturalization 7 Record-Book Number 2. 
 
 Q. Did-you find this-book in-the office and-custody of-the 
 clerk of-the District and Circuit-Courts of-this-County? 
 
 A. Yes-sir, it-is-one of-the official records, kept in-the 
 office of-the clerk whose deputy I am. 
 
 Q. Please state-the title and-character of-the 77 third book 
 you now have in-your possession. 
 
 A. It-is called Minute Book Number 1, of-the Marshall 
 County-Court, kept when Wm. C. Smith was judge. 777 
 
 (9078:457)
 
 284 
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORTHAND. 
 
 508. 
 
 SWALES ) IMPANELING 
 
 vs OF 
 
 THE WHITE-WATER RAILROAD. \ THE JURY. 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 P 
 
 n 
 
 ..V 
 
 "i 
 
 J 
 
 t, > 
 
 ; v -...! 
 
 11 V V 
 
 ) %-. 
 
 .f.^p......'rr... > ?' 
 
 ^ 1 i 
 
 1 v^ 
 
 
 S. 
 
 \ 
 
 1 )
 
 LESSON XLIX. 
 
 TBANSCKIPTS AND PROFESSIONAL CONDUCT. 
 
 509. All short-hand reports should be securely filed away, 
 either by the Clerk of the Court, or by the stenographer 
 himself. A transcript iu long-hand may be ordered at once, 
 or not till after years ; possibly never. Before making such 
 transcript, the reporter would do well to ascertain whether 
 more than one copy is wanted, since, should he make use of 
 a type-writer, which is much the best plan, two or more 
 copies can be made simultaneously. The testimony of cer- 
 tain witnesses only, or a brief of all the evidence in narra- 
 tive form not containing objections, etc., is sometimes or- 
 dered ; while again, only an abstract is wanted, giving the 
 testimony to which objections were made, together with the 
 rulings and exceptions. In addition to the usual fee allowed 
 for making transcripts, the reporter receives extra compen- 
 sation for the work of making such briefs and abstracts. In 
 all cases, the stenographer has a right to hold the transcript 
 until his fees are paid. 
 
 510. Original notes are always taken hurriedly, and need 
 more or less revision and condensation when transcribed 
 into long-hand. In this matter the repoi'ter is allowed some 
 discretion. Answers of witnesses, with few exceptions, 
 should be written as spoken, but the language of interroga- 
 tories should be corrected if ungramatical, and may be 
 abbreviated often with advantage. Lawyers not uncommonly 
 indulge in repetitions which have only the effect of lumber- 
 ing the record, and should in many cases be entirely ex- 
 cluded fi-oni the transcript. 
 
 511. Notes should be transcribed in the order taken, and 
 one .side only of the paper be written upon. Ample margin 
 for the notes of counsel should be allowed to remain at the 
 left of each page ; also at the top, so that the sheets may be 
 bound together. 
 
 Every interrogatory should be numbered, beginning anew 
 with the testimony of each witness. The transci'ipt, when 
 complete, is paged and indexed, and bound firmly into 
 volumes of convenient size. 
 
 285
 
 tS6 REPORTING STTLF OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 TRANSCRIPT. 
 
 512. APPEARANCES. 
 
 STATE OP INDIANA ] W. H. HARRINGTON, 
 
 on part of Prosecution. 
 DANIEL W. VOORHEES. 
 LYON. J for Defendant. 
 
 CROSS-EXAMINATION OP MRS. RACHEL 8TOWE, Continued. 
 
 Ques. 81. How far were you standing from the corner 
 tree when you heard the report of the pistol? 
 
 Ans. About as far from it as I am from the stove there 
 (referring to the stove about sixteen feet distant). 
 
 Ques. 82. You say you heard two shots ; now was it a 
 long or short space of time that elapsed between them? 
 
 Ans. It seemed to me rather long. 
 
 Ques. 83. Well, how long? 
 
 Ans. Perhaps a minute. 
 
 Ques. 84. You are certain as much as that? 
 
 Ans. Yes sir, that long anyway. 
 
 Ques. 85. Will you please indicate the time that elapsed 
 as nearly as you can remember it, by tapping with my knife 
 upon the desk? 
 
 (Mrs. Stowe taps twice ; time, eighteen seconds, by the 
 reporter's watch). 
 
 Ques. 86. How far was your boy standing from you at the 
 time? 
 
 Ans. About as far away from me as that gentleman, (re- 
 ferring to Senator Voorhees). 
 
 Ques. 87. Were not remarks passed between you and the 
 boy during the time between the shots? 
 
 Ans. Yes sir, my boy first said Objection. 
 
 Ques. 88. Did not he know one of the men on horse-back, 
 and did not he say "He has shot " ? 
 
 Mr. Griffith objects to the question on the ground that 
 it is not proper cross-examination ; also that it misrepre- 
 sents the witness. 
 
 Objection over-ruled. Defendant excepts.
 
 Plate 49* 
 
 s 
 
 5V 
 
 - \ 
 
 r 
 
 IP 
 
 \ 
 
 \ 
 
 \ 
 
 - 
 
 
 r \> 
 
 V-
 
 888 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 513. The reporter should be prompt in his attendance 
 upon Court, and in the preparation of transcripts ; diligent 
 and accommodating as an officer. 
 
 It is not unusual for him to be made the confidant of the 
 Judge, and for this reason he should exercise the greater 
 caution, since he is the more subject to interested inquiry. 
 He is expected to make a true and impartial record ; and to 
 avoid all inference of prejudice, it is by far the best policy to 
 say nothing whatever about the case during the trial. He 
 should be trustworthy, and mix suavity with discretion. 
 
 In the heat of an exciting trial, when the feelings and 
 apprehensions of adverse parties are most awakened, the 
 slightest look, movement, or insinuation on the reporter's 
 part, is liable to be construed into an indication of prejudice 
 or partiality. The utmost care and circumspection are 
 necessary to prevent such reflections, which are sometimes 
 carried even to the extent of a question as to the integrity of 
 the report. 
 
 514. PHRASES. 
 
 Balance-due breach-(of)-contract certiflcate-(of)-marriage 
 circumstantial-evidence common-law contempt-(of)-court 
 Court -ol-law Court-of-Record custom-(of-the) -country laws- 
 (of-the)-land laws-(of)-England learned-judge matter-of- 
 fonn on-the-south-side records-(of-the)-court subject-mat- 
 ter verdict-(of-the)-jury according-(to-the) -evidence place- 
 (of)-business do-you-mean-(to)-say. 
 
 EXERCISE 49. 
 
 515. [Heading, Question and Answer, Objections, etc., 
 to be arranged by the student in the proper manner]. 
 
 Benj. T. Frederick vs. James Wilson. Appearances : 
 Timothy Brown, Attorney for Contestant. J. H. Bradley, 
 Attorney for Contestee. Contested Election. For the office 
 of Representative in Congress foi y the Fifth District of Iowa. 
 Cause pending in the House of Representatives of the 
 United States of America. Testimony taken before Eldon
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 289 
 
 Moran, Stenographer and Commissioner, during the months 
 of February/' March, April and May, 1883. Evidence on 
 part of Contestant. Session at Marshalltown, Iowa, March 
 5,1883. A. N. French, sworn on-part'" of contestant. You- 
 rnay-state if-you-are the-Auditor of Marshall County, Iowa, 
 and-have-now in-your possession the-poll-books which-were 
 returned to-you from (1) Washington Township? Yes-sir, 
 I-am Auditor, and-have them. Please take-the poll-book, 
 and read so that-the Commissioner can take-it down, giving 
 the-number' of votes that-were cast in-that Township, for 
 each Candidate for Congress at-the November election, 1882. 
 I-understand you want-the certificates just-as" they-were 
 returned? Yes-sir. For Representative in Congress there- 
 were 110 votes cast, of-which James Wilson had 45 ; Benj. 
 T. Frederick 52 /" and David Plainer 13. Is-that-the num- 
 ber of votes for each candidate returned in-the abstract 
 made by-the County canvassers to-the Board of State can- 
 vassers? (2) Yes-sir, the same-number. Please turn to-the 
 poll-book of Marietta Township and-state how-many-votes 
 were returned from-that township for-the office' of Repre- 
 sentative in Congress by-the Trustees of-that township, as 
 shown by-the poll-books, and read it off so that it-may-be 
 taken-down by-the Commissioner/' 'Reading from poll- 
 book) For Representative in Congress, Fifth District, there 
 were 123 ballots, of-which James Wilson had 81 ; Benj. T. 
 Frederick 37 ;'" and David Platner 5. Please turn to-the 
 poll-book of Le-Grande Township, and-state how-many votes 
 were cast for each Candidate at-the last November election, 
 (3) for-the office of Representative in Congress, Fifth Dis- 
 trict (Reading from poll-book) For-the office of-Repi-esen- 
 tative in Congress, Fifth District, there were 263 ballots 
 cast, of-which James Wilson' had 180 ; Benj. T. Frederick 
 78 ; and David Platner 5. Now state if-your returns made 
 for Washington, Bangor, and-Marietta Townships, were-the 
 same" as shown by-the poll-books I-will-have to look and 
 see. First, I- will ask-you, if -you have-a copy of-the returns 
 made by-the County canvasser"' to-the State-canvasser?
 
 990 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 Yes-sir, I-have. Now state as-to Washington Township, 
 how-many votes for-the office of Representative in Congress 
 were returned to-the State canvassers (4) for-this Township. 
 For James Wilson 45 ; B. T. Frederick 52 ; David Plainer 18. 
 Now state with-reference-to Marietta Township/ James 
 Wilson 81 ; B. T. Frederick 37 ; David Plainer 5. These 
 numbers correspond with-the poll-book. State, also, with- 
 reference-to Le-Grande Township. The schedule shows' 7 
 James Wilson received 180 votes ; B. T. Frederick 78 ; and- 
 David Platner 5. These numbers are the-same as those I 
 read from-the poll-book. Now state'" with-reference-to 
 Bangor. For-the office of Representative in Congress, there 
 were 89 ballots cast, of- which James Wilson had 75; (5) B. T. 
 Frederick 2; and-David Platner 12. The-abstract also 
 shows Wilson to-have received 75 ; Frederick 2 ; and Plat- 
 ner 12/ EXCUSED. (5955:15 4) 
 
 LESSON L. 
 SYSTEMS AND IMPKOVEMENTS. 
 
 516. Isaac Pitman, inventor of Phonography, the most 
 popular of all short-hand systems, began publishing half a 
 century ago. Within this time the sale of his principal in- 
 struction books may be roughly estimated as follows : The 
 Reporter's Companion, about 145,000 copies ; the Manual, 
 475,000 ; the Teacher, nearly one and a quarter million. He 
 has also published a dictionary, a phrase-book, and various 
 lesser works. His weekly Journal numbers twenty thousand 
 subscribers. This, however, does not convey an adequate 
 idea of the extent to which the system, of which he was the 
 chief originator, has spread abroad. Various teachers and 
 author?, embracing Mr. Pitman's own brothers and sons, 
 have published books, many of which have met with a large 
 sale. The Manual of Benn Pitman, the chief American
 
 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 291 
 
 author, has sold to the extent of about four hundred 
 thousand copies. The Muiison, Graham, Longley, and a 
 number of other systems, are all Pitmanic, each one however 
 being characterized by certain modifications, or improve- 
 ments, most of which are introduced in this chapter. The 
 Pitman system as a whole, in its present state of perfection, 
 is a growth, the result of almost countless experiments made 
 by conscientious workmen and thoughtful writers. Each 
 author has to some extent modified his own original presen- 
 tation of the system, but none, perhaps, have made so many 
 changes as Mr. Pitman himself. One of the inevitable con- 
 sequences of this gradual developement is that reporters 
 who learned ten, twenty, or thirty years ago, write the system 
 somewhat differently from each other, and a style differing 
 also from the system as it is taught to-day. The system as 
 presented by the inventor is that most employed in England 
 and the/British Provinces. The Benn Pitman system is the 
 one most followed in America. The chief features wherein 
 the English differs from the American Short-hand, are the 
 following: A new sign for h, struck both upwards and 
 downwards ; also different characters for to and y, and 
 compound characters for rch, rj, Ir, wh, hwl; a large initial 
 hook attached to curves for I; a large w-hook, changed to a 
 circle to indicate a preceding s, a somewhat different mark 
 for 01, etc. Within certain limits the straight stems are 
 lengthened to add tr, dr, thr. A final hook attached to a 
 lengthened stem is given force before the added tr or thr is 
 pronounced, as in thunder (lengthened th-n). For illustra- 
 tive words see Ls 1, 2 and 3. 
 
 The chief differences, however, consist in what is known 
 as the inverted vowel scale, by which the first place dots are 
 make to change places with the third place, it and tah being 
 written as we would write at and tea. The principal effect 
 of this change is this : that many first position words are 
 written in the third position, and vice versa. See L 3.
 
 *98 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAXD. 
 
 517. KEY. 
 
 1. (Isaac Pitman) Heaven hall yes widow torch dirge 
 whisper whalebone. 2. Printer conductor ponder slander 
 thunder color spoil square former. 3. Flesh flame eat tah 
 it at keep king knack. 4. (Munson) Hurry cure do-you pay- 
 your clatter tether to-receive to-trade by-our ought-we. 5. 
 (Graham) Active combative thief leave trial timbrel clerk 
 would-there. 6. I-have or-not but-not but-are-not of- 
 our-own and-of we-were what-would ye-were you- 
 wcre you-would. 7. Explanatory perniciousness in- 
 considerateness examination exasperation episcopacy in- 
 temperance we-were-to-have twenty forty. 8. (Longley) 
 Heap hawk gather has-there is-there building sinfulness 
 have-been. 9. (Scott-Browne) Dated talented mastered re- 
 mitted mentioned help inhale harbor. 10. (Watson) Plat- 
 ter trader damp poke beg puff cling pang. 11. Yoke 
 rambling receiving mason jealousy addition alienation 
 unmarried. 12. (Lindsley) Eat key tay sea oat ought 
 ooze saw taw aid. 13. (Other Authors) Loosest nicest 
 voted invaded charm warm sermon , thrive. 14. Sir Dear- 
 sir mar mortar mat extra. 15. Cap poke papa view love 
 lad do. 
 
 518. James E. Munson, author of the Complete Phono- 
 grapher, follows Isaac Pitman in the manner of vowel ex- 
 pression. He also adds a y-hook, attached to straight letters, 
 as in cure. It is employed chiefly, however, in phrases, as 
 do-you, pay-your. A large final hook, when written on the 
 r-hook side of straight stems, expresses tr, dr, thr, as in 
 clatter, tether. He also has a different character for h, and 
 writes words entirely below the line, or in what is called 
 the fourth position, to express a preceding to, as in to-receive. 
 He employs the w and y hooks quite extensively in phrase 
 signs, as in by-your ought-we. L 4. 
 
 519. Andrew J. Graham, author of Standard Phonogra- 
 phy, uses a hook similar to Munson 's ter hook to express 
 tivc, and lengthens the n-hook when attached to curved
 
 Plate 50* 
 
 > p ; 
 
 8 V_X 
 
 >.... T 
 
 Zl 
 
 8 L 
 
 JO 
 
 ie ^ 
 
 13 / 
 
 14 \ 
 
 V 
 
 L 
 
 > 
 
 r i i 
 
 I .1 I 
 
 [/ \ \ 
 
 C 3 
 
 c \ 
 
 - I
 
 294 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORTHAND. 
 
 stems to express,/" or v, as in thief or leave. When joined to 
 straight stems the r-hook is enlarged to add I, as in trial, 
 timbrel; and the 1-hook is enlarged to add r, as in tumble. , 
 clerk. A short, heavy dash is used in phrases for ther, as in 
 would-there. See L 5. A characteristic feature is a srrics 
 of phrase signs obtained by attaching hooks to vowel word- 
 signs, as in I-have, or-not, but-nol, etc. The coalescents are 
 enlarged to add were and would, as in we-were, what-would, 
 etc. See L 6. It is safe to say that no other system has been 
 elaborated to an equal extent. It is quite perfect in what 
 may be termed the mathematical sense; but there are so 
 many fine turns and delicately contrived characters in his 
 reporting style, that persons only who are hard students, 
 and possess considerable artistic ability, are capable of 
 making a success of it. The .common objection is the un- 
 usual number of contractions, a few of which, selected at 
 random, are given in L 7. 
 
 520. Elias Longley, author of the Eclectic Series, has a 
 still different character for h, struck both upwards and 
 downwards. He also uses the tr hook on straight stems, 
 writes vowels by the inverted scale, and adopts the Isaac 
 Pitman I and r hooks. Other features also of his system are 
 shown in L 8. His books are clearly written, and unusually 
 well suited to the purpose of instruction. 
 
 521. Scott-Browne. A popular device of this author is 
 the ed-tick, affixed to stems to signify the past tense, as in 
 added, talented, etc. L 9. He modifies h to indicate the 
 added I and r, enlarging the hook to indicate the first, and 
 shading the stem to indicate the second, as in help, harbor. 
 Mr. Scott-Browne has been a close student of the philosophy 
 of short-hand, and his theories are clearly set forth in his 
 text-books. 
 
 522. John Watson, of Maryland, has produced an excep- 
 tional book in regard both to the originality of its principles, 
 and the novelty of its teaching. He adopts the inverted .scale, 
 and lengthens all straight stems to add ter, as in platter, 
 trader. He employs a shaded up-stroke for mp, also writes
 
 BEPOBTINO STYLE OF SHORT-HAND - 295 
 
 the f-hook large, and uses the old f-hook to express k and g. 
 The 1-hook also is made large, and ing inverted when more 
 convenient, as in pang, L 10. He also makes various other 
 changes, a few of which are shown in L 11. 
 
 523. D. P. Lindsley, author of Takigraphy, transforms the 
 system completely, making use of the old material in con- 
 structing what is known as the connective vowel system. 
 Vowel signs of such a character are selected that they can be 
 written between stems without the pen being lifted from the 
 paper. Consonant position is not made use of, and hence 
 ruled paper is not strictly necessary in taking notes. In the 
 reporting style, however, most vowels are dropped, and 
 many word-signs and contractions made use of. The simple 
 style is easily learned, and the writing very legible. An 
 obvious disadvantage is that an entirely new style must be 
 learned before the student can report verbatim, or fill a 
 situation requiring a high degree of speed. For illustrative 
 words see L 12. 
 
 524. W. W. Osgoodby, author of Phonetic Short-hand, 
 adds a number of improvements, among which are the re- 
 duplicated loop, as in loosest, and the slanting ed-tick, as in 
 voted. See L 13. 
 
 525. Curtis Haven employs an entirely original vowel 
 scale, and makes use of consonant position to quite a con- 
 siderable extent. In the consonant alphabet he discards 
 several shaded stems, allowing the light mates to represent 
 both the cognate sounds. He employs a shaded up-stroke 
 forrrn, as in charm, warm. R is expressed by the up-stroke 
 only, the curved sign being used for v, as in thieve. L 13. 
 
 526. Prof. J. G. Cross, author of "Eclectic Short-Hand," 
 presents an entirely original system, of which one main 
 feature is that it is not phonetic, but rather what may be 
 termed orthographical, following the old spelling to a large 
 extent. Only a few shaded strokes are used, and there are 
 five consonant positions significant of the principal vowels. 
 These are also provided with stem signs, which are some- 
 times used. The alphabet is derived, not from the circle,
 
 206 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 like the Pitman, but from the ellipse, like the German system 
 of Gabelsberger. The common abbreviations, but not many 
 word-signs, are used. The system is expeditious, but it pos- 
 sesses neither the philosophical basis nor the broad capabili- 
 ties of the Pitman system. For illustrative words see L 14. 
 
 527. H. M. Pernin, author of Universal Phonography, 
 presents a system bearing some resemblance to the French 
 system of Duploye. Light lines only are used, the sub- 
 vocals, as 6, d, j, being written longer for distinction. The 
 chief vowels are written connectedly between stems, and 
 consonant position is not made use of. For illustrative 
 words see L 15. 
 
 528. There are numerous other authors and teachers, 
 more or less known to fame, who have devoted their efforts 
 to invent new systems or improve the old. A partial list of 
 these is given (American) : Morris, Marsh, Burns, Bishop, 
 Kimball, Day, Eames, Thornton, Dement, Jenkins, Barnes, 
 Rogers, Humphrey, Allen, Howard, Scovil, Boyle. Andrews, 
 Webster, Towndrow, Palmer, et al. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 529. So far as the student has time and disposition to do 
 so, he will find it both agreeable and profitable to examine 
 more closely the various systems, particularly the different 
 Pitman authors. After he has had considerable experience 
 in actual reporting, he may so far as he judges expedient, 
 adopt and incorporate into his style contrivances, hooks, 
 and word and phrase signs of other authors. He will need 
 of course to use discrimination in writing letters, employing 
 only those signs with which his correspondent is familiar. 
 But comparatively little time is required, and considerable 
 advantage may be gained, from learning enough of the dif- 
 ferent authors to enable the student to read the notes and 
 correspondence of other reporters. 
 
 530. EXERCISE 50. 
 
 Practice on the Vocabulary iintil you can write the 
 whole of it at dictation in twenty minutes.
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 A 
 
 
 Anno Domini 
 
 
 A hie-to 
 
 C ^ 
 
 (A.D.) 
 
 l[ / 
 
 Able-to-glve-lt 
 
 \ "> 
 
 Annual 
 
 ^1 I **~~ t/ 
 
 
 
 Antiquarian 
 
 
 Abundant 
 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 Accomplish 
 
 \ \ 
 
 Antiquity 
 
 ^"^ S ^ 9 ^^ 
 
 According 
 
 v \ 
 
 Anxiety 
 
 \ \ ** ' 
 
 
 _/ 
 
 Anyhow 
 
 
 Accordlng-to 
 Accordiug-to- 
 his-contract 
 
 c- ^c-^' 
 
 Anything 
 Apostle 
 
 rr Y \. 
 
 According-to- 
 
 
 Appear 
 
 
 the-instruction 
 
 
 
 
 Accuracy 
 Ace u rale 
 
 n n v 
 
 Appearance 
 Appeared 
 Applied 
 
 * 
 
 ^ 
 
 Acknowledge 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 
 
 Apply 
 
 \ \ 
 
 Acquiesce 
 Acquit 
 Act-of^congress 
 
 ~~) n^- 
 
 Appoint 
 Appointed 
 
 e ^ 
 
 ""T- 
 
 Actual 
 Acute 
 
 / 
 
 Appointment 
 Appoints 
 
 ^ * \4 
 
 Advantage 
 
 Zf 1 
 
 pprec 
 
 
 Advantageous 
 Advertise-iug 
 Advertisement 
 
 / 
 
 Apprehend 
 Apprehensive 
 Approve 
 
 , 
 
 1 ~t~> 
 
 vl^l ^ C 
 
 Affirmative 
 
 
 
 Are 
 
 V 
 
 After 
 
 CN 
 
 Aristocrat 
 
 \^ 
 
 Afternoon 
 
 ^v 
 
 Arrange 
 
 r 
 
 Afterward 
 
 v_ 
 
 Article 
 
 
 Again-and- 
 again 
 
 ^/ a- 
 
 As 
 As-a-matter-of- 
 
 ^ Q^ 
 
 Ago 
 
 ^ 
 
 fact 
 
 ^ 
 
 Agriculture 
 All 
 
 r T^-Tl \ 
 
 As-fast-as 
 As-great-as 
 
 o- O 
 
 Allow 
 
 (' 
 
 As-has 
 
 v> 
 
 Almighty 
 Almost 
 Almost-always 
 
 V, V^V^^ 
 
 As-his 
 As-it 
 As-lt-will 
 
 ) .....P... 
 
 
 Already 
 
 
 As-is 
 
 
 All-the- world 
 Altogether 
 
 I/ > 
 
 As-soon-as 
 Associate 
 
 O Q_J> I/ 
 
 
 
 Astonish 
 
 
 Always 
 Amanuensis 
 Ambiguity 
 
 (O^^o^^n 
 
 Astonishment 
 As-well 
 
 5 ) c 
 
 Amendment 
 
 
 At 
 
 
 An 
 
 
 At-all 
 
 
 Analogy 
 
 /-.^ ^ 
 
 At-all-events 
 
 _ 1 p p 
 
 And 
 
 Angel 
 
 / -7 
 
 At-all-lt8 
 At-all-times 
 
 
 Anguish 
 
 
 At-any-rate 
 
 b l^b <L>
 
 206 nEPOn 77.V3 S TYL F OF STIOR T-HAXD. 
 
 At-flrat 
 
 Call 
 
 
 
 At-lt . p 
 
 Campaign 
 
 ^"^ D 
 
 At-length -jr -j -J- 
 
 Cau-ii 
 
 
 
 At-once <>. 
 
 Cannot 
 
 3 \ 
 
 Avenue . V^^ \ 
 Average / 
 
 Can ' i 
 Capable 
 
 - A 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 Capital 
 
 
 Aware 
 
 V 
 
 Care 
 
 X*" 9 
 
 Awful 
 
 / X- 
 
 Catholic 
 
 c V 
 
 Awhile 
 
 Cs d 
 
 
 
 Bank-note 
 Baptist 
 Barrier 
 
 \\ V / 
 
 Censure 
 Certain 
 Certificate 
 
 <5 /) 
 
 Be 
 
 V 
 
 Certify 
 
 | 
 
 Because 
 Become 
 
 \ v_ 
 
 Challenge 
 Change-d 
 
 <y \. / / 
 
 Before 
 Beforehand 
 Began 
 
 1 1 
 
 Chaplain 
 Chapter 
 Character 
 
 J /c 
 
 
 Begin 
 
 HcKU" 
 
 * V 
 
 Characterize 
 Characterizes 
 
 n ^ 
 
 Behalf 
 
 ~ 3 \ 
 
 Child 
 
 *- * 
 
 Behind 
 l.eliold 
 Belief 
 
 _L \ v 
 
 Children 
 Christian 
 Christianity 
 
 / _mn 
 
 Belong 
 Belonged 
 Beneficial 
 
 I 
 
 Christianize 
 Circuit 
 Circulate 
 
 C- C^_^ 
 
 Benevolence 
 
 ^- 
 
 Circulation 
 
 
 Benevolent 
 Be-not 
 
 Bequest 
 
 V\ ^ 
 N 
 
 Circumstance 
 Circumstanced 
 
 Collect 
 
 *^>t cf 
 
 ^L 
 
 Belter-not - 
 
 Collect-on-de- 
 
 f 1 
 
 Belter-Ulan \ xi . / 
 
 livery (C.O.I).) 
 
 *" 1 c 
 
 
 \ ^-> V N/ 
 
 Collector 
 
 1 
 
 Bevond 
 
 
 
 
 Bll'l-of-sale 
 
 n \ ^\ 
 
 Come 
 
 
 
 Blunder 
 
 Nr S> 
 
 Commercial 
 
 
 Board 
 Board-ot-trade 
 Brilliancy 
 
 v -v, V^ 
 
 Commonwealth 
 Communication 
 Company 
 
 _n v 
 
 ^ x ^ 
 
 Brother 
 Brotherhood 
 But 
 
 By-the-flrst 
 
 V-^j ' 
 
 Comparative' 
 Compliance 
 Comprehend 
 
 x A_v, 
 
 By-way -of-lllus- 
 
 \ v^ t2 
 
 Comprehensive (\ o-^ | 
 
 t ration 
 
 ir"^ *" 
 
 Concern 
 
 V_^ J \_3 
 
 Calculate 
 
 
 Confession 

 
 VOCABULARY. 899 
 
 Confidential 
 
 
 Definition 
 
 * 
 
 Confidenual- 
 
 V V /r ' 
 
 Degree 
 
 <- 
 
 
 
 
 
 Congesuon 
 
 J \_s _ 
 
 
 
 Congratulate 
 Connection 
 Conscientious 
 
 C^ .- *^>\ 
 
 Deliberation 
 Delight 
 Delinquent 
 
 k r L 
 
 
 >J 
 
 Consequence 
 Consequent 
 Consequential 
 
 <^-o , -= 
 
 Deliver 
 Deliverance 
 Delivery 
 
 f J f 
 
 
 Consider 
 Consideration 
 Consistent 
 
 1 1 .p 
 
 Demonstration 
 Demoralize 
 Demoralization 
 
 L 
 
 Consonant 
 Constantly 
 Constitution 
 
 p p 
 
 Q ' ~P J 
 
 Denominate 
 Denomination 
 Denominational 
 
 J J J 
 
 {.... ._ 
 
 Constitution-of- 
 the-U.-S. . 
 Construct 
 Construction 
 
 u>- vi 
 
 Denounce 
 Dependent 
 Derivative 
 
 j- 1 v 
 
 Constructive 
 
 ^l 1 
 
 Derive 
 
 I ^ 
 
 Continue 
 
 L-/ L>i 
 
 Describe 
 
 
 Continued 
 
 Convenience 
 Co-operate 
 Correct 
 
 V^-Nt 
 
 Descriptive 
 Destiny 
 Determination 
 
 - Ki 
 
 Correspond 
 Countenance 
 Counterbalance 
 
 c $ ^ 
 ~^_9 " 
 
 Determine 
 Develop 
 Development 
 
 w 
 
 \ I <L 
 
 Courageous 
 Creature 
 Criticise 
 
 7 ...I... HD 
 
 Dld-not 
 Differ 
 Difference 
 
 JL l l 
 
 Criticism 
 
 
 
 
 Cross-examina- 
 
 . .. ^ 
 
 Different 
 
 
 tion 
 
 d^. 
 
 Difficult 
 Difficulty 
 
 1 c c 
 
 Cultivation 
 
 
 Dignity 
 
 
 Cure 
 Danger 
 
 
 
 Disadvantage 
 Disagree 
 
 L_ JD J- 
 
 Dark 
 Darken 
 Darkness 
 
 a A A_.. 
 1 x J 
 
 Disappear 
 Disconnect 
 Dishonor 
 
 
 Dare-not 
 Day-ol-the- 
 week 
 Dear 
 
 Dear-sir 
 December 
 Defendant 
 
 Jx cl~N L^ 
 
 Dls-member-ed 
 Dissatisfaction 
 Dissatisfy 
 
 Doctor 
 Doctrine 
 Do-it 
 
 K^b b 
 1 3 l
 
 800 
 
 REPOR r/.VO STYLE Of SHORT-HAXD. 
 
 Dollar-s 
 
 
 Everlasting-life 
 
 
 Domestic 
 Dominion 
 
 1 , 
 
 k-a l'"7i_x 
 
 Every 
 Every-one 
 
 ^/*- " ^ ^ 
 
 Do-not 
 
 
 Evidence 
 
 
 Downward 
 
 
 Examination 
 
 
 Due 
 
 J _ I L 
 
 Example 
 
 v -s_9 sTTi e-/ 
 
 During 
 Dwarf 
 
 1 7 ' 
 
 Excellence 
 Excellent 
 
 
 Each 
 
 n I/ 
 
 Exchange 
 
 
 Each-are 
 
 7 fl fl 
 
 Expect 
 
 . 
 
 Each-will 
 
 
 Expected 
 
 Q Q O. 
 
 Each-will-have 
 
 t / (j 
 
 Experience 
 
 \ "V-, i 
 
 East-and-west 
 E Ilk-lent 
 Elaborate 
 
 \ ^Jr\ 
 
 Explanation 
 Express 
 Expression 
 
 
 Electricity 
 
 1 
 
 Exquisite 
 
 
 Eloquence 
 Embezzle 
 
 C C* oT 
 
 External 
 Extinguish 
 
 ~^t 1 ~L 
 
 Emphatic 
 
 
 Extraordinary 
 
 
 Emphatically 
 Enclosure 
 
 ' V x X ^^^ 9 
 
 Eye 
 Eye-sight 
 
 s^> V P 
 
 Endeavor 
 
 
 Fact 
 
 
 Endless 
 Energy 
 
 ^r\ W 
 
 *^^ 
 
 Failure 
 Faithful 
 
 Vj^ V. 
 
 English-lan- 
 
 I 
 
 Falsehood 
 
 [ 
 
 guage 
 
 ^_~^_^ v-X\ 
 
 Familiar 
 
 ^Tt 
 
 Enlarge 
 
 ^-/ X) 
 
 Fear-of-God 
 
 \^f\ \- V 
 
 Enterprise 
 
 / 
 
 
 > 
 
 Equal 
 Equator 
 Especially 
 
 ^ ) 
 
 Feature 
 February 
 Fellow-citizen 
 
 L 
 i 
 
 
 \ 
 
 
 \. t 
 
 Essentially 
 Establlah-ed 
 Establishment 
 
 \ 
 
 L ) ) 
 
 Fellow-creature 
 Few 
 Fewest 
 
 ^_...^...U- 
 
 Estate 
 
 
 Finally 
 
 
 Estliuated-cost 
 Estlmated- 
 
 ) X- X 
 
 Finance 
 Finish 
 
 V Wj> w' 
 
 welght 
 
 1 
 
 First 
 
 ' 
 
 
 1 
 
 First-class 
 
 
 Estimation 
 Et ctetera (etc.) 
 
 ^~D P/ 
 
 Flve-or-slx 
 
 O-o ^ 
 
 Eternal 
 
 
 Follow 
 
 \y 
 
 
 
 For 
 
 ^fc_/^ 
 
 Eulogy 
 
 
 Foreign 
 
 \^_ i \ /) 
 
 Europe 
 
 
 
 
 European 
 
 } ^'* 
 
 Frever-and- 
 
 
 Ever 
 
 V V v /^^^ 
 
 ever 
 
 
 Ever-and-ever 
 
 \. 
 
 For-instance 
 
 V V. v 
 
 Ever las ting 
 
 
 For-it 
 
 \ J
 
 VOCABULARY. 801 
 
 Forsake 
 For-the-first- 
 tirae 
 For-the-most- 
 part 
 
 For-the-sake-of 
 Forthwith 
 Fortunate 
 
 Forward 
 Four-or-flve 
 Franklin 
 
 Frequent 
 From 
 From-flrst-to- 
 laat 
 
 Full 
 Fundamental 
 Furniture 
 
 Future 
 Gave-lt 
 Generation 
 
 Genial 
 Gentleman 
 Gentlemen 
 
 Give 
 
 Give-it 
 Given 
 
 Glve-us 
 Glorious 
 Glory 
 
 Good 
 Good-and-bad 
 Govern 
 
 Government 
 Governor 
 Great-Britain 
 
 Greater-than 
 Great-extent 
 Guilt 
 
 Guilty 
 Gypsy 
 
 uka 
 
 Had-lt 
 Had-not 
 Hall 
 
 Hand 
 Hand-in-hand 
 Hcudsome 
 
 -" ^ 
 
 Handwriting 
 Handy 
 Happen 
 
 Happiness 
 Happy 
 Hard 
 
 Hardware 
 Has 
 
 lias-Ilia 
 
 Hath 
 Have 
 Have-hai 
 
 Have-lf 
 Have-not 
 Hazard 
 
 He 
 Health 
 Hear 
 
 Heard 
 Heart 
 Heathen 
 
 Heaven 
 Height 
 Held 
 
 Help 
 Hence 
 Herald 
 
 Herein 
 Heretofore 
 Hesitate 
 
 Hesitation 
 He-supposed 
 High 
 
 Higher 
 Highest 
 Highly 
 
 Highway 
 Him 
 His 
 
 Hls-ls 
 Historian 
 History 
 
 Hold 
 Holiness 
 Holy 
 
 .S* '...ir^l.-A.-.. 
 1 
 
 
 ' * 
 
 ^ ^ S 
 
 s (\ ~^ 
 
 C 
 
 ^ 1 r 
 
 r\ ^ } 
 Z^ 1 
 
 ) \i 
 
 - - 
 
 ~\ D 
 
 ^ rf 
 
 u ~ 
 
 V^\ 
 
 o ' ^ V 
 
 _ ( i_ 
 
 S ' 
 
 "1 J"" 
 
 r ^^ 
 
 ~ > ^S^ 

 
 808 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 Home 
 Honestly 
 Honor 
 
 r ^ 
 
 ndivlduality 
 ndolence 
 Indulge 
 
 ^ r r 
 
 (a 
 
 ^ . 
 
 / 
 
 Honorable 
 
 
 ndustrions 
 
 Hope 
 How 
 
 However 
 How-long 
 Howsoever 
 
 ^-V A 
 
 ndustry v A "^\ " *\o 
 Infinite A J| 
 
 nfluence r 
 nfluentlal v_j> ^^nj V-J? 
 nformatlon 
 
 
 ~ V" ^ 
 
 ngenlouB 
 
 Human 
 
 
 In-hlB-descrip- ; ^ ^ 7=s J ^ 
 
 Human-life 
 
 
 tlon 
 
 / ^ >a 
 
 Human-nature 
 
 .. 
 
 n-hls-estlma- 
 
 O 
 
 Humor 
 
 ^_ ^^ 
 
 tion 
 In-hls-experl- 
 
 
 Hundred 
 
 f\ *"" ^ 
 
 ence 
 
 x^v ^^'^^ \ jj\\. 
 
 Humble 
 
 ^"" 1 ^^ 
 
 
 o >J ^^ 
 
 
 2*^ 
 
 slon 
 
 
 I 
 
 f~**^^ 
 
 In-hls-life 
 
 ,^ 
 
 I-am-wllllng 
 Idea 
 
 v ^~~f ^ 
 
 ;n-hlB-secret 
 In-his-uaual 
 
 O" y ^~<<J 
 
 Il-lt 
 
 
 Initial 
 
 
 If-vou-wlsh 
 Illegible 
 
 Imagine 
 
 ^" ^n-S f 
 / 
 
 n-order-that 
 n-order-to 
 n-polnt-of-faot 
 
 ^ ^ *^ 
 
 ' 
 
 Imaginable 
 
 . . 
 
 nquest 
 
 C~ ^-.sf 
 
 1-ina) -be-there 
 
 / J ^J 
 
 n-regard-to 
 
 " ' ^ ""\ 
 
 
 J ^f 
 
 In-reply-to 
 
 
 Imbecile 
 
 \ 
 
 
 
 Immediately 
 Importance 
 
 <~f ^ 
 
 n-response-to 
 n-seemlng 
 
 co -a-^^^a-^ 
 
 
 D 
 
 nslgulticance 
 
 
 Important 
 Impossibility 
 
 ^^ 
 
 nslgnlficant 
 
 
 
 Impossible 
 
 ... 
 
 n-some 
 nstructlon 
 
 /8-^ U 
 
 Improve-d 
 Improvement 
 In 
 
 _ _ - 
 
 nstructlve 
 n-supposlng 
 ntellect 
 
 <y -~_fl v- 
 
 ll X X ^ 
 
 Inaccurate 
 
 
 
 
 In-as-many 
 Inclination 
 
 Income 
 
 ^n^j^ 
 
 ntelllgence 
 ntelllgeut 
 Intelligible 
 
 ntent 
 
 7 - ^ 
 
 Incompetent 
 Incomplete 
 
 In-consldera- 
 
 ^ -^ ^ 
 
 nterchange 
 nterfere 
 
 
 tion 
 
 
 nternal 
 
 / 
 
 Indefinite 
 
 a/ ~^*\ 
 
 nterrogatlon 
 
 
 Independent 
 
 U L^ ' ^ 
 
 n-tlie-flrst- 
 
 X_y ^NO 
 
 
 
 place 
 
 
 In-describing 
 Indicate 
 
 
 
 In-the-world 
 
 ^ ^ ^-r "-1 
 
 Individual 
 
 ^s \_ 
 
 In-thls-clty 
 
 V ^^^^ 
 
 
 
 
 1 )
 
 VOCABULARY. 308 
 
 Invention _ _ _ ^ ^^. _ 
 
 Just-what .. ^ ^. 
 
 Investigate 
 Investigation 
 
 ^o^yVsr' 
 
 'Knowledge 
 Ladies-and- 
 
 / 7 f 
 
 
 
 gentlemen 
 
 
 Iowa 
 
 
 
 
 Irregular 
 
 V*V -v ""X 
 
 Landlord 
 
 s~^*i 
 
 Irresistible 
 
 ' ~"~ 
 
 Language 
 
 /^\ N ff ( _/ 
 
 
 
 Languish 
 
 
 Is 
 
 
 
 
 
 Is-as 
 
 o O O \ 
 
 Large 
 
 
 Is-his 
 
 
 
 Larger 
 Larger- than 
 
 .. / . 2 7 
 
 / r (/ " 
 
 Is-it 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 ^^.^ 
 
 Island 
 
 ) v p 
 
 Largest 
 
 s~ I 
 
 Is-said 
 
 
 Last-mail 
 
 / ^f^^^I 
 
 
 
 
 Laws-of-health 
 
 / S& 
 
 Is-sald-to-have 
 
 o 
 
 Laws-of-lile 
 
 /-\ X~N 
 
 Is-seen 
 
 r **-*s /^ 
 
 Lawyer 
 
 <* /^7 
 
 Is-such 
 
 / 
 
 Legible-y 
 
 / f 
 
 Issue 
 It-had 
 It-had-not 
 
 . 
 
 Liberty 
 Liberty-of-the- 
 people 
 Liberty-of-the- 
 
 .\. .NO 
 
 It-is simply 
 
 l" J 
 
 press 
 
 s> 
 
 It-is-something 
 
 1 1 
 
 Lord -Jesus- 
 
 s*~t S\ s o 
 
 It-is-sumcient 
 
 L L-s. 1 
 
 Christ 
 
 ( l\Df 
 
 
 O "^ GI^~^ D ) 
 
 Loves-ua 
 
 
 It-ought 
 
 ^^/ 
 
 Luxurious 
 
 
 It-ought-not 
 It-ought-to- 
 have-had 
 
 ' J t 
 
 Magazine 
 Magnanimous 
 
 ^-N_ X-N_T 
 
 
 
 Maintain 
 
 
 Its 
 It- will 
 It-will-have 
 
 L r r 
 
 Majestic 
 
 7- 7 ^ 
 
 
 b u 
 
 Majority 
 
 
 It-will have-had 
 
 
 
 
 It-will-not 
 
 
 Malpractice 
 
 d ^*\ ^~^~~^y 
 
 It-would 
 
 r .r 
 
 Man 
 
 ^ ^~^i / 
 
 
 l u .... . 
 
 Manager 
 
 
 It-would-have- 
 
 
 
 
 had 
 It-would-not 
 January 
 
 .-. .. 
 
 Manner 
 Manuscript 
 Marshall 
 
 V,Or-\*V 
 
 Jesus-Christ 
 
 
 May-as-well 
 
 
 Joint-committee 
 
 
 May-be 
 
 /^~ ^ ^ 
 
 Journal 
 
 
 May-not 
 
 ^~6 '"a 
 
 Joyous 
 Junior 
 
 Just-as -certain 
 
 Just-as-much-as 
 
 ...{.... ^ ^- 
 
 Measure 
 Medium 
 Member 
 
 Member-ol-the- 
 bar 
 
 -> -- - ^ 
 
 Just-as-well-aa 
 
 / ^/ / 
 
 Member of-the- 
 
 \\ ^ ^ /v^ 
 
 Just-been 
 
 >o X* 1 " \ 
 
 Legislature 
 
 \ 
 
 
 o o o 
 
 Memorandum 
 
 * 
 
 Just-had 
 
 
 
 <*'~3 
 
 Justlce-of-the- 
 
 / / o/ 
 
 Men 
 
 /^^v 
 
 Psace 
 
 
 Merciful 
 
 _.-.. C > C 
 
 Just-say-so 
 
 1 V J 
 
 Mercy 

 
 804 REPORTING 3TYLF OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 Mere ^^ ^ ^ ,. ' New- York-City 
 
 
 Messenger 
 Method 
 
 / ( 
 
 Next 
 Next- time 
 
 T^Z> I^-N 
 
 
 Methodlcal-ly 
 
 
 Non-appear- 
 
 
 Million 
 
 ^ 7 \^ J 
 
 ance 
 
 *}t\ ^_Oi f* 
 
 Minimum 
 
 (. ^ >^- >> ^-^ > 
 
 Non-conductor 
 
 \ 
 
 
 
 Nor 
 
 O I ^ 
 
 Mlnlster-ed 
 
 ^_ 
 
 
 1 
 
 Ministerial 
 
 s *^J 
 
 North 
 
 C-^v /J 
 
 Ministry 
 
 s~~**^ f) s~^^ /"I 
 
 North-America 
 
 ^ / ^_>^ ^-*Cf 
 
 
 ^^~~L-S ^^L^ 
 
 North-eastern 
 
 V vi 
 
 Minority 
 
 , >. 
 
 North-west 
 
 
 Monarch 
 
 1 '"""S 
 
 North-western 
 
 ^^^"v C^'v/' vLx 
 
 
 1 
 
 Ing 
 
 J 1 
 
 Monthly-report 
 
 
 
 
 More 
 
 ' *"" f s\ /^c 
 
 November 
 
 
 More-or-less 
 
 V/Vr^^-/ 
 
 Now 
 Number 
 
 "^ ^^ ^ 
 
 More-than 
 
 
 
 
 Mortgage 
 Most-Important 
 
 Most-likely 
 
 **-r** 
 
 Numerous- 
 questions 
 Nutshell 
 Obedience 
 
 j \ 
 } 
 
 Mostly 
 
 C. "N 
 
 
 
 Mr. 
 
 s-g^ S~~ 
 
 Obey 
 
 \ \ V 
 
 
 
 Object 
 Objection 
 
 \ \ \J 
 
 Much 
 
 
 
 
 Much-are 
 Much-qulcker- 
 
 / 7 /- 
 
 Objective 
 Obvious 
 
 V V 
 
 than 
 
 "/ / Z_C- D 
 
 Occur 
 
 X 
 
 Much-will 
 Much- will-have 
 Must-be 
 
 ..f. - / .-.^.-.- 
 
 Occurrence 
 Of 
 Official. 
 
 ^ N ^J 
 
 
 Must-expect 
 
 
 Oh 
 
 / 
 
 Must-like 
 
 ^ n ~^,f~~^ 
 
 Ohio 
 
 
 Must-make 
 
 S~t! S 
 
 On 
 
 1 C 
 
 Mv instructions 
 
 /~n ^_^ ^^ 
 
 On-either-hand 
 
 
 Myself 
 
 1 Q ^"^ 
 
 One-of-the-most 
 
 J 
 
 Mystery 
 
 ^ 
 
 One-of-the-best 
 
 <^^z ^-^ 
 
 Natural-ly 
 Nature 
 
 *-s 
 
 One-or-two 
 On-the-one- 
 
 
 Near 
 
 r Nfc- ^ 
 
 hand 
 
 f* rv 
 
 
 
 On-the-otber- 
 
 <; ~ A CL? J 
 
 Neglect 
 
 
 hand 
 
 
 Negligent 
 
 V 1 
 
 
 X/ 
 
 Negotiation 
 
 . ^ ^* * (_^/ 
 
 Only 
 
 Q__x < \ 
 
 
 
 Onward 
 
 . O 
 
 Neighborhood 
 
 
 Opens 
 
 
 Never 
 Nevertheless 
 
 Kevertheless-lt- 
 
 1 
 
 Opinion 
 Opportunity 
 Or 
 
 <\ k 
 
 New-Hamp- 
 Bhlre 
 
 vU- ^-^~v^ ^y^ 
 
 Organize 
 Ornamental 
 
 ..I? /^_H. 
 
 New-York 
 
 D ^ Or-not 

 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 805 
 
 Other 
 Ought 
 Ouglit-to-have 
 
 Our-instrnc- 
 
 tions 
 Our own 
 Ourselves 
 
 Postal-card 
 
 Posterity 
 
 Postmark 
 
 Post-master 
 
 Post-office 
 
 Postal-service 
 
 Poverty 
 
 Practicable 
 
 Practical 
 
 Recollect 
 
 Recollection 
 
 Recommend 
 
 Recommenda- 
 tion 
 
 Reconsider 
 Record 
 
 "\ - 
 
 -
 
 806 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 ' Reduction 
 
 X* 
 
 Seltlsh 
 
 
 Reference 
 Reflection 
 
 /\> / x^ 
 
 Senior 
 Sensation 
 
 Q Q -^N 
 -X I Q_C, 
 
 Reform 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 Reformation 
 Regular 
 
 xv. /v>/~" 
 
 Sentence 
 Sentiment 
 Set-forth 
 
 a^_i> ^ C 
 
 Regularity 
 Regulate 
 Regulation 
 
 X-1AV-3 
 
 Set-off 
 Seven-or-elght 
 Several 
 
 1 M <L 
 
 Relattnjr-to-the- 
 
 
 Shall 
 
 -_^/ / 
 
 subject 
 , Reliable 
 Reliance 
 
 c/4_^.^ 
 
 Shalt 
 Shelf 
 
 J J cX^ 
 
 
 \ 
 
 
 
 Religion 
 
 Religious 
 Rely 
 
 </ / cX 
 
 Short-hand 
 Should 
 
 Significance 
 
 z / 
 
 Remark 
 
 
 Significant 
 
 
 Remarkable 
 
 ^-^. C~> ~ 
 
 Signification 
 
 n e\ ^ s 
 
 Remember 
 
 \ \ 
 
 Similar 
 
 ?_ 
 
 Renounce 
 
 
 Similarity 
 
 
 Represent-ed 
 Representation 
 
 /*** /\ /\) 
 
 Simple 
 Simply 
 
 <5^^ tf^ tf^ 
 
 Republic 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Requisite 
 Respect 
 
 /\X-f A 
 
 Six-or-seven 
 Slander 
 
 o-rf'V. f\ 
 
 Respectability 
 
 \ 
 
 Some-one 
 
 1 
 
 Respectable 
 
 
 
 Something 
 
 
 Responsible 
 
 A. A A 
 
 Sometime 
 
 
 
 s*\s\ /\ 
 
 
 6 ^ (T"N S _./ ^s/ ~N 
 
 Revelation 
 Revolution 
 
 \ \ 
 
 Somewhat 
 South America 
 
 CO 
 
 Roll 
 
 i /Q__. cX 
 
 South-eastern 
 
 / &" 
 
 Romantic 
 
 ' 
 
 Speak 
 
 \ir^ ^ 
 
 Rule 
 
 
 Special 
 
 
 Said-to-hare 
 
 ~Va_^. ,/.... 
 
 Specially 
 
 \ \J 
 
 Salvation 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 
 Satisfaction 
 Satisfactory 
 
 Satisfactory- 
 manner 
 Satisfactory- 
 proof 
 Satlsfy-Hwt 
 
 " u t~~ 
 
 Specialty 
 Speech 
 Spirit 
 
 Spiritual 
 Spoke 
 Spoken 
 
 M-AJL 
 ^C \ \ 
 
 Savior 
 Scorn 
 
 e y *~" 
 
 Square 
 Squirrel 
 
 Q , p 
 
 Scripture 
 
 X^ ft / 
 
 Stability 
 
 \ ^rX l\ 
 
 
 Season 
 
 DA 
 
 Statesman 
 
 
 Secure 
 
 *~^^ 
 
 Stenographer 
 
 f_ t ^"^ > \ Q^_X 
 
 Self-esteem 
 
 
 
 Stenographic 

 
 VOCABULARY. 8OT 
 
 Stenography 
 StenoKraphic- 
 society 
 Stumble 
 
 -~^ 
 
 There 
 Therefore 
 There- would- 
 not 
 
 9 \ 
 
 > 9 
 
 Subject 
 Subjective 
 Subsequent 
 
 \ V %, 
 
 They 
 They-are 
 They-are-not 
 
 C 3 
 
 Such-are 
 Such-are-not 
 8uch-a-on 
 
 / 9 S 
 
 Thev-wlll 
 This-ls 
 Thls-has-never 
 
 f ^ ^, 
 
 Such have 
 Such-have-had 
 Such-ought-to- 
 have 
 
 Such-ought- to- 
 hv-hd 
 Such-were 
 Such-were-not 
 
 f f 
 
 Thls-system 
 Thls-will 
 Those 
 
 Thou 
 Though 
 Three-or four 
 
 ^ / H-- 
 
 f 
 
 ~T~ 
 
 1 
 
 Such-will 
 Such-would 
 Suifcient 
 
 ^ -r*~> 
 
 Throughout 
 Thus 
 Till 
 
 / r 
 
 5 -\ 
 
 Suggestion 
 Suppress 
 Supremacy 
 
 xX^ 
 
 J 
 
 Till-lt 
 To 
 To-be 
 
 f x v 
 
 > ' 
 
 Surprise 
 Suspension 
 Systematic 
 
 \o p 
 i *~- 
 
 To-become 
 Together 
 Told 
 
 .j^_ r 
 
 Takes-us 
 Tavern 
 Tedious 
 
 Lo Lj 1 
 
 Too 
 Toward 
 Towards 
 
 \ i t 
 
 Telegram 
 Tell 
 Tell-lt 
 
 p r 
 
 To-wlt 
 Transcript 
 Treacherous 
 
 > K } 
 
 Tell-us 
 Temperament 
 Temperance 
 
 Temperate 
 Temporal 
 Tendency 
 
 E U, k 
 
 k ^*\/ ^ -\ 
 
 True 
 Try-to-have 
 Tuition 
 
 Twelve 
 Twist 
 Two 
 
 1 j 
 4 J i 
 
 C f v 
 
 Termination 
 Territory 
 Testament 
 
 V\P V <k 
 
 Two-or-three 
 Unconcern 
 Under 
 
 v v - 
 
 Testimony 
 Thank 
 That 
 
 That- la^to- say 
 The 
 Them 
 
 K-* ^L ( 
 
 Undergone 
 Uniform 
 Union 
 
 Unite 
 
 United-States 
 Unity 
 
 i 
 
 V ' (
 
 80S REPORTING 6TYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 
 
 Universal 
 
 
 Wben-lt 
 
 
 Universe 
 
 ^\f^~ *X ^\ 
 
 Whensoever 
 
 C^ ^"~"v / 
 
 University 
 
 v | 
 
 Where 
 
 ^" ^ 
 
 Unless 
 
 ' 
 
 rVTieresoever 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 Unpractlced 
 Unquestionable 
 
 Q__P V^N.^ ' ? 
 
 Wherewith 
 Whether 
 
 ^ <s \^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 IVhlch 
 
 ' 
 
 Unscrlptaral 
 
 Unseasonable 
 Unselfish 
 
 _Li "3 
 
 W Inch-are 
 iV'hlch are-not 
 
 / ? ' 
 
 
 \ 
 
 iVhlch-are-to- 
 
 
 Until 
 
 
 have 
 
 
 Until-lt 
 Upon-bls 
 
 c. \ 
 r 
 
 Whichever 
 Whi3h-had-not 
 
 / 
 
 Upon-lt 
 Upward 
 
 i 1 
 
 > V N 
 
 WJ.lch-have- 
 had 
 Whlch-oughV- 
 to-have 
 
 i ..{ Jl. 
 
 
 * 
 
 Whlch-ought- 
 
 
 Use (noun) 
 
 . 
 
 not 
 
 
 Use (verb) 
 Usually 
 
 -X -_} s 
 
 7 I 
 
 Whlch-not 
 Which- were-not 
 Which-will-not 
 
 <y */* 
 
 3 
 
 Vacanoy 
 Value 
 
 1 ^\ 
 
 Whlch-would- 
 
 f (T 
 
 Very 
 
 V_ C ' 
 
 have-had 
 While 
 
 
 r~rr~ 
 
 / 
 
 Very-well 
 
 ) 
 
 Whilst 
 
 
 
 Virtue 
 
 ^^\S~ cv J 
 
 
 
 Washington 
 
 '~~" 
 
 White 
 Who 
 
 / c 
 
 Watch 
 
 . J 
 
 Whoever 
 
 
 "Water 
 
 / """^v c 
 
 
 
 We 
 
 
 Who -have 
 
 / _/^ XJJ \ 
 
 
 A 
 
 Whole 
 
 ^ . -yUJT. 
 
 We-always-Uke- 
 
 
 Wholesale-store 
 
 
 to-have 
 We-are 
 
 C~X~~\. 1 / s 
 
 Wholly 
 Whom 
 
 s~ . 
 
 We-are-not 
 
 
 Whosoever 
 
 I ^^ 
 
 Welcome 
 We-may 
 "We-may-be 
 
 c~^ ^ 
 
 Why-not 
 Will 
 Willingly 
 
 .l...r cr 
 
 We-may-be- 
 
 
 Will-not 
 
 c ^ 
 
 able-to 
 
 ^^**> C^^fek C 
 
 Wilt 
 
 f 3 (J cX_x 
 
 We-must-b 
 
 
 Wisconsin 
 
 
 Were 
 
 \ 
 
 
 
 Western 
 We*t-Vlrglr.li 
 
 S" 
 
 *}/> ^\ 6 
 
 Q ON .,, 
 
 Wisdom 
 With 
 Withdraw 
 
 ^ c S 
 
 We-wlll 
 
 j 
 
 
 
 W- will-not 
 
 \^^^ 
 
 Wlth-hlm 
 
 Within 
 
 (j (r> 
 
 What 
 Whatever 
 
 (j 
 
 Wlthln-a-week- 
 or-two 
 
 C^^ *~ ^ 
 
 
 When 
 
 ^ ^ ( i 9 C ^- / V 
 
 Wlth-me 
 
 
 Whence 
 
 ^. 
 
 Wlth-iny 
 
 _ 
 
 Whenever 
 
 
 Without 

 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 309 
 
 With-reference- 
 
 to 
 
 With-regard-to 
 Wltu-respect-to 
 
 "With-whom 
 
 Witness 
 
 Woman 
 
 Women 
 
 Word 
 
 Word-of-God 
 
 Worker 
 
 World 
 
 Would 
 
 Ye 
 
 Year-s 
 Yearly 
 
 Yesterday 
 
 Yet 
 
 You 
 
 Against 
 Kmcacy 
 Perfect 
 
 Mystery 
 
 Manufacture 
 
 Manufactory 
 
 Right-hand 
 
 Signify 
 
 You re-rery-truly 
 
 Young 
 
 Youngest 
 
 Your 
 
 Your-favor 
 
 Yourself 
 
 Yourselves 
 
 Your-Btatement 
 
 Yours-trmly 
 
 Youth 
 
 r 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 \
 
 SPIRITUAL FREEDOM. 
 
 ^~t_s \ / U> J "N? 
 
 /V^V^^X^^^.^/ 
 
 -V 
 
 rv 
 
 / L 
 
 ) ' 1^1 ' 1 
 
 /, +^^ rjr \^^s 
 
 ? ' ^ ^C-p * 
 
 ../ Vo L , ' )/\3 v 
 
 / 
 
 - 
 
 "1 o 
 
 V - 
 
 .No L..^ 
 
 L 
 
 - -P 
 ' 
 
 7^1 
 
 V, r 
 
 ,
 
 FAC SIMILES. 
 
 Short-hand notes as actually produced at a high rate of 
 speed, present an appearance very different from the char- 
 acters contained in the engraved pages of this book. The 
 higher the speed, the greater the variance from an exact 
 standard. We present a few specimens, but not for criti- 
 cism or imitation. They were executed by teachers in 
 different schools in which this book is used. The transla- 
 tion is: " You may state your name, age, place of residence 
 and occupation; also, whether or not you are acquainted with 
 the plaintiff" in this action." The student, while he may ad- 
 mire the ease with which a stenographer may read very 
 wretched looking notes, should nevertheless stick as close to 
 the standard as possible. 
 
 No. 1 was written at the rate of 150 words per minute; 
 No. 2, 175 per minute; No. 3, 216; No. 4, 200; No. 5, 200. 
 
 f "-> / H" u ~l 
 
 \ s. 
 
 v^ 
 
 (311)
 
 DEFINITION OF TERMS. 
 
 Stenography. A. system of rapid writing; Short-band. 
 
 PhonegrapKg. Sound- writing; a phonetic system of Short-hand. 
 
 Word-Sign. An abbreviated outline from which some of the conso- 
 nants are omitted. 
 
 Sign- Word. A word which Is provided with a sign, or abbreviated out- 
 line. 
 
 Phrateograph. A character expressing more words than one, formed by 
 writing a number of words without lifting the pen. 
 
 Phrate-^Hgn. An abbreviated phraseograph. 
 
 Phraseogram. An assemblage of words which are expressed by a 
 phrase-sign. 
 
 Consonant Stem. -Any letter of the consonant alphabet, whether stand- 
 ard length, shortened or lengthened. 
 
 Adjvnctive Sign. Any character or expedient, other than the letters of 
 the alphabet, which is employed to express a consonant sound ; e. g., the 
 s-circle, n-hook, st-loop, einp, etc. 
 
 Verbatim. Word for word. 
 
 Notes. Matter written in Short-hand ; Stenographic manuscript. 
 
 IAst- Wordt. Series of words to be written according to the rules which 
 Just precede them. See sections 24 and 54. 
 
 Speed Sentence. The sentence which is to be written a given number of 
 times in one or two minutes. See sec. 89. 
 
 Abbreviations. L 1, L 2, L 8, etc., refer respectively to Lines 1. 2, 8. of the 
 engraved plates. 
 
 Type- Writer. Refers either to a writing machine, or the person who 
 operates it. For distinction, the operator is sometimes called a type- 
 writist, or a type-operator. The name " type-writer," however, as desig- 
 nating the person, is gaining currency, and may well be adopted, since 
 writing machines are usually called by a specific name, as the Remington, 
 Caligraph, Hammond, etc. 
 
 Typoicript. Refers to type-written manuscript, sometimes called simply 
 "type-writing." The name Typograph has also been applied to the instru- 
 ment itself.
 
 SUGGESTIONS. 
 
 " HAVE FAITH IN SHORT-HAND. There IB probably no other one thing 
 that has caused BO many people to fail in their endeavors to become re- 
 porters as a lack of confidence in Short-hand. Too often we hear begi ti- 
 ners say. I will try it and see whether I can succeed or not.' The young 
 man or woman who, after seeing that thousands of others have m de a 
 success of Short-hand, cannot say, 'I w'M succeed,' had better not -peril 
 time or money upon it, or, in fact, upon anything else that requires a li ;tle 
 study and application. 
 
 ' Nothing is more absurd than to hear a certain class of people decry- 
 ing Short-hand, when in fact they know nothing at all about it. We ht - 
 known many young people who would have become excellent reporter- , 
 had they not been induced to give up the idea of learning Short-hand by 
 the advice of persons who had never before even heard of Stenography. 
 
 "The young man or woman who takes up the study of Short-hand will 
 surely be compelled to endure the constant cry that there is an ove>- 
 supply. To be sure there is an ' over-supply ' of Short-hand writers, bo 
 ra there an over-supply of workmen in every industrial pursuit; yet 
 people go on learning the various trades just as though the cry had never 
 been heard. The over-supply comes from that large class who oi.ly do 
 things by halves. We have all heard the cry of an over-supply of law- 
 yers, teachers, carpenters, blacksmiths, etc., yet a good lawyer, teacher 
 or carpenter is never at a loss for something to do. You never hear of a 
 man who stands well up in his business or profession making any com* 
 plaint of the competition which he may have. People who can do their 
 part well are always in demand." 
 
 "The Stenographer, like everybody else, must, in a certain sense, be a 
 machine. This arises from the fact that in many cases confidential mat- 
 ter of the gravest importance is dictated to him, and unless he 
 exerts the utmost care, he will be apt, inadvertently it may be, to betray 
 a knowledge of his employer's affairs to those who would take advantage 
 of It. Again, it frequently occurs in some kinds of business that the 
 Stenographer is approached for the special purpose of getting him to 
 divulge his employer's intentions or plans. Attempts may even be made 
 to bribe him, in order to secure the desired information. Aside from the 
 moral phase of the question, the Stenographer can by no means afford to 
 betray his employer's secrets to others. Once let it be proved that he has 
 done such a thing, and his prospects as a reporter will be ruined." 
 
 From "Orm HUNDRED VALUABLE SUGGESTIONS TO SHORT-HAND 
 STUDENTS," by StUby A. Moron, Short-Hand InatituU, Michigan University.
 
 SttORT-HfVND DICTIONARY 
 
 8KNT POSTPAID TO ANY ADDRESS FOB $1.00 
 
 Prepared specially for young stenographers and stu- 
 dents of the Pitman System 
 
 Handy size; fits the pocket. Dimensions: Thick- 
 ness, 8-8 of an Inch; width, 8 8-4 Inches: length, Q% In- 
 ches; weight, 6 oz. 
 
 Bound In cloth; stained edges; enameled paper; 
 clear type and engraving; excellent press-work. 
 
 The book contains 150 pages; 6000 characters rep- 
 resenting all commonly occurring words whose out- 
 lines are doubtful or uneertain. 
 
 The Intelligent learner does not require a Dictionary 
 of huge size containing thousands of words which 
 are perfectly easy, and ten of thousands of rare words 
 which occur only once in a life-time. The engraved 
 characters and corresponding words are printed two 
 columns to the page and arranged alphabetically. 
 
 Most common words are easy to write In Short-hand 
 the proper forms being determined at a glance. Such 
 are MAKE, BLAME, TIME, DO, MUSCLE, PRESERVE, MIM- 
 EOGRAPH. To know how to express such words no 
 student ever needs a dictionary. They are omitted 
 from this list because they would only be In the way. 
 Those only are included which are both common and 
 difficult; and since the list Is not lengthy, this little 
 book Is suitable not only as a pocket reference book, 
 but for actual school room use. It will be time well 
 spent If the learner will copy each page a score of 
 times. 
 
 Get a Pocket Dictionary because It makes hard 
 words easy; it saves labor and prevents discourage- 
 ment; It will make you a better stenographer; because 
 it Is low-priced and amply complete. 
 
 Published and for sale by 
 
 THE MOHAX SHORT-HAND Co., ST. Louis, Mo.
 
 WOR 1 
 
 49 YOU 
 
 o^ Worse 
 
 x^ Yawl 
 
 <\ Worship 
 
 <y 
 
 "\ Worshipper 
 
 fc/l Worth 
 
 t Yawn 
 
 u 
 
 Ye 
 -Year 
 
 V TT \Ji 111 
 
 ( ^(/ v Worthless 
 
 ^V Yearly 
 
 A Worthlessness 
 3 Would 
 
 ^ Yearn 
 
 />" Yellow 
 
 Xl Write 
 Writing 
 
 f Yes 
 \s\ Yesterday 
 
 /^-^ Written 
 
 X- 
 
 Yet 
 ^ Yield 
 
 Lxenia 
 
 
 ^, Xenophon 
 \^^ Xerxes 
 
 <^s S Yonder 
 'C York 
 
 n YOU 
 
 Y 
 
 s^x Young 
 
 1 Yacht 
 
 x^? Youngster 
 
 O?? Yankee 
 
 f Your 
 
 ^-^ ^j Yankton 
 
 ^ Your-favor 
 
 Yard 
 S Yarn 
 
 S^-t Your-last-letter 
 C Yourself
 
 RIGHT TO THE POINT. , 
 
 The beat email Dictionary extant. H. D. CADMAW , 
 Principal Short-hand Department, lleald's Bu&iueu 
 College, San Krunciaco. 
 
 Most practical series of short-hand text-books ever 
 pnblUhed. W. P. POTTEB. Short-hand Teacher, St. 
 Louis. 
 
 Best adapted* of all for actual School-room use. 
 LYMAM HAKFOBD, Teacher H.gh School, Watsonville, 
 Calif. 
 
 Tour Dictionary is just the thing. W. N. PHILIPS, 
 Principal Mas-t-y business College, Montgomery, Ala. 
 . The Reporting Style is admirable the best Short- 
 hand instruction book I ever examined. J NO. C. 
 HUGH, Teacher Femcle College, Mansfield, La. 
 
 Tour Dictionary is the finest book of the kind I 
 have ever Be--n. KMELINB D. MAHSTON, Teacher, 
 aomerviile, Teuu. 
 
 The very best text-books on the market. B. E. 
 PABKEK. Prin ipal Department of Business, Otterbein 
 University, tte&terville, Ohio. 
 
 The Reporting Style is the most practical Short-hand 
 book I have ever seen W. C. HOLMES, Law Sten- 
 ographer, Waycross, Ga. 
 
 Have tried many books find Moran's Reporting 
 Style to be the be.-t. F. L. HAMLIN, President Col- 
 lege of Commerce, East St. Louis, 111. 
 
 The handy little Sign-book is especially useful. 
 J. M. BAUNKS, Short-hand Teacher, St. Louis. 
 
 Have ased the Reporting Style some years find It 
 very satisfactory. S. L. OLVKB. Principal St. LouiB 
 Commercial College. 
 
 Tour Dictionary gives eminent satisfaction. -E. 
 H. FRITCU, Principal Southwestern Business College, 
 St. Louis. 
 
 TheReporiing Style is superior to any other text- 
 book on the market ased it eight years. ELIZABETH 
 IRISH. University Business College, Iowa City. 
 
 Tour Short-hand instruction book was last evening 
 adopted for use in our Hi^h School W. W. CHAL- 
 MXBS, Snpt. of Instruction, Toledo, O. 
 
 Ths Reporting Style is eminently practical con- 
 venient for the teacher, stimu ating to the student. 
 F. V. BBOCK, Teacher High School, Evansville, Ind. 
 
 No other Short-hand text-book even approaches 
 the Reporting Style in thoroughness, clearness and 
 directness M. O. GBAYK?, Principal Normal Col- 
 lege, I'et-.skey, Mich. 
 
 PtTBLISHBD BY 
 
 MORAN SHORT-HAND COMPANY 
 
 SAINT LU1S, U. S, A.
 
 PRICE 25 CENTS. 
 
 MORAN'S 
 
 Shorthand Sign-Book. 
 
 FITS YOUR VEST POCKET 
 
 o 
 
 Contains all the abbreviated Word 
 and Phrase Signs in the Pilman Sys- 
 tem. Arranged both Alphabetically 
 and in Lessons. Since all v.hese 
 characters are to be memorized, it 
 requires no argument to convince 
 you that it is a sensible plan always 
 to have this little Sign-book with you 
 to refer to and study spare hours. It 
 is complete, handy, cloth-bound. 
 The demand for it proves its popu- 
 larity, We have sold upwards of 
 30,000 of these wonderful little book- 
 lets. They are used regularly in 
 many of the best Colleges, such as 
 
 The Heald Business College Chain, Calif. 
 
 The Ann Arbor High School. 
 
 Lyons Business College, Terre Haute, Ind. 
 
 City High School, East St. Louis, 111. 
 
 Caswell School of Short-hand, New Bed- 
 ford, Mass, 
 
 Fettipas School of Short-hand, Halifax, 
 Nova Scotia. 
 
 CentralBusiness College, St. Louis. 
 
 Johnson Business College, Ft. Madison, la. 
 
 The very idea of a Sign-Book is our 
 own invention, the popularity of which 
 is attested by the number of imitations. 
 The Moran Sign-Book, however, will 
 continue to be the standard. Send the 
 price, 250, in stamps. 
 
 ORDER TO-DAY. 
 
 Address 
 
 MORAN SHORT-HAUD Co.? 
 1523 Hickory St. ST. LOUIS.
 
 LETTER-WRITING CLUB. 
 
 Membership, one year 
 
 50c 
 
 Persons studiously Inclined, seeking self-Improve- 
 ment, may become members, and are Introduced by 
 card to other members with whom they may cor- 
 respond, discussing some topic of mutual interest. 
 
 In this way the habit Is formed of study, reflection 
 and the expression of thought in good language. 
 
 The way to learn Letter-writing is to write letters. 
 As a business qualification and social accomplish- 
 ment, the art of letter-writing stands at the head. In 
 this age it is simply indispensable. 
 
 A well-written, clearly composed, intelligible letter, 
 Is the golden key which unlocks the gates leading to 
 business success and social preferment. 
 
 The practice of corresponding with Intellectual 
 friends is a source of pleasure, profit and encourage- 
 ment. The Club numbers hundreds of members and 
 the enrollment Is growing constantly. 
 
 The purpose of this 'Bureau is to enable students and 
 others to become acquainted, in order that they may 
 discuss on paper the subjects studied, also various 
 topics of mutual interest- 
 Through this medium any earnest student may se- 
 cure one or more desirable correspondents for the 
 purpose of exchanging opinions, examining one an- 
 other's exercises, comparing notes and giving mutual 
 encouragement. 
 
 Skill in letter-writing, a ready knowledge of English 
 composition, accuracy of expression, self-reliance and 
 the habit of Independent thought, are amongst the 
 favorable results attained. 
 
 When applying for membership, give your full name 
 and address, age, occupation, educational advance- 
 ment, naming branch of study in which you are most 
 Interested. 
 
 Address orders and inquiries to the 
 
 CENTRAL BUSINESS COLLEGE, ST. Louis.
 
 DEMAND FOR SHORT- HAND TEACHERS. 
 
 A practical knowledge of Short-hand and Typewrit- 
 ing is so useful and so great a personal convenience to 
 business men, professional people, teachers, students, 
 almost everyone in fact, that it is not surprising that 
 millions of people are wanting to learn. Teachers are 
 scarce. 
 
 Stenography is now taught in the High Schools of 
 all the leading cities, and many smaller cities and 
 towns are wanting instructor^; but they are not to be 
 had. 1 do not hesitate to recommend educated young 
 people to qualify as Short-hand teacherg; providing of 
 course'you have a natural bent for the teaching profes- 
 sion. When you become a skillful Short-hand In- 
 structor, profitable employment is assured. The work 
 is interesting and affords ample scope for promotion- 
 The teachers are paid from $50 to $150 a month. 
 
 We conduct a special Normal Class in which stu- 
 dents are fitted for positions as teachers of Sten- 
 ography. Through our Book Publishing business we 
 have frequent calls for competent instructors. It 18 
 simply a matter of business advantage for us to fur- 
 nish teachers who are qualified and able to render 
 satisfaction. In most instances it is required that the 
 teacher be reasonably well acquainted with the series 
 of books we publish. 
 
 If you wish to become a Short- hand teacher, attend 
 our Normal Class, conducted by Eldon Moran, author, 
 or take i special course by mall. Terms very reason- 
 able. In most every instance we have been able to se- 
 cure desirable positions for those finishing this course. 
 
 For particulars address 
 
 MORAN SHORT-HAND Co., ST. Louis, Mo.
 
 +* AFFORDING THE YOUNG * 
 
 Inspiration XCntertaJnment; 
 
 Instruction 
 
 SELF-HELPER 
 
 A MAGAZINE OF OPTIMISM AND SELF-BETTERMENT. 
 
 PUBLISHED MOlfTHLY IN THK INTEREST OF 
 
 MORAN-PITMAN SHORT-HAND STUDENTS 
 
 POPULAR EDUCATION, HOME STUDY, SELF-HELP 
 
 SHORT-HAND DEPARTMENT CONDUCTED PERSON- 
 ALLY BY ELDON MORAN, EDITOR 
 
 Forty-eight pages. Handy size. Snbsc-'- : -r. ririce, 25c. a year (stamps) 
 Send 2-cent stamp r~ ..:. . -opy. 
 
 ADDRESS The SELF-HELPER PUB. CO., 
 
 SAINT LOUIS, U. 8. A. 
 
 ^M OUR SPECIALTY- 
 
 X^x- 3 ** . _J 
 
 OOtiTLiEGEJ OATAIXXJS 
 SCHOOLi JOURNALS 
 FOLDERS 
 
 TEACHERS' TESTIMONIALS 
 LEAFLETS 
 
 PORTRAIT OA.RDS ^- -J OFFICE STATIONBRT 
 
 ^GENERAL JOB PRINTING-- 
 
 SEND FOR ESTIMATES AND PRICES. 
 
 No matter whit you may want in the printing line, send us a 
 brief description of your requirements, and a reasonable and prompt 
 estimate will be furnished. Have on hand extensive supply of educa- 
 tional cuts, Shorthand engravings, etc., for free use of patrons. 
 
 HOME PRINTING COMPANY, 
 
 . LOUIS. MO.
 
 UNIVERSUTY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 
 
 Los Angeles 
 This book is DUE on the last date stamped below. 
 
 r 
 
 Form L9-25r;i-9,'47(A5618)444 
 
 UNIVERSITY ol CALIFORNIA 
 
 AT
 
 UC SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
 
 A 000137187 1 
 
 _ > /. . 
 
 ^;- 
 
 , AS 
 
 M?93r 
 1909